View TG700_1732635.PDF datasheet online --- IC-ON-LINE

Datasheet File OCR Text:

user manual TG700 tv signal generator platform TG700 tv signal generator platform ag7 audio generator agl7 analog genlock module atg7 analog test generator avg7 analog video generator awvg7 analog wideband video generator bg7 black generator dvg7 digital video generator hdlg7 hd dual link video generator hdvg7 hdtv digital video generator 070-a799-56 this document supports firmware version 4.3 and above. www.tektronix.com www..net
this volume contains the following user manuals: h TG700 tv signal generator platform user manual h ag7 audio generator user manual h agl7 analog genlock module user manual h atg7 analog test generator user manual h avg7 analog video generator user manual h awvg7 analog wideband video generator user manual h bg7 black generator user manual h dvg7 digital video generator user manual h hdlg7 hd dual link video generator user manual h hdvg7 hdtv digital video generator user manual
user manual TG700 tv signal generator platform www.tektronix.com
copyright ? tektronix. all rights reserved. licensed software products are owned by tektronix or its suppliers and are protected by united states copyright laws and international treaty provisions. tektronix products are covered by u.s. and foreign patents, issued and pending. information in this publication supercedes that in all previously published material. specifications and price change privileges reserved. tektronix and tek are registered trademarks of tektronix, inc. contacting tektronix tektronix, inc. 14200 sw karl braun drive p.o. box 500 beaverton, or 97077 usa for product information, sales, service, and technical support: h in north america, call 1-800-833-9200. h worldwide, visit www.tektronix.com to find contacts in your area.
warranty 2 tektronix warrants that this product will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of shipment. if any such product proves defective during this warranty period, tektronix, at its option, either will repair the defective product without charge for parts and labor, or will pr ovide a replacement i n exchange for the defective product. parts, modules and replacement products used by te ktronix for warrant y work may be new or reconditioned to like new perfo rmance. all replaced parts, modules and products become the property of tektronix. in order to obtain service under this warranty, customer must notify tektronix of the defect before the expiration of the warranty period and make suitable arrangements for the performance of service. customer shall be responsible for packaging and shipping the defective product to the service center designated by tektronix, with shipping charges prepaid. tektronix shall pay for the return of the product to customer if the shipment is to a location within the country in which the tektronix service center is located. customer shall be responsible for paying all shipping charges, duties, taxes, and any other charges for products returned to any other locations. this warranty shall not apply to any defect, failure or damage caused by improper use or improper or inadequate maintenance and care. tektroni x shall not be obligated to furnis h service under this w arranty a) to repai r damage resulting from attempts by personnel other than tektronix representatives to install, repair or service the product; b) to repair damage resulting from improper use or c onnection to incompatible e quipment; c) to repair an y damage or malfunction caused by the use of non-tektronix supplies; or d) to service a product that has been modified or integrated with other products when the effect of such modifica tion or integration i ncreases the time or difficu lty of servicing the product. this warranty is given by tektronix in lieu of any other warranties, express or implied. tektronix and its vendors disclaim any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. tektronix? responsibility to repair or replace defective products is the sole and exclusive remedy provided to the customer for breach of this warranty. tektronix and its vendors will not be liable for any indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages irrespective of whether tektronix or the vendor has advance notice of the possibility of such damages.

important read before operating equipment this software is provided under license from tektronix, inc. retention of this program for more than thirty (30) days or use of the program in any manner c onstitutes acceptance of the license terms. carefully read the enclosed software license agreement. if you cannot agree to the license terms, promptly cont act the nearest tektronix fiel d office for return assistance. tektronix software license agreement the program, or programs, encoded or incorporated within equipment, is furnished subject to the terms and conditi ons of this agreement. retention of the program for more than thirty days or use of the program in any manner will be considered acceptance of the agreement terms. if these terms are not acceptable, the unused program and any accompanying documentation should be returned promptly to tektronix for a full refund of the license fee paid. (for information regarding the return of programs encoded or incorporated within equipment, contact the nearest tektronix sales office.) definitions . ?tektronix? means tektronix, inc., an oregon corp oration, or local tektronix? legal entity that is supplying the equipment. ?program? means the tektronix software product (executable program and/or data ) enclosed with this agreement or included within the equipment with which this agreement is packed. ?customer? means the person or organizatio n in whose name the program was ordered. license . customer may: a. use the program on a single machine at any one time; b. if the program is provided in connection with a floating-user license, the program may be used on multiple machines provided that the user is authorized, and the total number of us ers at any one time does not exceed the total number of licensed concurrent users; c. modify the program or merg e it with another for use on the single machine; and d. copy the program for archival or back up purposes, provided that no more than one (1) such copy is permitted to exist at any one time. if the program is provided in connecti on with a floating-user li cense, the program may be copied onto multiple machines for use by authorized users. each copy of the program made by customer must include a reproduction of any copyright notice or restrictive rights legend appearing in or on the copy of the program as received from tektronix. customer may not: a. use the program on more than one machine at any one tim e, unless covered by a floating-user license or separate site license; b. transfer the program to any person or organization outsid e of customer or the corpor ation of which customer is a part without the prior written consent of tektronix, except in connection with the transfer of the equipment within which the programs ar e encoded or incorporated;
c. export or re-export, directly or indirectly, the program, any associated documentation, or the direct product thereof, to any country to which such export or re-export is restricted by law or regulation of the united states or any foreign government having jurisdiction without the prio r authorization, if required, of the office of export administration, department of commerce, washington, d.c. and the corresponding agency of such foreign government; d. for object-code programs only, reverse compile or disassemble the program for any purpose; or e. copy the documentation accompanying the program. for programs designed to reside on a single-machine and su pport one or more additional machines, either locally or remotely, without permitting the program to be transferred to an additional machine for lo cal execution, the additional machines shall be considered within the definition of ?single machine?. for programs permitting the program to be transferred to an additional m achine for local execution, a separate license shall be required for each such machine with which the program may be used, or each concurrent user authorized under a floating-user license. title to the program and all copies ther eof, but not the media on which the program or copies may reside, shall be and remain with tektronix or others for whom tektronix has obtained a respective licensing right. customer shall pay when due all property taxes that may now or hereafter be imposed, levied or assessed with respect to the possession or use of the program or this license and shall file all reports required in connection with such taxes. any portion of the program modified by customer or merged with another program shall remain subject to these terms and conditions. if the program is acquired by or for an agency of the u. s. government, the program sh all be considered computer software developed at private expense and the license granted herein shall be interpreted as granting customer restricted rights in the program an d related documentation as defined in the applicable acquisition regulation. the program may not be used, copied, modified, merged, or transferred to another except as expressly permitted by these terms and conditions. upon transfer of any copy, modification, or merged portion of the program, the license granted herein is automatically terminated. term . the license granted herein is effective upon acceptan ce by customer, and shall remain in effect until terminated as provided herein. the license may be term inated by customer at any time upon written notice to tektronix. the license may be terminated by tektronix or any third party from whom tektronix may have obtained a respective licensing right if customer fails to comply with any term or condition and such failure is not remedied within thirty (30) days after notice hereof from tektronix or such third party. upon termination by either party, customer shall return to tektronix or destroy, the program and all associat ed documentation, together w ith all copies in any form. limited warranty . tektronix warrants that the media on which the program is furnished and the encoding of the program on the media will be free fr om defects in materials and workmanship for a period of three (3) months from the date of shipment. if any such medium or encoding pr oves defective during the warranty period, tektronix will provide a replacement in exchange for the defective medi um. except as to the media on which the program is furnished, the program is provided "as is" without warranty of any kind, either express or implied. tektronix does not warrant that the functions contained in the program will meet custom er's requirements or th at the operation of the program will be uninterrupted or error-free. in order to obtain service under this warranty, customer must notify tektronix of the defect before the expiration of the warranty period. if tekt ronix is unable to provide a replacement that is free from defects in materials and workmanship within a a reasonable time thereafter, customer may terminate the license for the program and return the program and any associated mate rials for credit or refund.
this warranty is given by tektronix with respect to the program in lieu of any other warranties, express or implied. tektronix and its vendors disclaim any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. tektronix' responsibility to replace defective media, or refund customer's payment is the sole and exclusive remedy provided to the customer for breach of this warranty . limitation of liability, in no event shall tektronix or others from whom tektronix has obtained a licensing right be liable for any indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages arising out of or connected with customer's possession or use of the progra m, even if tektronix or such others has advance notice of the possibility of such damages. third-party disclaimer . except as expressly agreed otherwise, th ird parties from whom tektronix may have obtained a licensing right do not warrant the program, do not a ssume any liability with respect to its use, and do not undertake to furnish any support or information relating thereto. general . this agreement contains the entire agreement between the parties with respect to the use, reproduction, and transfer of the program. neither this agreement nor the license gr anted herein is assignable or transferable by customer without the prior written consent of tektronix. this agreement and the license gran ted herein shall be governed by the laws of the state of oregon. all questions regarding this agreement or the license granted herein should be directed to the nearest tektronix sales office.

TG700 tv signal generator platform user manual i table of contents general safety summary ix ................................... environmental considerations xi ............................... preface xiii ................................................... about this manual xiii ............................................... related manuals xiii ................................................. getting started product description 1--1 .............................................. accessories 1--2 ..................................................... options 1--2 ........................................................ initial product inspection 1--4 .......................................... installation 1--4 ..................................................... warning message for fan failure 1--7 ................................... operating basics front-panel controls 2--1 .............................................. rear-panel connectors 2--3 ............................................ about the frame reset signals 2--4 ..................................... note for format settings 2--5 .......................................... reference using the menu control buttons and menu displays 3--1 ............ mainframe main menu 3--1 ............................................ connecting to a network 3--15 .................................... connecting the TG700 to your pc(s) 3--15 ................................. setting ethernet network parameters 3--16 ................................ using the general purpose interface (gpi) 3--19 .................... setting the gpi 3--19 .................................................. pin assignments of the 10 base-t connector 3--22 ......................... recalling a preset 3--23 ................................................ outputing an alarm signal 3--24 ......................................... using tg7 comm for file transfers 3--27 .......................... pc system requirements 3--27 .......................................... installation instructions and ethernet setup 3--27 ........................... starting and exiting tg7 comm 3--31 .................................... elements of the tg7 comm window 3--31 ................................ using the tg7 comm menus 3--33 ....................................... tg7 comm tutorials 3--35 .............................................
table of contents ii TG700 tv signal generator platform user manual using frame picture generator (option fp only) 3--39 .............. pc system requirements 3--39 .......................................... installation instructions 3--39 ........................................... starting and exiting frame picture generator 3--41 .......................... elements of the frame picture generator window 3--42 ...................... using the frame picture generator menus 3--44 ............................ frame picture generator tutorials 3--46 ................................... using logo generator 3--49 ...................................... pc system requirements 3--49 .......................................... installation instructions 3--49 ........................................... starting and exiting logo generator 3--51 ................................. elements of the logo generator window 3--52 ............................. using the logo generator menus 3--54 ................................... logo generator tutorials 3--57 .......................................... using tg7 setup to set parameters 3--59 .......................... pc system requirements 3--59 .......................................... installation instructions and ethernet setup 3--59 ........................... starting and exiting tg7 setup 3--62 ..................................... elements of the tg7 setup window 3--63 ................................. using the tg7 setup menus 3--64 ....................................... tg7 setup tutorial 3--66 ............................................... using the file copy tools 3--69 ................................... pc system requirements 3--69 .......................................... installation instructions and ethernet setup 3--69 ........................... starting and exiting the file copy tools 3--72 .............................. file copy tools tutorials 3--72 .......................................... syntax 3--77 ................................................... programming model 3--78 .............................................. scpi commands and queries 3--80 ...................................... ieee 488.2 common commands 3--85 ................................... constructed mnemonics 3--86 ........................................... block arguments 3--86 ................................................ special characters 3--87 ............................................... remote commands 3--89 ........................................ common commands 3--89 ............................................. display commands 3--91 ............................................. instrument commands 3--92 ........................................ mass memory commands 3--93 ...................................... program commands 3--96 ........................................... sense commands 3--97 ............................................... status commands 3--98 .............................................. system commands 3--101 ............................................. sequence programming 3--103 .................................... writing a sequence program 3--103 ....................................... running a sequence 3--103 .............................................. tcl programming changes 3--104 .........................................
table of contents TG700 tv signal generator platform user manual iii appendices appendix a: specifications a-1 .................................. electrical characteristics a-1 .......................................... environmental characteristics a-2 ...................................... mechanical characteristics a-2 ........................................ certifications and compliances a-4 ..................................... appendix b: module installation b-1 ............................. preventing component damage b-1 ..................................... installing a module b-2 ............................................... removing a module b-4 .............................................. appendix c: network interface specifications c-1 ................. checking remote command operation c-1 .............................. appendix d: error messages and codes d-1 ...................... command errors d-1 ................................................. execution errors d-2 ................................................. device specific errors d-4 ............................................ query errors d-5 .................................................... device errors d-5 ................................................... appendix e: firmware upgrade e-1 ............................. equipment required e-1 .............................................. upgrade procedures e-1 .............................................. firmware version check e-4 .......................................... appendix f: inspection and cleaning f-1 ......................... exterior inspection f-1 ............................................... exterior cleaning f-2 ................................................ index
table of contents iv TG700 tv signal generator platform user manual list of figures figure 1--1: installing the rackmount hardware 1--5 ................. figure 1--2: placing the TG700 in the rack 1--6 ..................... figure 2--1: TG700 front panel 2--1 ............................... figure 2--2: TG700 rear panel 2--3 ............................... figure 3--1: mainframe main menu 3--1 ........................... figure 3--2: preset submenu 3--3 .............................. figure 3--3: sequence submenu 3--5 ........................... figure 3--4: frame reset status submenu 3--6 ................ figure 3--5: utility submenu 3--7 .............................. figure 3--6: signal key assign submenu 3--9 .................. figure 3--7: network information submenu 3--10 ............ figure 3--8: network setup submenu 3--11 ..................... figure 3--9: diagnostics submenu 3--13 ........................ figure 3--10: pin connections for a 10base-t crossover ethernet cable 3--15 ................................................. figure 3--11: network setup submenu 3--16 .................... figure 3--12: top cover removal 3--20 .............................. figure 3--13: location of the c onnectors j000/j002/j004/j006/j008 3--21 figure 3--14: applying the gpi label to the rear panel 3--22 ........... figure 3--15: pin assignments of the 10 base-t connector for the gpi 3--22 ............................................... figure 3--16: alarm menu 3--24 ................................. figure 3--17: ethernet dialog box for tg7 comm 3--30 ............... figure 3--18: tg7 comm application window 3--31 .................. figure 3--19: file name confirmation dialog box 3--36 ................ figure 3--20: sequence file dialog box 3--37 ........................ figure 3--21: frame picture generator application window 3--42 ....... figure 3--22: building pic files dialog box 3--46 ................ figure 3--23: logo generator application window 3--52 ............... figure 3--24: gray scale settings dialog box 3--55 ................... figure 3--25: miscellaneous settings dialog box 3--56 ................. figure 3--26: bmp to lgo file conversion dialog box 3--58 ........... figure 3--27: ethernet dialog box for tg7 setup 3--62 ................ figure 3--28: tg7 setup application window 3--63 ...................
table of contents TG700 tv signal generator platform user manual v figure 3--29: rename dialog box 3--65 ............................. figure 3--30: setup window for dvg7 module 3--66 .................. figure 3--31: tg7 backup window 3--73 ........................... figure 3--32: dialog box shows backup is complete 3--73 .............. figure 3--33: tg7 restore window 3--74 ............................ figure 3--34: dialog box shows restore is complete 3--74 .............. figure 3--35: tg7 duplicator window 3--75 ......................... figure 3--36: dialog box shows file transfer is complete 3--76 .......... figure 3--37: example of scpi subsystem hierarchy tree 3--80 ......... figure 3--38: example of abbreviating a command 3--82 .............. figure 3--39: example of chaining commands and queries 3--83 ........ figure 3--40: example of omitting root and lower-level nodes in a chained message 3--83 .................................... figure a-1: TG700 dimensions a-3 ............................... figure b-1: TG700 slot numbering b-2 ........................... figure b-2: removing the blank panel b-3 ........................ figure b-3: installing the module b-3 ............................ figure b-4: securing the module b-4 ............................. figure b-5: removing the module b-5 ............................ figure e-1: TG700 upgrade dialog box e-2 ....................... figure e-2: message box appearing after the file transfer is complete e-2
table of contents vi TG700 tv signal generator platform user manual list of tables table 1--1: standard and optional accessories 1--2 .................. table 1--2: instrument options 1--2 ............................... table 1--3: power cord options 1--3 .............................. table 1--4: ac line power requirements 1--7 ....................... table 3--1: jumper settings of the connectors and available feature 3--21 table 3--2: combinations of signal levels and the corresponding preset 3--23 ................................................. table 3--3: elements of the tg7 comm window 3--32 ................ table 3--4: toolbar button descriptions 3--32 ....................... table 3--5: tg7 comm file menu commands 3--33 .................. table 3--6: tg7 comm view menu commands 3--34 ................. table 3--7: tg7 comm utility menu commands 3--35 ................ table 3--8: elements of the frame picture generator window 3--42 .... table 3--9: toolbar button descriptions 3--43 ....................... table 3--10: frame picture generator file menu commands 3--44 ...... table 3--11: frame picture file build menu commands 3--44 .......... table 3--12: frame picture generator settings menu commands 3--45 .. table 3--13: frame picture generator window menu commands 3--45 .. table 3--14: elements of the logo generator window 3--53 ........... table 3--15: toolbar button descriptions 3--53 ...................... table 3--16: logo generator file menu commands 3--54 ............. table 3--17: logo generator build menu commands 3--54 ............ table 3--18: logo generator settings menu commands 3--54 .......... table 3--19: logo generator help menu command 3--57 ............. table 3--20: elements of the tg7 setup window 3--63 ................ table 3--21: tg7 setup file menu commands 3--64 .................. table 3--22: tg7 setup window menu commands 3--65 .............. table 3--23: parameter types used in syntax descriptions 3--81 ........ table 3--24: bnf symbols and meanings 3--85 ...................... table a-1: electrical characteristics a-1 ......................... table a-2: environmental characteristics a-2 ..................... table a-3: mechanical characteristics a-2 ........................ table a-4: certifications and compliances a-4 ..................... table d-1: command errors d-1 ................................
table of contents TG700 tv signal generator platform user manual vii table d-2: execution errors d-2 ................................. table d-3: device specific errors d-4 ............................. table d-4: query errors d-5 .................................... table d-5: device errors d-5 .................................... table g-1: external inspection check list f-1 ......................
table of contents viii TG700 tv signal generator platform user manual
TG700 tv signal generator platform user manual ix general safety summary review the following safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to this product or any pr oducts connected to it. to avoid potential hazards, use this product only as specified. only qualified personnel should perform service procedures. use proper power cord. use only the power cord specified for this product and certified for the country of use. ground the product. this product is grounded through the grounding conductor of the power cord. to avoid electric shock, the grounding conductor must be connected to earth ground. before making connections to the input or output terminals of the product, ensure that the product is properly grounded. observe all terminal ratings. to avoid fire or shock hazard, observe all ratings and markings on the product. consult the product manual for further ratings information before making connections to the product. do not operate without covers. do not operate this product with covers or panels removed. avoid exposed circuitry. do not touch exposed connections and components when power is present. do not operate with suspected failures. if you suspect there is damage to this product, have it inspected by qualified service personnel. do not operate in wet/damp conditions. do not operate in an explosive atmosphere. keep product surfaces clean and dry. provide proper ventilation. refer to the manual?s installation instructions for details on installing the product so it has proper ventilation. no power switch. power supply cord is considered the disconnecting device, disconect the main power by means of the power cord. terms in this manual. these terms may appear in this manual: warning. warning statements identify conditions or practices that could result in injury or loss of life. to avoid fire or personal injury symbols and terms
general safety summary x TG700 tv signal generator platform user manual caution. caution statements identify conditi ons or practices that could result in damage to this product or other property. terms on the product. these terms may appear on the product: danger indicates an injury hazard immediately accessible as you read the marking. warning indicates an injury hazard not immediately accessible as you read the marking. caution indicates a hazard to pr operty includi ng the product. symbols on the product. the following symbols may appear on the product: caution refer to manual warning high voltage double insulated protective ground (earth) terminal not suitable for connection to the public telecom- munications network
TG700 tv signal generator platform user manual xi environmental considerations this section provides information about the environmental impact of the product. observe the following guidelines when recycling an instrument or component: equipment recycling. production of this equipment required the extraction and use of natural resources. the equipment may contain substances that could be harmful to the environment or human health if improperly handled at the product?s end of life. in order to avoid release of such substances into the environment and to reduce the use of natural resources, we encourage you to recycle this product in an appropriate system that will ensure that most of the materials are reused or recycled appropriately. the symbol shown to the left indicates that this product complies with the european union?s requirements according to directiv e 2002/96/ec on waste electrical and electronic equipment (weee). for information about recycling options, check the support/service section of the tektronix web site (www.tektronix.com). this product has been classified as monitoring and control equipment, and is outside the scope of the 2002/95/ec rohs directive. this product is known to contain lead, cadmium, mercury, and hexavalent chromium. product end-of-life handling restriction of hazardous substances
environmental considerations xii TG700 tv signal generator platform user manual
TG700 tv signal generator platform user manual xiii preface this manual describes the capabilities of the TG700 tv signal generator platform. this manual describes features and specifications that are common to all generator modules. these include system configuration and the common control interface. operation of the generator and special function modules is described in the module user manuals. about this manual this manual is composed of the following sections: h getting started shows you how to configure and install your TG700 and provides an incoming inspection procedure. also describes the mainframe options. h operating basics provides an overview of the front panel controls and rear panel connections. h reference provides instructions for controlling all the instrument functions using the menu and connecting to a ethernet network, and presents descriptions of all programming commands and the syntax used in command descriptions. this section also provides instructions for operating the many apprication software supplied with the instrument. h appendices provides additional information including the specifications and instructions for module installation. related manuals the following documents are also available for the TG700: h the TG700 tv signal generator platform service manual (tektronix part number 071-a800-xx) describes how to service the TG700 mainframe to the module level (circuit boards, fuses,etc.) and provides general information about servicing generator modules. specific service information for a module is located in its service manual. service manuals are optional and must be ordered separately. h the TG700 tv signal generator platform module installation instructions (tektronix part number 070-a824-xx) describes how to install and remove the modules, and how to upgrade the firmware of the mainframe.
preface xiv TG700 tv signal generator platform user manual
getting started

tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 1-1 getting started this section contains the following information: h product description h list of standard and optional accessories h list of instrument options h initial product inspection procedure h installation instructions product description the TG700 tv signal generator platform is a multiformat tv signal generator platform supporting both of analog and digital video standards. the TG700 consists of a mainframe and up to four plug-in modules. the modules are either signal generators or they provide special functions, such as genlock capability. the TG700 and the available modules provide the following features: h simultaneous generation of hdtv/sdtv multi format synchronized signal and test signal h modular architecture with up to four generators or special function modules h analog genlock function dealing with ntsc or pal black burst signal, hdtv trilevel sync signal, and cw signals (agl7). h independent setting of amplitudes, frequencies, and audio clicks of 16 channel embe dded audio signal (dvg7 and hdvg7) h circle, logo, and text overlays on test signals (dvg7 and hdvg7) h moving picture generation function by scrolling the active area of the signal (dvg7 and hdvg7) h reference generator performance level h ethernet interface for remote control and downloading various files such as signal files, logo files, and preset files key features
getting started 1-2 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual a signal library and various application software are included in the attachment cd-rom to execute the following operations: h upload and download files such as signal files, logo files, and preset files h download the signals from the signal library to the TG700 h create a logo (logo file) to be inserted into the test signal h create a frame picture file using the generation of a picture or test pattern accessories table 1--1 lists the standard and optional accessories provided with the TG700 mainframe. table 1- 1: standard and optional accessories accessory std. opt. tektronix part number TG700 tv signal generator platform user manual d 070-a799-xx power cord 125 v/6a d 161-0216-00 TG700 signal generator platform software library cd-rom d 062-a249-xx hardware for rackmounting d 351-0859-00 TG700 tv signal generator platform service manual d 070-a800-xx blank panel d 614-a021-00 options table 1--2 lists the instrument options that can be ordered with the TG700 mainframe. table no tag lists the available power cord options. table 1- 2: instrument options option number description d1 (calibration test data report) when you order option d1, a report with the calibration test data for the instrument will be provided with your TG700 mainframe. fp (add frame picture feature) when you order option fp, frame picture feature will be provided with your TG700 mainframe and pictures and test patterns can be generated.
getting started tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 1-3 table 1- 3: power cord options plug configuration normal usage option number north america 115 v standard (a0) united euro 220 v a1 united kingdom 240 v a2 australia 240 v a3 north america 250 v a4 switzerland 240 v a5 china 240 v a10
getting started 1-4 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual initial product inspection perform the following product inspection procedure when you initially r eceive your instrument: 1. inspect the TG700 shipping carton for external damage, which indicates possible damage to the instrument. 2. remove the TG700 from the shipping carton, and then check that the instrument has not been damaged in transit. prior to shipment the instrument is thoroughly inspected for mechanical defects. the exterior should not have any scratches or impact marks. note . save the shipping carton and pack aging materials for instrument repackaging in case shipment becomes necessary. 3. verify that the shipping carton contains the basic instrument, the standard accessories listed in table 1--1, and any optional accessories that you ordered. contact your local tektronix field office or representative if there is a problem with your instrument or if your shipment is incomplete. installation this section describes the installatio n information for the TG700 mainframe. the TG700 is shipped with the optional generator modules that you ordered configured and installed. refer to appendix b: module installation in this manual if you want to add any modules afterwards. refer to rackmount installation on page 1--4 for rackmounting instructions. the TG700 is configured at shipment for use in an equipment rack. use the information in figure 1--1 to connect the rackmount hardware to the rack. figure 1--2 shows how to install the TG700 into the rack. carefully start the rack pieces attached to the TG700 into the p ieces attached to the rack. support the TG700 until the stop latches click into place on both sides. the installation is not secure until this latching occurs. continue to slide the TG700 completely into the rack. hardware installation rackmount installation
getting started tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 1-5 chassis section stop latches stationary section 10--32 phs screws flat bar nut intermediate section stop latch hole 10--32 phs screws flat bar nut (use if front rail is not tapped) front rack rear rack stop latches flat bar nut rear mounting figure 1- 1: installing the r ackmount hardware
getting started 1-6 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual slide-out track stop latch hole figure 1- 2: placing the TG700 in the rack to remove the TG700 from the rack mount, slide it out until it stops at the catches. support the TG700 while you pres s in on the stop la tch butt ons on each side. this action will free the TG700 to slide completely out of the rack. provide support while you slide the mainframe out of the rack. verify that the location of your installation has the proper operating environment. caution. damage to the instrument can occur if this instrument is powered on at temperatures outside the specified temperature range. the TG700 operates correctly in ambient temperatures from 0 _ cto+50 _ cand in relative humidity from 20% to 80%. for complete operating environment information, refer to appendix a: specifications . leave space for cooling by ensuring standard side clearance for rack mounting or 2 inches (5.1 cm) of side clearance for counter top use. also, ensure sufficient rear clearance (approximately 2 inches) so that cables are not damaged by sharp bends. the TG700 operates from a single-phase power source with the neutral conductor at or near earth ground. the line conductor is fused for over-current protection. a protective ground connection through the grounding conductor in the power cord is essential for safe operation. environmental operating requirements connecting power
getting started tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 1-7 caution. the instrument does not have a power switch. when you connect the power cable to the ac line connector, the instrument powers on. ac power requirements. check that your location provides the proper electrical power requirements as listed in table 1--4. table 1- 4: ac line power requirements parameter description line voltage range 85 v -- 250 v line frequency 48 hz -- 63 hz maximum power 100 w connecting cable. connect the power cable to the instrument first, and then connect it to the ac power source. note that connecting the power cable causes the instrument to power on. after connecting the power, make sure that the fan on the rear panel is working. if the fan is not working, turn off the power by disconnecting the power cable from the ac power source and contact your local tektronix field office or representative. warning message for fan failure caution. if the fan on the rear panel stops working, disconnect the power cable from the ac power source. internal components could be damaged. the TG700 displays the following warning message if the fun on the rear panel stop working: * fan fault alarm * * main cooling fan serious problem * if this warning message appears, disconnect the power cable from the ac voltage line and contact your local tektronix field office or representative. while the message appears, the front-panel buttons are disabled. however, you can operate the buttons temporarily by pressing the front panel enable button on the front panel until the indicator next to the button lights. in this case, the warning message reappears and the front-panel buttons are disabled when five minutes have passed since the last time operation.
getting started 1-8 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual
operating basics

tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 2-1 operating basics this section introduces you to the basics of operating the TG700. common module functions are discussed here, while module specific functions are discussed in the module user manuals. this section contains the following topics: h front-panel controls h rear-panel connectors h about the frame reset signals h note for format settings front-panel controls figure 2--1 shows the locations of the front-panel controls. a brief discussion of each feature follows the illustration. lcd display menu control buttons test signal buttons module button format button reference indicator front p a nel enable button figure 2- 1: TG700 front panel the lcd display is a two-line, 40-character-per-line display. almost all menus have two lines of text, where the first line shows the current position in the current menu, and the second line shows the current selection (if there is not a submenu). if nothing is on the second line, press the enter button to access the corresponding submenu. you can adjust the contrast of the lcd display using the utility submenu. refer to utility submenu on page 3--7 for detailed information about the submenu. lcd display
operating basics 2-2 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual use the module button to select the mainframe or installed module to control. repeatedly pressing this button scrolls through the main menu, which shows the mainframe and the installed modules. select the one you want to control. when the atg7, avg7, awvg7, dvg7, hdlg7, or hdvg7 module is selected (active), use the format button to change the video format for the output signal. pressing this button displays the menu to allow you to select a format for the active module. use these buttons to control the menu display. refer to using the menu control buttons and menu display on page 3--1 for detailed information on controlling menus. arrow ( a , " , y , and b ) buttons. use these arrow buttons to scroll through the available menu items. enter button. use the enter button to enable the selected menu item. cancel button. use the cancel button to disable the selected menu item and return to the previous menu item. use these buttons to select the output test signals. each of these 10 buttons represents a signal set, or group of the same type of test signals. you scroll through the test signals in a signal set by repeatedly pressing the test signal button. you can change the signal assignment using the signal key assign submenu. refer to signal key assign submenu on page 3--9 for detailed information about assigning signal sets to the test signal buttons. use this button to enable or disable the front-panel buttons. when pressing this button for about one second while the front-panel buttons are enabled, all of the front-panel buttons are disabled. if you have selected a timeout period in the front panel disable item in the utility submenu, and that period passes without a button push, all of the front-panel buttons are also disabled. press and hold this button for about three second to enable the front-panel buttons. the timeout counter is restarted (if the timeout period is already set) and the indicator next to the button lights to show that the front-panel is enabled. refer to utility submenu on page 3--7 for more information about the settings the period until the front panel times out. module button format button menu control buttons test signal buttons front panel enable button
operating basics tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 2-3 the reference indicators indicate whether the TG700 is locked externally or internally. int.ref. this indicator lights when the TG700 is using its internal reference oscillator. ext.ref. this indicator lights when the TG700 is locked to an external reference signal. if this indicator is blinking, the t g700 uses the external reference signal but is unable to lock to the signal. rear-panel connectors figure 2--2 shows the locations of the TG700 rear-panel connectors. a brief discussion of each feature follows the illustration. power cord connector 10 base-t port module slots figure 2- 2: TG700 rear panel the TG700 is designed to operate from a single-phase power source with the neutral conductor at or near earth ground. only the line conductor is fused for over-current protection. a protective ground connection through the grounding conductor in the power cord is essential for safe operation. warning. to avoid dangerous electrical shock, do not connect power to the TG700 when the top cover is off. dangerous potentials are present on the power circuit board. the TG700 operates from an ac line frequency of 48 to 63 hz, over the range of 85 to 250 vac, without the need for configuration. refer to appendix a: specifications for additional information on power and environmental require- ments. reference indicators power connector
operating basics 2-4 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual use this port to connect to your local ethernet network. you can control the TG700 and all installed modules remotely through the port. also, you can upload and download various files such as signal files, logo files, and preset files through the port. use these slots to install the modules. you can install up to four modules. refer to appendix b : module installation for installation procedures for the modules. about the frame reset signals the TG700 uses the following three frame reset signals to output different video formats simultaneously: h frame reset signal 1 (frame reset 1) this frame reset signal supports the 1/1.001 system signal, and is used by the following video formats: ntsc 1080 23.98sf 525-270 1080 29.97p 525-143 1080 59.94i 1035 59.94i 720 59.94p 1080 23.98p these signals are synchronized with each other. h frame reset signal 2 (frame reset 2) this frame reset signal supports the integer system signal, and is used by the following video formats: pal 1080 30p 625-270 1080 50i 1035 60i 1080 60i 1080 25p 720 60p these signals are synchronized with each other. h frame reset signal 3 (frame reset 3) when any of the above signal uses the frame reset signal 2, the following video formats use the frame reset signal 3: 1080 24p 1080 24sf 10 base-t port module slots
operating basics tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 2-5 the frequency of frame reset signal 3 is always an integral multiple of that of frame reset signal 2. frame reset signal 3 is synchronized with frame reset signal 2. frame reset signal 1 is not synchronized with frame reset signals 2 or 3. you can see which of the three frame reset signals are used by each output of each module by usi ng the frame reset status submenu. refer to frame reset status submenu on page 3--6 for detailed information. note for format settings the TG700 displays messages to ask whether you want to disable the clock currently used if there is a conflict of signal format settings between two (or more) outputs for the clock assignment. these messages are displayed under the following conditions: h for the dvg7 option bk, when you output 525-143 format signals and 525-270 (or 625-270) format signals simultaneously. for example, if you set the signal format for the black outputs to 525-270 when the signal format for the signal outputs are set to 525-143, the following message appears: * dvg7 clock select, disable 270 mhz? * * yes : enter / no : cancel * this message asks if you want to disable the 270 mhz clock currently in use. in this case, press the cancel button to cancel the new format setting or press the enter button to enable the setting and then re-set the signal format for the other outputs. h for the hdvg7 option bk, when you output serial digital signals and serial digital black signals using the 74.25 mhz clock and 74.25/1.001 mhz clock simultaneously; or for the combination of the agl7, awvg7, bg7, and hdvg7, when you output serial digita l signals and a hdtv trilevel sync signal, or hdtv trilevel sync signals using the 74.25 mhz clock and 74.25/1.001 mhz clock simultaneously. for example, if you set the hdtv trilevel sync signal format for the black 4 output of the bg7 to 1080 59.94i when the hdtv trilevel sync signal format for the black 3 output of the agl7 is set to 1080 50i, the following message appears:
operating basics 2-6 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual * hd clock select, disable 74.25 mhz? * * yes : enter / no : cancel * this message asks if you want to disable the 74.25 mhz clock currently in use. in this case, press the cancel button to cancel the new format setting, or press the enter button to enable the setting and then reset the signal format for the other outputs.
reference

tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 3-1 using the menu control buttons and menu displays this section describes how to control all of the instrument functions using the front-panel control buttons and menus. mainframe main menu when you power on the TG700 and the initializing process for all of the installed module is completed, the top menu item of the mainframe main menu appears on the lcd display. press the up ( y )ordown( b ) arrow button to scroll through the available menu selections in the main menu. the mainframe main menu allows you to access submenus to set the various system settings. figure 3--1 shows the mainframe main menu. TG700 : preset TG700 : sequence TG700 : frame reset status to frame reset status submenu (page 3--6) enter cancel TG700 : utility to utility submenu (page 3--7) enter cancel to sequence submenu (page 3--4) enter cancel to preset submenu (page 3--2) enter cancel power on the TG700 mainframe figure 3- 1: mainframe main menu
using the menu control buttons and menu displays 3-2 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual preset. recalls instrument settings saved as a preset, or saves the current instrument settings as a preset. when you select this menu item and then press the enter button, you access the preset submenu. refer to preset submenu on this page for detailed information. sequence. selects and executes a sequence program loaded into the TG700. select this menu item and press the enter button, to access the sequence submenu. refer to sequence submenu on page 3--4 for detailed information. frame reset status. displays the status of the frame reset signals. select this menu item and press the enter button to access the frame reset status submenu. refer to frame reset status submenu on page 3--6 for detailed information. also, refer to about the frame reset signals on page 2--4 for detailed informa- tion about the frame reset signals. utility. sets the system related settings such as network parameters and signal sets assignment to the front-panel test signal buttons. select this menu item and press the enter button, to access the utility submenu. refer to utility submenu on page 3--7 for detailed information. this menu allows you to recall instrument se ttings saved as a preset or save the current instrument settings to a preset. use the up ( y )ordown( b ) arrow button to scroll through the menu items. figure 3--2 shows the preset submenu. the following three presets are named at the factory and can be used for your own application: h power on default : when you save instrument settings in the preset, the instrument settings can be loaded into the TG700 automatically at power on. if one of the seven presets is selected in the gpi (general purpose interface), the preset takes precedence over the power on default. you cannot assign the preset name with the other preset. note . if you want to save network parameters to a preset, use the power on default preset. h user default : the preset for saving the user specified default settings. if you save new instrument settings in this preset, a confirmation message appears to prevent overwriting. preset submenu
using the menu control buttons and menu displays tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 3-3 h factory default : in this preset, the factory default settings are saved. use this preset to reset the mainframe and all of the installed modules to the factory default settings. the following settings are not affected by the factory default: lcd contrast, front panel timeout, and network parameters. TG700 : preset : recall power on default select a preset to recall select preset in the main menu TG700 : preset : save power on default select a preset number to save instrument settings TG700 : preset : rename preset 1 select a preset to rename edit the preset name enter cancel TG700 : preset : delete preset 1 select a preset to delete figure 3- 2: preset submenu recall. recalls instrument settings saved as a preset. use the left ( a )orright ( " ) arrow button to select a different preset, and then press the enter button to implement the selection. while the preset is loading into the instrument, the message ?now loading ...? appears on the display. when the loading is complete, the message ?done (press cancel)? appears. press the cancel button. save. saves the current instrument settings to one of the fourteen presets. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to select the the destination preset, and then press the enter button to implement the selection.
using the menu control buttons and menu displays 3-4 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual rename. renames the specified preset name. perform the following steps to rename a preset name: 1. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to select the preset you want to rename. 2. press the enter button twice to begin editing the preset name. the underscore character ( _ ) appears under the first letter of the preset name. 3. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to move the underscore character to the letter you want to modify. 4. use the up ( y )ordown( b ) arrow button to select the new character. the available characters include the full alphabet, numerals from 0 to 9, and many standard ascii symbols. the text strings may contain up to 32 characters. 5. enter all of the desired characters then press enter button. 6. press the cancel button twice to exit the preset submenu. this returns to the top of the mainframe main menu. 7. press the enter button to reenter the preset submenu. 8. use the up ( y )ordown( b ) arrow button to select the save menu item. 9. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to select the preset name edited in step 4. 10. press enter button to save the preset with the new name. delete. deletes the specified preset. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to select the preset you want to delete, and then press the enter button to implement the selection. you cannot delete the following presets: power on default, user default, and factory default. this menu allows you to select and run a sequence that is already loaded into the TG700. a sequence is a series of generator settings defined using the tcl language and scpi commands. the TG700 loads a sequence and runs the command and settings in the order dictated by the sequences file. figure 3--3 shows the sequence submenu. sequence submenu
using the menu control buttons and menu displays tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 3-5 TG700 : sequence : playback no sequence loaded select a sequence to be run TG700 : sequence : stop select sequence in the main menu enter stop the sequence currently running figure 3- 3: sequence submenu playback. selects and runs a sequence. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to select the sequence you want to run, and then press the enter button to run the sequence. if no sequence is loaded into the instrument, the message ?no sequence found? is displayed on the second line. stop. stops the sequence currently running. when you select the menu item and then press the enter button, the sequence is stopped. refer to sequence programming on page 3--103 for detailed information about the sequence.
using the menu control buttons and menu displays 3-6 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual this menu allows you to display which of the three frame reset signals is used by the output of the installed modules. use the up ( y )ordown( b ) arrow button to scroll through the menu items. figure 3--4 shows the frame reset status submenu. TG700 : fr status : frame reset 1 14.985 hz : agl7[1] : b1, b2 select a module to be displayed select frame reset status in the main menu TG700 : fr status : frame reset 2 3.000 hz : bgl7[2] : b3 select a module to be displayed TG700 : fr status : frame reset 3 1.250 hz : bg7[2] : b1 select a module to be displayed figure 3- 4: frame reset status submenu frame reset 1. display the module(s) and output(s) using the frame reset signal 1. if two or more modules use the frame reset signal, use the left ( a )or right ( " ) arrow button to change the modules to be displayed. frame reset 2. display the module(s) and output(s) using the frame reset signal 2. if two or more modules use the frame reset signal, use the left ( a )or right ( " ) arrow button to change the modules to be displayed. frame reset 3. display the module(s) and output(s) using the frame reset signal 3. if two or more modules use the frame reset signal, use the left ( a )or right ( " ) arrow button to change the modules to be displayed. the character after the module name represents the output connector of the module. for example, b1 represents black 1 connector. frame reset status submenu
using the menu control buttons and menu displays tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 3-7 this menu allows you to set the system related settings such as the contrast of the lcd display and the network parameters. use the up ( y )ordown( b ) arrow button to scroll through the menu items. figure 3--5 shows the utility submenu. TG700 : utility : version info (h/w) cpu [0] v2.0 TG700 : utility : lcd contrast low << 17 >> high select the module for which the hardware version information will be displayed adjust the display contrast select utility in the main menu TG700 : utility : version info (f/w) cpu [0] ver. 4.3 select the module for which the firmware version information will be displayed TG700 : utility : network information information setup TG700 : utility : signal key assign to signal key assign submenu enter cancel TG700 : utility : diagnostics to diagnostics submenu enter cancel to network information submenu or to network setup submenu enter cancel TG700 : utility : front panel disable timeout:off off 10 minutes 1 minute 30 minutes 5 minutes 1 hour figure 3- 5: utility submenu version info (h/w). displays the hardware version of the mainframe and the modules currently installed. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to select the module you want to display the information. utility submenu
using the menu control buttons and menu displays 3-8 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual version info (f/w). displays the firmware version number for the mainframe and the modules currently installed. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to select the module you want to display the information. signal key assign. assigns signal sets to the front-panel test signal buttons, and assigns a frame picture file created by the frame picture generator applica- tion supplied with the TG700 to the other test signal button (option fp only). when you select this menu item and press the enter button, you will access the signal key assign submenu. refer to signal key assign submenu on page 3--9 for detailed information. lcd contrast. adjusts the contrast of the lcd display. you can lower the contrast by pressing the left ( a ) arrow button and raise the contrast by pressing the right ( " ) arrow button. front panel disable. sets the timeout period until the front-panel buttons are disabled. use the left ( a ) or right ( " ) arrow button to make the selection. the choices are off , 1 minute , 5 minutes , 10 minutes , 30 minutes ,and 1 hour . press the enter button to enable the selection. when you select any of these timeout pe riods (except off), the front-panel buttons are disabled when that time passes without a button push. when this happens, press and hold the front panel enable button for about 1 second to restart the timeout counter and enable the front-panel buttons the indicator next to the front panel enable button lights when the front-panel buttons are enabled. network. displays the network parameters currently set or sets the network parameters for the 10base-t port on the TG700. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to toggle between information and setup . when you select information and press the enter button, you will access the network information submenu. when you select setup and press the enter button, you will access the network setup submenu. refer to network information submenu on page 3--10 for detailed information about the submenu. also, refer to network setup submenu on page 3--11 for detailed information about the submenu. diagnostics. executes the diagnostic routines for the mainframe and installed modules. when you select the menu item and then press the enter button, you access the diagnostics submenu. refer to diagnostics submenu on page 3--13 for detailed information.
using the menu control buttons and menu displays tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 3-9 this menu allows you to assign signal sets to a specific test signal button on the front panel. you can also assign a frame picture file created by the frame picture generator application supplied with the TG700 to the other test signal button. figure 3--6 shows the signal key assign submenu. TG700 : test signal key assign hdvg7 select a module select signal key assign in the utility submenu TG700 : frame picture key assign hdvg7 select a module figure 3- 6: signal key assign submenu test signal key assign. assigns signal sets to a specific test signal button on the front panel. for each test signal button, the signal sets corresponding to the button name are already assigned at the factory. for example, when you press the color bar test signal button, the three types of color bars signal (100% color bars, 75% color bars, and smpte color bars) are output. perform the following steps to assign signal sets to a specific test signal button. 1. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to select the module you want to assign signal sets to, and then press the enter button. this will display the following submenu to assign signal sets. TG700 : hdvg7 : color bar key color bar the first line shows the test signal button name, and second line shows the signal set name. 2. use the up ( y )ordown( b ) arrow button to select the test signal button (for example color bar key ) to be assign signal sets. 3. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to select the signal sets (for example color bar ) you want to assign. 4. press the enter button to implement the assignment. signal key assign submenu
using the menu control buttons and menu displays 3-10 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 5. repeat steps 2 to 4 until all signal set assignments are completed. frame picture key assign. assigns frame picture files downloaded to the TG700 to the other test signal button. this operation is required to output the frame picture files as a picture (natural picture or test pattern). note . when you download a frame picture file created by the frame picture generator application and output it a picture, option fp must be installed. perform the following steps to assign a frame picture file to the other test signal button: 1. use the left ( a ) or right ( " ) arrow button to select the module you want to assign a frame picture file, and press the enter button. this will display the following submenu. TG700 : hdvg7 : other key 1080 60i the second line shows the folder name created when the frame picture file was downloaded to the TG700. 2. use the left ( a ) or right ( " ) arrow button to select the folder in which the frame picture file is saved. 3. press the enter button to implement the assignment. refer to using frame picture generator on page 3--39 for detailed information about how to create a frame picture file. also, refer to using tg7 comm for file transfers on page 3--27 for detailed information about how to download a frame picture file from the pc to the TG700. this menu allows you to display all of the network parameters currently set. figure 3--7 shows network information submenu. TG700 : utility : network : info ip address : 172.17.37.59 ip address subnet mask broadcast address gateway address mac address dhcp address select information in the utility : network menu figure 3- 7: network information submenu network information submenu
using the menu control buttons and menu displays tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 3-11 use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to select the menu items and display the address value. the following selections are available: ip address , subnet mask , broadcast address , gateway address , mac address ,and dhcp server . this menu allows you to set network parameters for the 10 base-t port on the TG700. these parameters will be used when you connect the TG700 to a remote computer (pc) so that you can control the TG700 remotely using the pc and transfer various files between the TG700 and the pc. use the up ( y ) or down ( b ) arrow button to scroll through the menu items. figure 3--8 shows the network setup submenu. TG700 : util : net setup : dhcp enable TG700 : util : net setup : ip address 000.000.000.000 TG700 : util : net setup : subnet mask 000.000.000.000 TG700 : util : net setup : gateway addr 000.000.000.000 enable disable set the ip address set the subnet address set the gateway address TG700 : util : net setup : brdcast addr 000.000.000.000 set the broadcast address select setup in the utility : network menu figure 3- 8: network setup submenu dhcp. selects valid or invalid ip address settings by dhcp (dynamic host configuration protocol). use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to select between enable and disable . press the enter button to implement the selection. if you select disable in this menu, you will need to set address values in each of the menu items described below. network setup submenu
using the menu control buttons and menu displays 3-12 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual refer to the user documentation supplied with your server os for detailed information about dhcp server functions. note . under some network environments, the TG700 may not be able to get the ip address automatically from a dhcp server. in this case, you need to enter the appropriate address value in each submenu item. ip address. sets the ip address of the TG700. press the enter button to enter the edit mode to input the address. then use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to move the underscore character ( _ ), and use the up ( y ) or down ( b ) arrow button to enter the value. after you enter the value, press the enter button to enable the value. when no value is set, the default value is used. if the dhcp menu item is set to enable, the ip address automatically obtained from the dhcp server is used. note . if you enter blank characters for the ip address, the network function of the TG700 becomes invalid. subnet mask. sets the subnet address of the TG700. press the enter button to enter the edit mode to input the address. then use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to move the underscore character ( _ ), and use the up ( y ) or down ( b ) arrow button to enter the value. after you enter the value, press the enter button to enable the value. when no value is set, the default value is used. if the dhcp menu item is set to enable, the subnet address automatically obtained from the dhcp server is used. brdcast addr. sets the broadcast address of the TG700. press the enter button at first to enter the edit mode to input the address. then use the left ( a )or right ( " ) arrow button to move the underscore character ( _ ), and use the up ( y ) or down ( b ) arrow button to enter the value. after you enter the value, press the enter button to enable the value. if the dhcp menu item is set to enable, the broadcast address automatically obtained from the dhcp server is used. gateway addr. sets the gateway address of the TG700. press the enter button to enter the edit mode to input the address. then use the left ( a ) or right ( " ) arrow button to move the underscore character ( _ ), and use the up ( y )or down ( b ) arrow button to enter the value. after you enter the value, press the enter button to enable the values. refer to connectingtoanetwork on page 3--15 for detailed information about connecting the TG700 to a pc.
using the menu control buttons and menu displays tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 3-13 this menu allows you to execute the diagnostic routines for the mainframe and installed modules. figure 3--9 shows the diagnostics submenu. TG700 : utility : diagnostics press enter to proceed select diagnostics in the utility submenu execute the diagnostic routines enter figure 3- 9: diagnostics submenu caution. when you execute the di agnostic routines, be sure to save the current instrument settings to a preset. after the diagnostics is completed, reboot the instrument and then recall the saved settings. press the enter button to execute the diagnostic routines. if all of the diagnostic routines are completed without any errors, the instrument will display ?pass?. if a diagnostic error is displayed, contact your local tektronix field office or representative. note . the front-panel buttons are disabled until the diagnostic routines are completed. diagnostics submenu
using the menu control buttons and menu displays 3-14 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual
tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 3-15 connecting to a network the TG700 has a 10 base-t port on the rear panel that allows you to control the instrument remotely, using your pc to upload and download various files such as signal files or logo files. this section provides instructions for connecting the TG700 to a single pc or a network and setting the network parameters for the 10 base-t port. refer to using tg7 comm for file transfers on page 3--27 for detailed information about how to upload and download files using the 10 base-t port. connecting the TG700 to your pc(s) the TG700 uses the rear-panel 10 base-t port (see figure 2--2 on page 2--3) to communicate with a pc. use one of the following two methods to connect the TG700 to your pc(s). h if you are connecting the TG700 directly to a single pc, use a crossover ethernet cable to connect between the 10 base-t port on the TG700 and the ethernet port on the pc. if you need to construct your own crossover cable, figure 3--10 shows the pin connections to change on a straight cable to produce a crossover cable. h if you are connecting the TG700 to your local ethernet network, use a straight ethernet cable to connect between the 10 base-t port on the TG700 and the ethernet hub port of your local network. by connecting to an ethernet network, you can access the TG700 using any pc on the network. pin 1 td pin 2 td pin 3 rd pin 6 rd pin 1 td pin 2 td pin 3 rd pin 6 rd figure 3- 10: pin connections for a 10base-t crossover ethernet cable
connecting to a network 3-16 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual setting ethernet network parameters you can set the network parameters for the TG700 using the network setup submenu. perform the following procedure to access the network setup submenu. 1. press the front-panel module button repeatedly to display the mainframe main menu. 2. use the up ( y )ordown( b ) arrow button to select utility andthenpress the enter button. this accesses the utility submenu. 3. use the up ( y )ordown( b ) arrow button to select network . 4. use the left ( a ) or right ( " ) arrow button to select setup . this accesses the network setup submenu shown in figure 3--11. TG700 : util : net setup : dhcp enable TG700 : util : net setup : ip address 000.000.000.000 TG700 : util : net setup : subnet mask 000.000.000.000 TG700 : util : net setup : gateway addr 000.000.000.000 TG700 : util : net setup : brdcast addr 000.000.000.000 select setup in the utility : network menu item enable disable set the address value set the address value set the address value set the address value figure 3- 11: network setup submenu accessing the network setup submenu
connecting to a network tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 3-17 perform the following procedure to set the network parameters for the TG700. the settings depend on whether a dhcp (dynamic host configuration protcol) server is in the network connected to the TG700. when the dhcp server is in the network. if a dhcp server is in the network, when you select enable in the net setup : dhcp menu item, the TG700 functions as a dhcp client. in this case, you can register the addresses such as the ip address and subnet mask used by the TG700. this way, the TG700 accesses the dhcp server a nd gets the addresses automatically when connected to the network. refer to the user documentation supplied with your server os for detailed information about dhcp server functions. note . under some network environments, the TG700 may not be able to get the ip address automatically from a dhcp server. in this case, you need to enter the appropriate address value in each submenu item. when the dhcp server is not in the network. when the dhcp server is not in the network, perform the following procedure to set the network parameters. 1. if you connect the TG700 directory to a single pc: a. set the ip address parameter to be the same ip address as the pc?s address except for the last number. the last number must be different than the last number in the pc?s ip address. b. set the subnet mask parameter to be the same net mask (subnet mask) used by the pc. do not enter a number if the pc does not have a net mask. c. you do not need to enter a brdcast addr and gateway addr if you are directly connected to a single pc. 2. if you connect the TG700 to your local ethernet network, see the caution note below. caution. to prevent communication con flicts on your ethernet network, ask your local network administrator for the correct numbers to enter in the network parameters submenu if you connect the TG700 to your local ethernet network. 3. verify the ethernet connection by using a ping command from the pc. setting the network parameters
connecting to a network 3-18 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual
tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 3-19 using the general purpose interface (gpi) the 10 base-t port of the TG700 can be used as the general purpose interface (gpi) by changing the internal jumper settings. when you enable the gpi, you can recall one of the seven presets, output an alarm signal, and display an alarm status on the lcd. this section describes how to set the gpi and its available features. caution. when you enable the gpi, do not connect the TG700 to a network. the network may be damaged. note . when you enable the gpi, you cannot perform the operation using a network such as sendi ng and receiving remote commands or downloading signals. after you have enabled the gpi, be sure to apply the gpi label (provided with the instrument) to the rear panel to show that the instrument cannot connect to a network. setting the gpi the gpi can be enabled by the jumper settings of the connectors j000, j002, j004, j006, and j008 on the a10 main board. since the a10 main board is located inside the chassis, you need to remove the top cover to change the jumper settings. perform the following procedure to remove the top cover and to change the jumper settings. you need a screwdriver with a # 2 phillips tip to remove the top cover. caution. to avoid a shock hazard, be sure to remove the power cord before removing the top cover. failure to remove the power cord can result in serious injury or death. 1. disconnect the power cord from the line voltage source. 2. use a screw driver with a #2 phillips tip to remove the two screws securing the front of the top cover to the instrument. see figure 3--12.
using the general purpose interface (gpi) 3-20 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 3. slide the top cover toward the rear, and then lift it off the instrument. see figure 3--12. figure 3- 12: top cover removal 4. locate the connectors j000 , j002 , j004 , j006 ,and j008 on the a10 main board. see figure 3--13.
using the general purpose interface (gpi) tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 3-21 j630 j620 j610 j600 j700 front j000/j002/j004/j006/j008 figure 3- 13: location of the connectors j000/j002/j004/j006/j008 5. move all of the jumpers from pins 1--2 to pins 3--4. table 3--1 shows the jumper settings of the connectors and available feature. note . to enable the gpi, be sure to move all of the jumpers to pins 2--3. table 3- 1: jumper settings of the connectors and available feature jumper illustration jumper setting feature j000 j002 j004 j006 j008 3 1 all of the jumpers short pins 1--2. (factory default settings) lan (ethernet) 3 1 j000 j002 j004 j006 j008 all of the jumpers short pins 2--3. gpi
using the general purpose interface (gpi) 3-22 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 6. after moving the jumpers, place the top cover on the instrument and slide it toward the front. 7. use a screw driver with a #2 phillips tip to install the two screws securing the front of the top cover to the instrument. 8. remove the protective backing from the gpi label provided with the instrument, and then apply it to the rear panel. see figure 3--14. gpi do not connect to network gpi label figure 3- 14: applying the gpi label to the rear panel pin assignments of the 10 base-t connector figure 3--15 shows the pin assignments of the 10 base-t connector when it is used as the gpi. the pins 1, 2, and 3 are used to input signals for reca lling a preset. the pin 4 is used to output an alarm signal. frame ground is used for the ground return. when using a shielded lan cable (shielded twisted pair cable), you can utilizes the shield of the cable as ground. 123 6 pin number function level input input input output 1 2 3 6 high > 1.4 v or open (connected to an internal 10 k ? pull-up resistor) low < 0.4 v or ground (input impedance: 10 k ? ) low < 0.4 v or ground (when drawn 100 ma; maximum on-resistor 4 ? ) 10 base-t c onnector figure 3- 15: pin assignments of the 10 base-t connector for the gpi
using the general purpose interface (gpi) tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 3-23 recalling a pr eset when you enable the gpi, you can recall one of the seven presets by combina- tions of signal levels for pins 1, 2, and 3 of the 10 base-t connector. table 3--2 shows the combinations of signal levels for the pins and the preset number to be recalled. table 3- 2: combinations of signal levels and the corresponding preset pin 1 pin 2 pin 3 preset number high high low 1 high low high 2 high low low 3 low high high 4 low high low 5 low low high 6 low low low 7 all of the input signals are active low; when the signal level(s) for the specified pin(s) goes from high to low, the corres ponding preset is recalled. for example, when the signal level for pin 3 goes from high to low, the preset 1 is recalled. note . since the signal transition cannot be detected on the edge of the signal, the signal level needs to hold. it requires about 0.5 s econds to recall a preset, and then the settings of the TG700 change. the required time to change the settings depends on the contents of a preset.
using the general purpose interface (gpi) 3-24 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual outputing an alarm signal when you enable the gpi, the TG700 can output an alarm signal from pin 6 on the 10 base-t connector when one of the following internal errors occur: h when the fan stops working. h when a genlock signal is not connected. h when the TG700 does not lock to a genlock signal. h when the frequency of the genlock signal and the internal reference shift considerably, and the TG700 seems to be near loss of lock. the output signal is active low; the signal level for pin 6 goes from high to low when any errors occur. the alarm signal output can be enabled using the gpi alarm output menu item in the utility submenu. refer to gpi alarm output on page 3--25 for more information. when the gpi is enabled, the alarm menu items are displayed instead of the utility menu item. the alarm menu allows you to enable or disable the alarm signal output, to reset the alarm signal output, and to display the alarm status. figure 3--16 shows the alarm menu. TG700 : utility : front panel disable time out : off TG700 : utility : alarm status no alarm TG700 : utility : alarm reset press enter to clear alarm TG700 : utility : diagnostics enable disable TG700 : utility : gpi alarm output disable alarm menu figure 3- 16: alarm menu alarm menu
using the general purpose interface (gpi) tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 3-25 alarm status. displays the alarm status detected inside the instrument. the possible messages for the status are as follows: h no alarm : no errors have been detected. h genlock : near loss of lock : the frequency of the genlock signal and the internal reference signal shift considerably, and the TG700 seems to be near loss of lock. if this happens it is recommended that you check the frequency of the genlock signal or internal reference signal of the TG700. h genlock : loss of lock : the TG700 does not lock to a genlock signal. h genlock : no signal : a genlock signal is not connected. h fan fault : the fan on the rear panel stops working. note . in the alarm status display, the inst rument displays an error message that has been detected in the past. in order to display the latest message, you need to access the other menu item (press the cancel button) and to return to the alarm status menu again. alarm reset. resets the alarm status. the TG700 holds the alarm status even if the cause of the alarm is eliminated. use this menu item when you need to reset the status. if the cause of the error is not eliminated, the alarm status is set again when you reset the status. gpi alarm output. enables or disables the alarm signal output. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to select between enable and disable .for enable, an alarm signal is output from pin 6 of the 10 base-t connector when any error is detected inside the instrument. for disable, the alarm signal output is disabled. press the enter button to confirm the selection.
using the general purpose interface (gpi) 3-26 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual
tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 3-27 using tg7 comm for file transfers tg7 comm, a standard accessory with the t g700, is a software application for a pc using the microsoft windows system. tg7 comm provides the capability to transfer signal, logo, preset, frame picture, or sequence files between a pc and the TG700 using the ethernet interface. this section provides the following information: h pc system requirements h installation instruction and ethernet setup h starting and exiting tg7 comm h elements of tg7 comm window h using the tg7 comm menus h tg7 comm tutorials pc system requirements your pc requires the following minimum system requirements to load and operate the tg7 comm application: h microsoft windows 95, 98, 2000, or nt4.0 (for windows 95 or nt 4.0, internet explorer 4.01 or later needs to be installed) h ethernet interface installation instructions and ethernet setup this subsection provides the following instructions: installing the tg7 comm application on your pc, creating a desktop shortcut icon on the pc to run tg7 comm, connecting your pc(s) to the TG700 using the ethernet port, and setting the required ethernet parameters. the following installation instructions assume that you are familiar with the basics of using the window s operating system. if necessary, read your windows user documentation before installing tg7 comm. installing tg7 comm
using tg7 comm for file transfers 3-28 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual perform the following procedure to install tg7 comm: 1. be sure that your pc meets the requirements listed under pc system requirements above before proceedin g with the installation. 2. insert the TG700 signal generator platform software library cd-rom into a cd-rom drive on your pc. 3. double-click the my computer icon and the cd-rom drive icon on the pc desktop. the pc will display the contents of the TG700 signal generator platform software library cd-rom. 4. double-click the tools folder and the tg7 comm folder on the pc desktop. the pc will display the contents of the tg7 comm folder. 5. double-click the setup.exe icon in the folder. this copies initial files of the tg7 comm application. for a while, the welcome window appears on the pc desktop. 6. read the displayed information, and then click the next> button to proceed with the installation. the pc will display the choose destination location window. the default directory location for the application is displayed. if you want to install tg7 comm in a custom location, click the browse... button, and then select or create a custom directory location. 7. click the next> button to proceed. the pc will display the select program folder window. the default name for the program folder is displayed. if you want to change the name, type in a new name or select a name from the existing folders list. 8. click the next> button to proceed. t he pc will display the start copying files window. 9. click the next> button to start the installation. if the installation is successful, the setup complete windows is displayed. perform the following procedure to create an icon on your pc desktop that you can use to run the tg7 comm application. 1. on your pc display, move the mouse cursor to any unoccupied desktop area, and then click the right mouse button to open the desktop menu. 2. from the desktop menu select new , and then select shortcut to open the create shortcut dialog box. 3. click the browse... button in the create shortcut dialog box. creating a desktop shortcut icon
using tg7 comm for file transfers tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 3-29 4. use the browse dialog box to locate the tg7 comm directory. a. if you installed the tg7 comm application using the default directory location and the default folder name in the installation procedure, select the following directory folders in order: program files , tektronix , TG700 ,and tg7 comm . b. if you installed the tg7 comm application to a custom location or gave the application folder a custom name, you will need to select your custom directory path. c. you should now be at a location in the pc directory structure where the browse list box shows the tg7comm.exe file. 5. select the tg7comm.exe file (tg7comm.exe will be displayed in the file name box), and then click the open button. the directory path to the tg7comm.exe file will now be displayed in the command line box of the create shortcut dialog box. 6. click the next> button in the create shortcut dialog box. the default name of the shortcut icon is now displayed in the dialog box. you can edit the icon name to suit your needs or accept the default name. 7. click the finish button to finish creating the desktop shortcut icon. the tg7comm.exe shortcut icon will now appear on the pc desktop. you can start the tg7 comm application by double-clicking the tg7comm.exe (or your custom name) shortcut icon. tg7 comm uses the rear-panel 10 base-t port on the TG700 to communicate with a pc. refer to connectingtoanetwork on page 3--15 for detailed information about how to connect your pc(s) to the TG700. connecting your pc(s) to the TG700
using tg7 comm for file transfers 3-30 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual before you can use tg7 comm to transfer files between the TG700 and your pc(s), you must set the ethernet network parameters for both the TG700 and the tg7 comm application. note . use the ping command from the pc to verify network communications after you set the ethernet network parameters for the TG700 and for the tg7 comm application. ethernet parameters for the TG700. the ethernet network parameters for the TG700 can be set using the network setup submenu in the utility main menu. refer to setting ethernet network parameters on page 3--16 for detailed information about how to set the network parameters. ethernet parameters for tg7 comm. perform the following procedure to set the ethernet network parameters for the tg7 comm application: 1. select network from the utility menu of the tg7 comm application. this will open the ethernet dialog box shown in figure 3--17. 2. use the ip address field in the dialog box to enter the ip address that you assigned to the TG700. 3. click the ok button to accept the se ttings and close the dialog box. figure 3- 17: ethernet dialog box for tg7 comm setting ethernet network parameters
using tg7 comm for file transfers tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 3-31 starting and exiting tg7 comm when you complete the installation procedure, you can use any of the following methods to start the tg7 comm application: h double-click the tg7comm.exe shortcut icon on the pc desktop that you created during the installation procedure. h double-click the tg7comm.exe file name in the program manager window. h select tg7comm from the start -- programs menu. to exit (quit) the tg7 comm application, select exit from the file menu command list of the application. elements of the tg7 comm window figure 3--18 shows the tg7 comm application window. table 3--3 provides a description of the elements in the application window. title bar menu bar toolbar status bar tree view list view figure 3- 18: tg7 comm application window
using tg7 comm for file transfers 3-32 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual table 3- 3: elements of the tg7 comm window element description title bar the title bar displays the name of the application and contains the standard window-sizing boxes for windows. menu bar the menu bar displays the names of the four pull-down menus. refer to using tg7 comm menus on page 3--33 for detailed information about the functions available in the menus. toolbar the toolbar provides shortcut buttons for many of the most often used menu commands. click a toolbar button to select the corresponding command. you can toggle the toolbar display on and off using the toolbar command in the view pull-down menu. table 3--4 describes the function of each toolbar button. tree view the tree view displays the file structure in the TG700. the contents of the selected directory is displayed in the list view. the ip address of the selected TG700 is displayed at the top of the tree. list view the list view displays the contents of the selected directory in the tree view. you can use the view pull-down menu to alter the display in the list view. status bar the status bar displays the number of files (objects) stored in the selected directory, the total file size of the selected directory, and the amount of free disk space in the TG700?s system memory. table 3- 4: toolbar button descriptions icon name function pc to tg equivalent to the pc to tg command in the file menu. tg to pc equivalent to the tg to pc command in the file menu. up one level moves from the current folder to the upper level folder. large icons equivalent to the large icons command in the view menu. small icons equivalent to the small icons command in the view menu. list equivalent to the list command in the view menu. details equivalent to the details command in the view menu.
using tg7 comm for file transfers tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 3-33 using the tg7 comm menus the menu bar displays the names of the four pull-down menus: file, view, utility, and help. this section describes the function of each selection in these menus. the file menu contains commands for managing file operations and for exiting the tg7 comm application. table 3--5 describes each of the file menu com- mands. table 3- 5: tg7 comm file menu commands command function pc to tg displays the pc to tg download dialog box where you can select the file you want to transfer from your pc to the directory in the TG700 selected inthetreeview. tg to pc when you select this command after you highlight a file in the list view of the tg7 comm application, the tg to pc upload dialog box appears where you can select a destination path and file name for the file you want to transfer to your pc. new creates a new folder in the currently selected directory of the TG700. delete deletes the file or empty folder currently selected in the TG700. rename renames the file name or folder name currently selected in the TG700. exit exits the tg7 comm application. file menu
using tg7 comm for file transfers 3-34 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual the view menu contains commands that control the appearance of the tg7 comm application window. table 3- -6 describes each of the view menu commands. table 3- 6: tg7 comm view menu commands command function toolbar toggles the display of the toolbar on and off in the application window. a check mark precedes the command in the menu when the toolbar is selected for display. status bar toggles the display of the status bar on and off in the application window. a check mark precedes the command in the menu when the status bar is selected for display. large icons causes the application to display files or folders in the list view using large icons. a check mark precedes the command in the menu when large icons is selected. small icons causes the application to display files or folders in the list view using small icons. a check mark precedes the command in the menu when small icons is selected. list causes the application to display files or folders in the list view in a vertical list form. a check mark precedes the command in the menu when list is selected. details causes the application to display files or folders in the list view in a detailed column format which includes the file size and last modified date of each file. a check mark precedes the command in the menu when details is selected. when you select details, you can click on the column names in the list view to reorder the contents of the directory by file name, by file size, or by file date. arrange icons sets the display order for the folders and files in the list view. you can arrange the list view display by name, size, or date. refresh refreshes the file display in the list view. view menu
using tg7 comm for file transfers tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 3-35 the utility menu contains commands for setting the network parameters. table 3- 7: tg7 comm utility menu commands command function network opens the ethernet dialog box where you can set the ip address of the target TG700. refer to ethernet parameters for tg7 comm on page 3--30 for more information. check error opens the tg error dialog box which lists the error(s) detected in the TG700. options opens the set options dialog box where you can specify which text editor application you will use to describe a sequence file. the help menu about... command displays information including the tg7 comm software version number and copyright information. you can set the network parameters for the TG700 using the network setup submenu. tg7 comm tutorials after you have connected the TG700 to the pc using an ethernet cable and set the required network parameters, you can use tg7 comm to transfer files between the pc and the TG700. note . the convention used by the tg7 comm application is to call file transfers from the pc to the TG700 a ?download,? and to call file transfers from the TG700 to the pc an ?upload.? you can download and upload the following types of files: h signal file (*.dnl) h logo file (*.lgo) h frame picture file (*.pic) h preset file (*.p00 to *.p14) h sequence file (*.seq) utility menu help menu
using tg7 comm for file transfers 3-36 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual caution. do not execute any operations except for delete and rename for a *.cmp file in the signal folder of each module. this subsection provides the procedures to download a signal file, logo file, frame picture file, preset file, or sequence file from the pc to the TG700. note . when you download file(s) to the TG700, make sure that the TG700 has at least 1 mb of free memory space. this in formation is displayed on the status bar in the application window. signal file, logo file, frame picture file, or preset file. perform the following steps to download a signal file, logo file, frame picture file, or preset file from the pc to the TG700. 1. in the tree view of the tg7 comm application, select the destination folder for the file you are going to download to the TG700. 2. select pc to tg from the file pull-down menu to open the pc to tg download dialog box. 3. in the pc to tg download dialog box, select the file on the pc that you want to download and the type of file, and then click the download button to open the dialog box to confirm the file name. see figure 3--19. 4. in the dialog box, confirm the file and then click the ok button to download the file. figure 3- 19: file name confirmation dialog box sequence file. perform the following steps to download a sequence file from the pc to the TG700. 1. in the tree view of the tg7 comm application, select the destination folder for the file you are going to download to the TG700. downloading a file to the TG700
using tg7 comm for file transfers tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 3-37 2. select pc to tg from the file pull-down menu to open the pc to tg download dialog box. 3. in the pc to tg download dialog box, select the file on the pc that you want to download and the type of file (*.seq), and then click the download button to open the sequence file dialog box shown in figure 3--20. 4. in the sequence file dialog box, confirm the sequence file that you want to download. 5. when you click the edit button, you can view the content of the sequence file and edit it. 6. click the ok button to download the file. figure 3- 20: sequence file dialog box the procedure for uploading a file from the TG700 to the pc is the same for a signal file, logo file, frame picture file, preset file, or sequence file. perform the following steps to upload a signal file, logo file, frame picture file, preset file, or sequence file from the TG700 to the pc: 1. in the list view of the tg7 comm application, select the file you want to upload to the pc. 2. select tg to pc... from the file pull-down menu to open the tg to pc upload dialog box. 3. in the tg to pc upload dialog box, specify the destination folder for the file you are going to upload to your pc. 4. click the upload button to upload the file from the TG700 to your pc. about uploading a preset file. when you save instrument settings as a preset, separate preset files are created for each module. therefore, when you upload a preset file using the tg7 comm application, you need to create the folders for each module a nd upload all the files in it. uploading a file to the pc
using tg7 comm for file transfers 3-38 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual once you have uploaded a preset file from the TG700 to the pc, you can download the file to another TG700 with the same configuration and use it as a known settings. a preset file can be easily backed up and restored by the tg7 backup and tg7 restore applications. refer to using the file copy tools beginning on page 3--69 for more information about how to backup and restore a preset file.
tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 3-39 using frame picture generator (option fp only) frame picture generator, available as option fp when you order a TG700, is a software application for a pc using the microsoft windows system. frame picture generator provides the capability to convert a windows bitmap file (.bmp) to a frame picture file (.pic) that can be used by the TG700. using this application, you can convert a natural picture or a test pattern in bitmap format to a frame picture file and output it as a picture. this section provides the following information: h pc system requirements h installation instructions h starting and exiting frame picture generator h elements of the frame picture generator window h using the frame picture generator menus h frame picture generator tutorials pc system requirements your pc requires the following minimum system requirements to load and operate the frame picture generator application: h microsoft windows 95, 98, 2000, or nt4.0 h true color (more than 24 bits) display mode installation instructions this subsection provides the following instructions: installing the frame picture generator application on your pc and creating a desktop shortcut icon on the pc to run frame picture generator. the following installation instructions assume that you are familiar with the basics of using the window s operating system. if necessary, read your windows user documentation before installing frame picture generator. installing frame picture generator
using frame picture generator (option fp only) 3-40 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual perform the following procedure to install frame picture generator: 1. be sure that your pc meets the requirements listed under pc system requirements on page 3--39 before proceeding with the installation. 2. insert the TG700 signal generator platform software library cd-rom into a cd-rom drive on your pc. 3. double-click the my computer icon and the cd-rom drive icon on the pc desktop. the pc will display the contents of the TG700 signal generator platform software library cd-rom. 4. double-click the tools folder and frame picture generator folder on the pc desktop. the pc will display the contents of the frame picture generator folder. 5. double-click the setup.exe icon in the folder. this copies initial files of the frame picture generator application. for a while, the welcome window appears on the pc desktop. 6. read the displayed information, and then click the next> button to proceed with the installation. the pc will display the choose destination location window. the default directory location for the application is displayed. if you want to install frame picture generator in a custom location, click the browse... button, and then select or create a custom directory location. 7. click the next> button to proceed. the pc will display the select program folder window. the default name for the program folder is displayed. if you want to change the name, type in a new name or select a name from the existing folders list. 8. click the next> button to proceed. t he pc will display the start copying files window. 9. click the next> button to start the installation. if the installation is successful, the setup complete windows is displayed. perform the following procedure to create an icon on your pc desktop that you can use to run the frame picture generator application. 1. on your pc display, move the mouse cursor to any unoccupied desktop area, and then click the right mouse button to open the desktop menu. 2. from the desktop menu select new , and then select shortcut to open the create shortcut dialog box. creating a desktop shortcut icon
using frame picture generator (option fp only) tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 3-41 3. click the browse... button in the create shortcut dialog box. 4. use the browse dialog box to locate the frame picture generator directory. a. if you installed the frame picture generator application using the default directory location and the default folder name in the installation procedure, select the following directory folders in order: program files , tektronix , TG700 ,and framegen . b. if you installed the frame picture generator application to a custom location or gave the application folder a custom name, you will need to select your custom directory path. c. you should now be at a location in the pc directory structure where the browse list box shows the framegen.exe file. 5. select the framegen.exe file (framegen.exe will be displayed in the file name box), and then click the open button. the directory path to the framegen.exe file will now be displayed in the command line box of the create shortcut dialog box. 6. click the next> button in the create shortcut dialog box. the default name of the shortcut icon is now displayed in the dialog box. you can edit the icon name to suit your needs or accept the default name. 7. click the finish button to finish creating the desktop shortcut icon. the framegen.exe shortcut icon will now appear on the pc desktop. you can start the frame picture generator application by double-clicking the framegen.exe (or your custom name) shortcut icon. starting and exiting frame picture generator when you complete the installation procedure, you can use any of the following methods to start the frame picture generator application: h double-click the framegen.exe shortcut icon on the pc desktop that you created during the installation procedure. h double-click the framegen.exe file name in the program manager window. h select framegen from the start -- programs menu. to exit (quit) the frame picture generator application, select exit from the file pull-down menu or click the exit button on the toolbar.
using frame picture generator (option fp only) 3-42 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual elements of the frame picture generator window figure 3--21 shows the frame picture generator application window. table 3--8 provides a description of the elements in the application window. title bar menu bar bmp view, framebmp view, and picbmp view windows display area toolbar figure 3- 21: frame picture generator application window table 3- 8: elements of the frame picture generator window element description title bar the title bar displays the name of the application and contains the standard window-sizing boxes for windows. menu bar the menu bar displays the names of the five pull-down menus. refer to using the frame picture generator menus on page 3--44 for detailed information about the functions available in the menus. toolbar the toolbar provides shortcut buttons for many of the most often used menu commands. click a toolbar button to select the corresponding command. table 3--9 describes the function of each toolbar button.
using frame picture generator (option fp only) tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 3-43 table 3- 8: elements of the frame picture generator window (cont.) element description bmp view window the bmp view window displays the selected bitmap image before conversion. framebmp view window the framebmp view window displays the frame bitmap image converted to the specified video format size. picbmp view window the picbmp view window displays the frame picture image converted to the bitmap file. table 3- 9: toolbar button descriptions icon name function open equivalent to the open command in the file menu. save frame bmp as equivalent to the save frame bmp as command in the file menu. save pic bmp as equivalent to the save pic bmp as command in the file menu. build frame bmp equivalent to the build frame bmp command in the build menu. build pic file equivalent to the build pic file command in the build menu. build pic bmp equivalent to the build pic bmp command in the build menu. cascade equivalent to the cascade command in the window menu. horizontal equivalent to the horizontal command in the window menu. vertical equivalent to the vertical command in the window menu. exit equivalent to the exit command in the file menu.
using frame picture generator (option fp only) 3-44 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual using the frame picture generator menus the menu bar displays the names of the five pull-down menus: file, build, settings, window, and help. this section describes the function of each selection in these menus. the file menu contains commands for managing file operations and for exiting the frame picture generator application. table 3--10 describes each of the file menu commands. table 3- 10: frame picture generator file menu commands command function open opens a bitmap file. when you select a bitmap file, the image is displayed in the bmp view window. save frame bmp as saves the frame bitmap image displayed in the framebmp view window as a bitmap file. save pic bmp as saves the frame picture image displayed in the picbmp view window as a bitmap file. exit exits the frame picture generator application. the build menu contains commands that create a frame bitmap file or frame picture file and convert a frame picture file to a bitmap file. table 3--11 describes each of the build menu commands. table 3- 11: frame picture file build menu commands command function build frame bmp converts the bitmap image displayed in the bmp view window to the bitmap file with the specified video format size. build pic file converts the frame bitmap file displayed in the framebmp view window to the frame picture file (.pic) that can be used by the TG700. since the avg7 module outputs a signal by 2-time over sampling technique, a 1 pixel of a bitmap image corresponds to 2 samples of the signal. therefore, when creating a frame picture file for the avg7 module, the application uses a 1 pixel of a bitmap image twice. build pic bmp converts the selected frame picture file (.pic) to the bitmap file and displays its image in the picbmp view window. note that this command cannot reproduce the original bitmap file completely because the data of the frame picture file is changed when it is converted from the bitmap file. this command is useful when you want to check any frame picture images on the pc. file menu build menu
using frame picture generator (option fp only) tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 3-45 the settings menu contains commands for setting the video format size and background color. table 3-- 12 describes each of the se ttings menu commands. table 3- 12: frame picture generator settings menu commands command function background specifies the color used for the background of the bitmap image. filter eliminates unnecessary high frequency components contained in the bitmap image. these high frequency components derive from rapid changes of intensity or hue in the image generated by using a graphic program. this command is only available for the video format sizes of thedvg7andhdvg7. format specifies the video format size when the frame bitmap is created. the window menu contains commands for controlling the appearance of the view windows. table 3--13 describe s each of the w indow menu commands. table 3- 13: frame picture generator window menu commands command function cascade arranges the view windows so that they overlap one another. horizontal arranges the view windows horizontally. vertical arranges the view windows vertically. minimize all minimizes the view wi ndows. arrange icon when the view windows are min imize, arr anges their title bars. the help menu about framegen command displays information including the frame picture generator software version number and copyright information. settings menu window menu help menu
using frame picture generator (option fp only) 3-46 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual frame picture generator tutorials this subsection describes the basics of operating the frame picture generator application. perform the following steps to create a frame picture file (.pic) from a windows bitmap file (.bmp). 1. select open from the file pull-down menu to open the bitmap file dialog box. 2. in the bitmap file dialog box, select the bitmap file on the pc that you want to convert, and then click the open button. this will display the bitmap image in the bmp view window. 3. select background from the settings pull-down menu to specify the background color for the frame bitmap. 4. select format from the settings pull-down menu to select the video format size when the frame bitmap is created. 5. select build frame bmp from the build pull-down menu. this will display the frame bitmap image converted to the specified video format size in the framebmp view window. 6. select build pic file from the build pull-down menu to convert the frame bitmap file to the frame picture file. while the conversion is in progress, the building pic files dialog box shown in figure 3--22 appears. figure 3- 22: building pic files dialog box 7. when the file conversion is completed, the pic file dialog box appears. 8. in the dialog box specify the destination folder where you want to save the frame picture file, and the file name. 9. click the save button to save the file. creating a frame picture file
using frame picture generator (option fp only) tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 3-47 a frame picture file created by frame picture generator is output as a picture by downloading to the TG700. note . make sure to download a frame pict ure file to a folder for a generator module that can output the correct video format for the frame picture. if the video format for the frame picture file is different from the video format for the generator module, the picture is not output correctly. note for downloading a frame picture file. it is recommended that you download up to 32 mb of frame picture files to the TG700 (the amount of free space in the TG700?s system memory can be confirmed on the status bar in the tg7 comm application). total number of lines of frame pictures and test signals that can be downloaded into a module are 4096. since, line numbers vary depending on a module and signal format, the number of frame picture files that can be downloaded into each module are as follows: h avg7: 7 files h awvg7: 3 files h dvg7: 7 files h hdvg7: 3 files note . the flash memory of the TG700 is shared among system files, test signal files, and frame picture files. therefore, if you use the whole free memory space for frame pictures, system files may not be installed when upgrading the instrument, or additional test signals may not be installed. if you have more pictures to be output, you can output them by saving another folder and then assigning it to the front-panel button. downloading a frame picture file and outputting the picture
using frame picture generator (option fp only) 3-48 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual downloading a frame picture file to the TG700. perform the following steps to download a frame picture file from the pc to the TG700: 1. start the tg7 comm application after you connect your pc and TG700 using the appropriate ethernet cable. refer to using tg7 comm for file transfers on page 3--27 for detailed information about the tg7 comm application. 2. create a folder corresponding to a format name (for example 1080_60i ) under the picture folder of the appropriate generator module. 3. download the frame picture file to the folder using the pc to tg command of the tg7 comm application. outputting the picture. perform the following steps to output the frame picture file as a picture. 1. assign the frame picture file to the other test signal button on the front panel. refer to the signal key assign submenu on page 3--9 about how to assign a frame picture file to the other test signal button. 2. press the front-panel module button to select the module from which you want to output the picture. 3. press the front-panel format button to select the video format for the frame picture file. 4. press the other test signal button. 5. press the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button, or the other test signal button repeatedly to select the picture that you want to output.
tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 3-49 using logo generator logo generator, a standard accessory with the TG700, is a software application for a pc using the microsoft windows system. logo generator provides the capability to convert a windows bitmap file (.bmp) to a logo file (.lgo) that can be used with the logo overlay feature of the dvg7 or hdvg7 module. this section provides the following information: h pc system requirements h installation instructions h starting and exiting logo generator h elements of logo generator window h using the logo generator menus h logo generator tutorials pc system requirements your pc requires the following minimum system requirements to load and operate the logo generator application: h microsoft windows 95, 98, 2000, or nt4.0 installation instructions this subsection provides the following instructions: installing the logo generator application on your pc and creating a desktop shortcut icon on the pc to run logo generator. the following installation instructions assume that you are familiar with the basics of using the window s operating system. if necessary, read your windows user documentation before installing logo generator. perform the following procedure to install logo generator: 1. be sure that your pc meets the requirements listed under pc system requirements above before proceedin g with the installation. 2. insert the TG700 signal generator platform software library cd-rom into a cd-rom drive on your pc. installing logo generator
using logo generator 3-50 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 3. double-click the my computer icon and the cd-rom drive icon on the pc desktop. the pc will display the contents of the TG700 signal generator platform software library cd-rom. 4. double-click the tools folder and logo generator folder on the pc desktop. the pc will display the contents of the logogen folder. 5. double-click the setup.exe icon in the folder. this copies initial files of the logo generator application. for a while, the welcome window appears on the pc desktop. 6. read the displayed information, and then click the next> button to proceed with the installation. the pc will display the choose destination location window. the default directory location for the application is displayed. if you want to install logo generator in a custom location, click the browse... button, and then select or create a custom directory location. 7. click the next> button to proceed. the pc will display the select program folder window. the default name for the program folder is displayed. if you want to change the name, type in a new name or select a name from the existing folders list. 8. click the next> button to proceed. t he pc will display the start copying files window. 9. click the next> button to start the installation. if the installation is successful, the setup complete windows is displayed. perform the following procedure to create an icon on your pc desktop that you can use to run the logo generator application. 1. on your pc display, move the mouse cursor to any unoccupied desktop area, and then click the right mouse button to open the desktop menu. 2. from the desktop menu select new , and then select shortcut to open the create shortcut dialog box. 3. click the browse... button in the create shortcut dialog box. creating a desktop shortcut icon
using logo generator tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 3-51 4. use the browse dialog box to locate the logo generator directory. a. if you installed the logo generator application using the default directory location and the default folder name in the installation procedure, select the following directory folders in order: program files , tektronix , TG700 ,and logogen . b. if you installed the logo generator application to a custom location or gave the application folder a custom name, you will need to select your custom directory path. c. you should now be at a location in the pc directory structure where the browse list box shows the logogen.exe file. 5. select the logogen.exe file (logogen.exe will be displayed in the file name box), and then click the open button. the directory path to the logogen.exe file will now be displayed in the command line box of the create shortcut dialog box. 6. click the next> button in the create shortcut dialog box. the default name of the shortcut icon is now displayed in the dialog box. you can edit the icon name to suit your needs or accept the default name. 7. click the finish button to finish creating the desktop shortcut icon. the logogen.exe shortcut icon will now appear on the pc desktop. you can start the logo generator application by double-clicking the logogen.exe (or your custom name) shortcut icon. starting and exiting logo generator when you complete the installation procedure, you can use any of the following methods to start the logo generator application: h double-click the logogen.exe shortcut icon on the pc desktop that you created during the installation procedure. h double-click the logogen.exe file name in the program manager window. h select logogen from the start -- programs menu. to exit (quit) the logo generator application, select exit from the file menu command list of the application.
using logo generator 3-52 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual elements of the logo generator window figure 3--23 shows the logo generator application window. table 3--14 provides a description of the elements in the application window. title bar menu bar status bar bmp view lgo view toolbar figure 3- 23: logo generator application window
using logo generator tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 3-53 table 3- 14: elements of the logo generator window element description title bar the title bar displays the name of the application and contains the standard window-sizing boxes for windows. menu bar the menu bar displays the names of the four pull-down menus. refer to using the logo generator menus on page 3--54 for detailed information about the functions available in the menus. toolbar the toolbar provides shortcut buttons for many of the most often used menu commands. click a toolbar button to select the corresponding command. you can toggle the toolbar display on and off using the toolbar commands in the settings pull-down menu. table 3--15 describes the function of each toolbar button. bmp view the bmp view displays the selected bitmap image. lgo view the lgo view displays the logo image converted to a gray scale. status bar the status bar displays the bitmap size, bits per pixel, and conversion status (%) of the gray scale image. table 3- 15: toolbar button descriptions icon name function open equivalent to the open command in the file menu. build logo file equivalent to the build logo file command in the build menu. about equivalent to the about logogen command in the help menu.
using logo generator 3-54 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual using the logo generator menus the menu bar displays the names of the four pull-down menus: file, build, settings, and help. this section describes the function of each selection in these menus. the file menu contains commands for managing file operation and for exiting the logo generator application. table 3--16 describes each of the file menu commands. table 3- 16: logo generator file menu commands command function open displays the open dialog box where you can select the bitmap file you want to convert to a logo file. exit exits the logo generator application. the build menu contains a command that creates a logo file. table 3--17 describes the build menu command. table 3- 17: logo generator build menu commands command function build logo file create a logo file (.lgo) from a bitmap file (.bmp). the settings menu contains commands for setting the gray level and background color for a logo image. table 3--18 describes each of the se ttings menu com- mands. table 3- 18: logo generator settings menu commands command function gray level... sets the gray level when a bitmap image is converted to a logo image. when you click this command, the gray scale settings dialog box appears. refer to gray scale settings dialog box on page 3--55 for detailed information about the dialog box parameters. miscellaneous... sets a logo name, user comment, and display position. when you click this command, the miscellaneous settings dialog box appears. refer to miscellaneous settings dialog box on page 3--56 for detailed information about the dialog box parameters. background sets the background color. file menu build menu settings menu
using logo generator tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 3-55 table 3- 18: logo generator settings menu commands (cont.) command function toolbar toggles the display of the toolbar on and off in the application window. a check mark precedes the command in the menu when the toolbar is selected for display. status bar toggles the display of the status bar on and off in the application window. a check mark precedes the command in the menu when the status bar is selected for display. save settings specifies whether all the settings are saved or not. gray scale settings dialog box. the gray scale settings dialog box (see figure 3--24) appears after you click the gray level... command. figure 3- 24: gray scale settings dialog box in this dialog box, you can set the following parameters: h white limit : sets the maximum level for the gray 2 level. the gray scale values grater than this value become white level. you can set the value from 0 to 255. the default value is 192. h gray limit : sets the maximum level for the gray 1 level. you can set the value from 0 to 255. the default value is 128. h blanking limit : sets the maximum level for the transparent. you can set the value from 0 to 255. the default value is 64. ok button enables all of the settings in the dialog box and closes the dialog box. cancel button cancels all of the settings in the dialog box and closes the dialog box.
using logo generator 3-56 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual reset values button resets all of the settings to the values when the dialog box is first displayed. default values button resets all of the settings to their default values. update display button enables all of the settings with the dialog box opened. miscellaneous settings dialog box. the miscellaneous settings dialog box (see figure 3--25) appears after you click the miscellaneous... command. figure 3- 25: miscellaneous settings dialog box in this dialog box, you can set the following parameters: h logo name : sets the logo name. this logo name is used when you select a logo from the logo overlay submenu of the dvg7 or hdvg7 module. the default logo name is the file name. h comment : sets the user comment described in the logo file. you need not enter any comments in general use. h vertical position : sets the vertical position where the logo is displayed on the monitor. you can set the value from --100% to 0%. the vertical position can be set from the logo overlay submenu of the dvg7 or hdvg7 module. h horizontal position : sets the horizontal position where the logo is displayed on the monitor. you can set the value from --100% to 0%. the horizontal position can be set from the logo overlay submenu of the dvg7 or hdvg7 module. ok button enables all of the settings in the dialog box and closes the dialog box. cancel button cancels all of the settings in the dialog box and closes the dialog box.
using logo generator tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 3-57 the help menu contains command that display the version information about the logo generator application. table 3--19 describes the help menu command. table 3- 19: logo generator help menu command command function about logogen... displays information including the logo generator software version number and copyright information. logo generator tutorials this subsection describes the basics of operating the logo generator application. perform the following steps to create a logo file (.lgo) from a windows bitmap file (.bmp). 1. select open from the file pull-down menu to open the open dialog box. 2. in the open dialog box, select the bitmap file on the pc that you want to convert, and then click the open button. this will display the bitmap image in the bmp view and the logo image converted to a gray scale in the lgo view. 3. select gray level... from the settings pull-down menu to open the gray scale settings dialog box shown in figure 3--24 on page 3--55. 4. in the gray scale settings dialog box, set the gray levels for the logo image. you can change the background color for the logo image using the back- ground command. 5. select miscellaneous... from the settings pull-down menu to open the miscellaneous settings dialog box shown in figure 3--25 on page 3--56. 6. in the miscellaneous settings dialog box, set the vertical and horizontal positions for the logo to be displayed on the monitor. if necessary, set the logo name and user comment. help menu creating a logo file
using logo generator 3-58 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 7. select build logo file from the build pull-down menu to open the bmp to lgo file conversion dialog box shown in figure 3--26. figure 3- 26: bmp to lgo file conversion dialog box 8. click the ok button to create the logo file.
tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 3-59 usingtg7setuptosetparameters tg7 setup, a standard accessary with the t g700, is a software application for a pc using the microsoft windows system. tg7 setup provides the capability to set all of the parameters of the TG700 mainframe and installed modules using a pc. this section provides the following information: h pc system requirements h installation instructions and ethernet setup h starting and exiting tg7 setup h elements of the tg7 setup window h using the tg7 setup menus h tg7 setup tutorial pc system requirements your pc requires the following minimum system requirements to load and operate the tg7 setup application: h microsoft windows 95, 98, 2000, or nt4.0 (for windows 95 or nt 4.0, internet explorer 4.01 or later needs to be installed) h ethernet interface installation instructions and ethernet setup this subsection provides the following instructions: installing the tg7 setup application on your pc, creating a desktop shortcut icon on the pc to run tg7 setup, connecting your pc(s) to the TG700 using the ethernet port, and setting the required ethernet parameters. the following installation instructions assume that you are familiar with the basics of using the window s operating system. if necessary, read your windows user documentation before installing tg7 setup. installing tg7 setup
using tg7 setup to set parameters 3-60 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual perform the following procedure to install tg7 setup: 1. be sure that your pc meets the requirements listed under pc system requirements on page 3--59 before proceeding with the installation. 2. insert the TG700 signal generator platform software library cd-rom into a cd-rom drive on your pc. 3. double-click the my computer icon and the cd-rom drive icon on the pc desktop. the pc will display the contents of the TG700 signal generator platform software library cd-rom. 4. double-click the tools folder and the tg7 setup folder on the pc desktop. the pc will display the contents of the tg7 setup folder. 5. double-click the setup.exe icon in the folder. this copies initial files of the tg7 setup application. for a while, the welcome window appears on the pc desktop. 6. read the displayed information, and then click the next> button to proceed with the installation. the pc will display the choose destination location window. the default directory location for the application is displayed. if you want to install tg7 setup in a custom location, click the browse... button, and then select or create a custom directory location. 7. click the next> button to proceed. the pc will display the select program folder window. the default name for the program folder is displayed. if you want to change the name, type in a new name or select a name from the existing folders list. 8. click the next> button to proceed. t he pc will display the start copying files window. 9. click the next> button to start the installation. if the installation is successful, the setup complete window is displayed. perform the following procedure to create an icon on your pc desktop that you can use to run the tg7 setup application. 1. on your pc display, move the mouse cursor to any unoccupied desktop area, and then click the right mouse button to open the desktop menu. 2. from the desktop menu select new , and then select shortcut to open the create shortcut dialog box. 3. click the browse... button in the create shortcut dialog box. creating a desktop shortcut icon
using tg7 setup to set parameters tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 3-61 4. use the browse dialog box to locate the tg7 setup directory. a. if you installed the tg7 setup application using the default directory location and the default folder name in the installation procedure, select the following directory folders in order: program files , tektronix , TG700 ,and tg7 setup . b. if you installed the tg7 setup application to a custom location or gave the application folder a custom name, you will need to select your custom directory path. c. you should now be at a location in the pc directory structure where the browse list box shows the tg7setup.exe file. 5. select the tg7setup.exe file (tg7setup.exe will be displayed in the file name box), and then click the open button. the directory path to the tg7setup.exe file will now be displayed in the command line box of the create shortcut dialog box. 6. click the next> button in the create shortcut dialog box. the default name of the shortcut icon is now displayed in the dialog box. you can edit the icon name to suit your needs or accept the default name. 7. click the finish button to finish creating the desktop shortcut icon. the tg7setup.exe shortcut icon will now appear on the pc desktop. you can start the tg7 setup application by double-clicking the tg7setup.exe (or your custom name) shortcut icon. tg7 setup uses the rear-panel 10 base-t port on the TG700 to communicate with a pc. refer to connectingtoanetwork on page 3--15 for detailed information about how to connect your pc(s) to the TG700 . before you can use tg7 setup to set the parameters of the TG700 mainframe and installed modules, you must set the ethernet network parameters for both the TG700 and the tg7 setup application. note . use the ping command from the pc to verify network communications after you set the ethernet network parameters for the TG700 and for the tg7 setup application. connecting your pc(s) to the TG700 setting ethernet network parameters
using tg7 setup to set parameters 3-62 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual ethernet parameters for the TG700. the ethernet network parameters for the TG700 can be set using the network setup submenu in the utility main menu. refer to setting ethernet network parameters on page 3--16 for detailed information about how to set the network parameters. ethernet parameters for tg7 setup. when you start the tg7 setup application, the ethernet dialog box appears as shown in figure 3--27. use this dialog box to set the ethernet network parameters for the tg7 setup application. figure 3- 27: ethernet dialog box for tg7 setup perform the following procedure to set the ethernet network parameters for the tg7 setup application: 1. use the ip address field in the dialog box to enter the ip address that you assigned to the TG700. 2. click the ok button to accept the se ttings and close the dialog box. starting and exiting tg7 setup when you complete the installation procedure, you can use any of the following methods to start the tg7 setup application: h double-click the tg7setup.exe shortcut icon on the pc desktop that you created during the installation procedure. h double-click the tg7setup.exe file name in the program manager window. h select tg7setup from the start -- programs menu. to exit (quit) the tg7 setup application, select exit from the file menu command list of the application. note . when you start the tg7 setup application, once the application window appears (see figure 3--28) the TG700 front-panel buttons are disabled.
using tg7 setup to set parameters tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 3-63 elements of the tg7 setup window figure 3--28 shows the tg7 setup application window. table 3--20 provides a description of the elements in the application window. title bar menu bar status bar setup window figure 3- 28: tg7 setup application window table 3- 20: elements of the tg7 setup window element description title bar the title bar displays the name of the application and contains the standard window-sizing boxes for windows. menu bar the menu bar displays the names of the four pull-down menus. refer to using tg7 setup menus, below, for detailed information about the functions available in the menus. setup window use the setup window to set the parameters for the installed modules or mainframe. this window appears after you select the open module or open TG700 command from the file pull-down menu. status bar the status bar displays the short explanation of the currently selected command and the information related to the operation.
using tg7 setup to set parameters 3-64 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual using the tg7 setup menus the menu bar displays the names of the four pull-down menus: file, view, window, and help. this section describes the function of each selection in these menus. the file menu contains commands for opening a setup window, for managing preset operations, and for exiting the tg7 setup application. table 3--21 describes each of the file menu commands. table 3- 21: tg7 setup file menu commands command function open TG700 opens the setup window for the TG700 mainframe. open module opens the setup window for the selected module. recall preset recalls the selected preset. save preset saves the current instrument settings to the selected preset. rename preset renames the selected preset name. when you select this command, the rename dialog box appears. refer to rename dialog box on page 3--65 for more information. exit exits the tg7 setup application. file menu
using tg7 setup to set parameters tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 3-65 rename dialog box. the rename dialog box (see figure 3--29) appears after you select the rename preset command. figure 3- 29: rename dialog box h current name : displays the current preset name. h new name : enter the desired preset name in the text box. ok button enables the new name and close the dialog box. cancel button cancels the renaming operation and closes the dialog box. the view menu status bar command toggles the display of the status bar on and off in the application window. a check mark precedes the command in the menu when the status bar is selected for display. the window menu contains commands that control the appearance of the setup windows in the application window. tab le 3--22 describ es each of the window menu commands. table 3- 22: tg7 setup window menu commands command function cascade arranges the setup windows so that they overlap one another. tile arranges the setup windows so that they do not overlap each other. arrange icons when the setup windows are min imize, arr ange their title bars. the help menu about tg7setup... command displays information including the tg7 setup software version number and copyright information. view menu window menu help menu
using tg7 setup to set parameters 3-66 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual tg7 setup tutorial after you have connected the TG700 to the pc using an ethernet cable and set the required network parameters, you can use tg7 setup to set the parameters for the TG700 mainframe and installed modules. note . refer to the operating basics section of each module?s user manual for detailed explanation of the parameters and their setting ranges. this subsection explains how to set the parameter(s) of an installed module. in this example, you will set the parameters for the dvg7 module. perform the following steps to set parameter(s): 1. select open module and dvg7 from the file pull-down menu to open the setup window for the dvg7 module shown in figure 3--30. tab for selecting the parameter item figure 3- 30: setup window for dvg7 module at the top of the setup window, there are several tabs to select parameters. when you click one of the tabs, you access the fields associated with that parameter. in figure 3--30, the signal tab is selected and the fields for setting the signal format, signal set, output signal, frame picture, and timing are displayed. setting parameter(s)
using tg7 setup to set parameters tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 3-67 when you change any parameter in the window, the apply button at the bottom of the window becomes active. press this button to enable the new parameter setting(s). 2. click the tab associated with the parameter you want to set. this opens the parameter fields for that tab. 3. set parameter(s) in the displayed fields. 4. repeat steps 2 and 3 until all of the parameter settings are completed. 5. when you finish making changes to the parameters, click the apply button. this enables the parameter settings in the setup window and transfers them to the TG700. note . if you select a signal file or a picture file that is not assigned to a test signal button on the TG700 front panel, an error message appears when you click the apply button. if this happens, you need to assign the file to a test signal button. refer to signal key assign submenu on page 3--9 for more information. when you change parameter(s) for a module that module is selected in the TG700, regardless of what is shown on the display. to preven t addressing the wrong module from the front panel after you exit tg7 setup, first select any of the modules using the module bu tton and then make settings.
using tg7 setup to set parameters 3-68 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual
tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 3-69 using the file copy tools the file copy tools; tg7 backup, tg7 restore, and tg7 duplicator, standard accessories with the TG700, are software applications for a pc using the microsoft windows system. tg7 backup and tg7 restore provide the capability to backup and restore preset files between a pc and the TG700 using the ethernet interface. tg7 duplicator provides the capab ility to transfer all of the files between two TG700 generators, using the ethernet interface. this section provides the following information: h pc system requirements h installation instructions and ethernet setup h starting and exiting the file copy tools h file copy tools tutorials pc system requirements your pc requires the following minimum system requirements to load and operate the file copy tools: h microsoft windows 2000/xp h ethernet interface installation instructions and ethernet setup this subsection provides the following instructions: installing the file copy tools on your pc, creating a desktop shortcut icon on the pc to run the file copy tools, and connecting your pc(s) to the TG700 using the ethernet port. the following installation instructions assume that you are familiar with the basics of using the window s operating system. if necessary, read your windows user documentation before installing the file copy tools. perform the following procedure to install the file copy tools: 1. be sure that your pc meets the requirements listed under pc system requirements, above, before proceedin g with the installation. 2. insert the TG700 signal generator platform software library cd-rom into a cd-rom drive on your pc. installing the file copy tools
using the file copy tools 3-70 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 3. double-click the my computer icon and the cd-rom drive icon on the pc desktop. the pc will display the contents of the TG700 signal generator platform software library cd-rom. 4. double-click the tools folder and TG700 file copy tools folder on the pc desktop. the pc will display the contents of the TG700 file copy tools folder. 5. double-click the setup.exe icon in the folder. this copies initial files of the file copy tools. for a while, the welcome window appears on the pc desktop. 6. read the displayed information, and then click the next> button to proceed with the installation. the pc will display the choose destination location window. the default directory location for the applications is displayed. if you want to install the file copy tools in a custom location, click the browse... button, and then select or create a custom directory location. 7. click the next> button to proceed. the pc will display the select program folder window. the default name for the program folder is displayed. if you want to change the name, type in a new name or select a name from the existing folders list. 8. click the next> button to proceed. t he pc will display the start copying files window. 9. click the next> button to start the installation. if the installation is successful, the setup complete windows is displayed. perform the following procedure to create icons on your pc desktop that you can use to run the file copy tools; tg7 backup, tg7 restore, and tg7 duplicator. 1. on your pc display, move the mouse cursor to any unoccupied desktop area, and then click the right mouse button to open the desktop menu. 2. from the desktop menu select new , and then select shortcut to open the create shortcut dialog box. 3. click the browse... button in the create shortcut dialog box. creating a desktop shortcut icon
using the file copy tools tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 3-71 4. use the browse dialog box to locate the logo generator directory. a. if you installed the file copy tools using the default directory location and the default folder name in the installation procedure, select the following directory folders in order: program files , tektronix , tg7 , and file copy tools . b. if you installed the file copy tools to a custom location or gave the application folder a custom name, you will need to select your custom directory path. c. you should now be at a location in the pc directory structure where the browse list box shows the tg7backup.exe , tg7duplicator.exe ,and tg7restore.exe files. 5. select the tg7backup.exe , tg7duplicator.exe ,or tg7restore.exe file andthenclickthe open button. the directory path to the selected file will now be displayed in the command line box of the create shortcut dialog box. 6. click the next> button in the create shortcut dialog box. the default name of the shortcut icon is now displayed in the dialog box. you can edit the icon name to suit your needs or accept the default name. 7. click the finish button to finish creating the desktop shortcut icon. the selected shortcut icon will now appear on the pc desktop. repeat steps 1 to 6 to create the desktop shortcut icons for the other applications. you can start any of the application by double-clicking the corresponding (or your custom name) shortcut icon. tg7 backup, tg7 restore, and tg7 duplicator use the rear-panel 10 base-t port on the TG700 to communicate with a pc or another TG700. refer to connectingtoanetwork on page 3--15 for detailed information about how to connect your pc(s) to the TG700. before you can use the tg7 backup, tg7 restore, or tg7 duplicator to transfer files between the TG700 and your pc(s) o r between two TG700 generators, you must first set the ethernet network parameters for the TG700. note . use the ping command from the pc to verify network communications after you set the ethernet network parameters for the TG700 and for the tg7 backup or tg7 restore application. connecting your pc(s) to the TG700 setting ethernet network parameters
using the file copy tools 3-72 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual ethernet parameters for the TG700. the ethernet network parameters for the TG700 can be set using the network setup submenu in the utility main menu. refer to setting ethernet network parameters on page 3--16 for detailed information about how to set the network parameters. starting and exiting the file copy tools when you complete the installation procedure, you can use any of the following methods to start the file copy tools: h double-click the tg7backup.exe, tg 7 dupli.exe, or tg7restore.exe shortcut icon on the pc desktop that you created during the installation procedure. h double-click the tg7backup.exe, tg7d upli.exe, or tg7restore.exe file name in the program manager window. h select tg7backup, tg7dupli, or tg7restore from the start -- programs menu. to exit (quit) the tg7 backup, tg7 duplicator, or tg7 restore application, select exit from the file menu command list of the application. file copy tools tutorials this subsection describes the basics of operating the tg7 backup, tg7 restore, and tg7 duplicator applications. the tg7 backup application allow you to backup all of the preset files saved in the TG700 to your pc. about a preset file. a preset file is a file saved in the preset folders of all of the installed modules and has the following format: mstate.p for example, mstate1.p01 is the preset for the module installed in slot 1 of the TG700, with preset number 1. all of the folders and files in the TG700 file system are displayed using the tg7 comm application. refer to using tg7 comm for file transfers on page 3--27 for detailed information about the tg7 comm application. backing up preset files by tg7 backup
using the file copy tools tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 3-73 backup procedure. perform the following steps to backup all of the preset files from the TG700 to the pc: 1. start the tg7 backup application to open the tg7 backup window shown in figure 3--31. figure 3- 31: tg7 backup window 2. use the ip address field in the window to enter the ip address of the TG700. 3. use the save directory field in the dialog box to specify the destination folder for the preset files you are going to backup to your pc. 4. click the backup button to start the backup operation. when the backup operation is complete, the dialog box appears as shown in figure 3--32. figure 3- 32: dialog box shows backup is complete 5. click the ok button.
using the file copy tools 3-74 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual the tg7 restore application allows you to restore all of the preset files saved in the pc to the TG700. note . to restore the all of the preset files to the TG700 and reuse them, the hardware configuration of the TG700 must be the same hardware configuration as when the preset files were ba cked up. perform the following steps to restore all of the preset files from the pc to the TG700: 1. start the tg7 restore application to open the tg7 restore window shown in figure 3--33. figure 3- 33: tg7 restore window 2. use the ip address field in the window to enter the ip address of the TG700. 3. use the restore directory field in the dialog box to specify the folder in which the preset files are saved. 4. click the restore button to start the restore operation. when the restore operation is complete, the dialog box appears as shown in figure 3--34. figure 3- 34: dialog box shows restore is complete restoring preset files with tg7 restore
using the file copy tools tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 3-75 5. click the ok button. the tg7 duplicator application allows you to transfer all of the files in one TG700 to another TG700. note . to transfer files between the two TG700 using the tg7 duplication application, both of the instruments need to be the same memory size. perform the following steps to transfer all of the files in one TG700 to another TG700: 1. start the tg7 duplicator application to open the tg7 duplicator window shown in figure 3--35. figure 3- 35: tg7 duplicator window 2. use the source ip addr. field in the window to enter the ip address of the source instrument. 3. use the target ip addr. field in the window to enter the ip address of the target instrument. 4. click the copy button to start the file transfer operation. the progress gauge appears to show that file transfer is progressing. caution. do not power off either of the TG700?s until file transfer is complete. doing so will cause both instruments to not start up normally. transferring files by tg7 duplicator
using the file copy tools 3-76 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual when the file transfer is complete, the dialog box appears as shown in figure 3--36. figure 3- 36: dialog box shows file transfer is complete 5. click the ok button.
tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 3-77 syntax this section contains information on the standard commands for programmable instruments (scpi) and ieee 488.2 common commands you can use to program your TG700. the information is organized in the following subsections: h programming model -- this subsection provides information on program- ming prerequisites h scpi commands and queries -- this subsection describes the scpi command organization and syntax h ieee 488.2 common commands -- this subsection lists the commands and argument structures that are common to all scpi commands h constructed mnemonics -- this subsection describes the usage of constructed mnemonics by the TG700. h block arguments -- this subsection describes the usage of block arguments by the TG700. h special characters -- this subsection lists the special character sets that are used by the remote control interface.
syntax 3-78 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual programming model specific conditions must exist before programming commands will affect the test signal generated by a module. select the module to be addressed before executing any commands. many of the commands used by the TG700 are shared by several modules and will be accepted wit hout a reported error. many commands accept either string or numeric arguments. for example: a boolean argument can either be ?1? or ?on?. select signal parameter commands accept either a numeric value or one of the following strings: minimum. use this argument to query the minimum value or set the parameter value to the minimum acceptable value. maximum. use this argument to query the maximum value or set the parameter value to the maximum acceptable value. default. use this argument to query the default value or set the parameter value to the default value. up. use this argument to increase the parameter value one increment as defined by the :step value. down. use this argument to decrease the parameter value one increment as defined by the :step value. note . if the TG700 does not return a value in response to a min or max query, then the values are undefined and an error message is generated. addressing module test signals command arguments
syntax tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 3-79 the following example demonstrates the effect of each of the arguments when used with a step value. 1. :instrument:select hdvg7:#" selects the hdtv digital video generator module located in the slot number indicated by the ?#? symbol. 2. :output:circle:state on displays a circle on the video display. note . :output:circle:diameter uses an argument that is the percent of picture height. 3. :output:circle:diameter default sets the circle diameter to 90 percent of the screen height. 4. :output:circle:diameter:step 10 sets the step increment to 10 percent. 5. :output:circle:diameter down changes the circle diameter to 80 percent of the screen height. 6. :output:circle:diameter 50 changes the circle diameter to 50 percent of the screen height. 7. :output:circle:diameter maximum changes the circle diameter to 100 percent of the screen height. 8. :output:circle:diameter minimum changes the circle diameter to 0 percent of the screen height. 9. :output:circle:diameter up changes the circle diameter to 10 percent of the screen height. 10. :output:circle:diameter? maximum queries the maximum circle diameter (not the current diameter). the query returns the value of 100 percent, which is the maximum circle diameter allowable. argument example
syntax 3-80 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual scpi commands and queries scpi is a standard created by a consortium that provides guidelines for remote programming of instruments. these guidelines provide a consistent program- ming environment for instrument control and data transfer. this environment uses defined programming messages, instrument responses, and data format across all scpi instruments, regardless of manufacturer. the TG700 uses a command language based on the scpi standard. the scpi language is based on a hierarchical or tree structure (see figure 3--37) that represents a subsystem. the top level of the tree is the root node; it is followed by one or more lower-level nodes. diameter output circle position state root node lower-level nodes figure 3- 37: example of scpi subsystem hierarchy tree you can create commands and queries from these subsystem hierarchy trees. commands specify actions for the instrument to perform. queries return measurement data and information about parameter settings. scpi commands are created by stringing together the nodes of a subsystem hierarchy and separa ting each node by a colon. in figure 3--37, output is the root node and circle, state, diameter, and position are lower-level nodes. to create a scpi command, start with the root node output and move down the tree stru cture adding nodes until you reach the end of a branch. most commands and some queries have parameters; you must include a value for these parameters. if you specify a parameter value that is out of range, the parameter will be set to a default value. for example, output:circle:state on is a valid scpi command created from the hierarchy tree in figure 3--37. to create a query, start at the root node of a tree structure, move down to the end of a branch, and add a question mark. output:circle:state? is an example of a valid scpi query using the hierarchy tree in figure 3--37. creating commands creating queries
syntax tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 3-81 every parameter in the command and query descriptions is of a specified type. the parameters are enclosed in brackets, such as . the parameter type is listed after the parameter and is enclosed in parentheses, for example, (discrete). some parameter types are defined specifically for the TG700 command set and some are defined by ansi/ieee 488.2-1987 (see table 3--23). table 3- 23: parameter types used in syntax descriptions parameter type description example binary binary numbers #b0110 arbitrary block 1 a specified length of arbitrary data #512234xxxxx ...where5 indicates that the following 5 digits (12234) specify the length of the data in bytes; xxxxx ... indicates the data boolean boolean numbers or values on or 1 off or 0 discrete a list of specific values min, max, up, down hexadecimal 2 hexadecimal numbers (0--9, a, b, c, d, e, f) #haa, #h1 nr1 2,3 numeric integers 0, 1, 15, --1 nr2 2 numeric decimal numbers 1.2, 3.141516, --6.5 nr3 2 numeric floating point numbers 3.1415e--9, --16.1e5 nrf 2 numeric flexible decimal number that may be type nr1, nr2 or nr3 see nr1, nr2, nr3 examples string 4 alphanumeric characters (must be within quotation marks) ?testing 1, 2, 3? 1 defined in ansi/ieee 488.2 as ?definite length arbitrary block response data.? 2 an ansi/ieee 488.2- 1992-defined parameter type. 3 some commands and queries will accept a hexadecimal value even though the parameter type is defined as nr1. 4 defined in ansi/ieee 488.2 as ?string response data.? parameter types
syntax 3-82 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual you can abbreviate most scpi commands, queries, and parameters to an accepted short form. this manual shows these short forms as a combination of upper and lower case letters. the upper case letters indicate the accepted short form of a command. as shown in figure 3--38, you can create a short form by using only the upper case letters. the accepted short f orm and the long form are equivalent and request the same action of the instrument. long form of a command minimum information needed for accepted short form accepted short form of a command and parameter outp:eaud:chan2:ampl 10 outp ut:eaud io:chan nel2:ampl itude 10 figure 3- 38: example of abbreviating a command note . the numeric suffix of a command or query may be included in either the long form or short form; the TG700 will default to ?1? if no suffix is used. in figure 3--38, the ?2? of ?chan2? indicates that the command is directed to the second channel.. abbreviating commands, queries, and parameters
syntax tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 3-83 you can chain several commands or queries together into a single message. to create a chained message, first create a command or query, add a semicolon (;), and then add more commands or queries and semicolons until you are done. if the command following a semicolon is a root node, pr ecede it with a colon (:). figure 3--39 illustrates a chained message consisting of several commands and queries. the single chained message should end in a command or query, not a semicolon. responses to any queries in your message are separated by semico- lons. :outp:circ:diam 75;:outp:eaud:stat on;:outp:eaud:grro:nbit?;:outp:logo:pos:hor? first command second command second query the response from this chained message might be response from first query response from second query 24;-35 first query figure 3- 39: example of chaining commands and queries if a command has the same root and lower-level nodes as the previous command, you can omit these nodes. in figure 3--40, the second command has the same root node (circ) as the first command, so these nodes can be omitted. identical root and lower-level nodes first command additional commands (omitting the root nodes) :outp:circ:diam 25;:outp:circ:pos:vert 25;:outp:circ:stat on :outp:circ:dima 25;pos:vert 25;stat on figure 3- 40: example of omitting root and lower-level nodes in a chained message chaining commands and queries
syntax 3-84 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual here are three general rules for using scpi commands, queries, and parameters: h you can use single (? ?) or double (? ?) quotation marks for quoted strings, but you cannot use both types of quotation marks for the same string. correct: ?this string uses quotation marks correctly.? correct: ?this string also uses quotation marks correctly.? incorrect: ?this string does not use quotation marks correctly.? h you can use upper case, lower case, or a mixture of both cases for all commands, queries, and parameters. output:text:position:horizontal 25 is the same as output:text:position:horizontal 25 and output:text:position:horizontal 25 note . literal strings (quoted) are case sensitive. for example: file names. h no embedded spaces are allowe d between or within nodes. correct: output:text:position:horizontal 25 incorrect: output: text: position: hor izontal 25 general rules
syntax tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 3-85 ieee 488.2 common commands ansi/ieee standard 488.2 defines the codes, formats, protocols, and usage of common commands and queries used on the interface between the controller and the instruments. the TG700 complies with this standard. the syntax for an ieee 488.2 common command is an asterisk (*) followed by a command and, optionally, a space and parameter value. the syntax for an ieee 488.2 common query is an asterisk (*) followed by a query and a question mark. all of the common commands and queries are listed in the last part of the syntax and commands section. the following are examples of common commands: h *ese 16 h *cls the following are examples of common queries: h *esr? h *idn? this manual may describe commands and queries using the backus-naur form (bnf) notation. table 3--24 de fines the standard bnf symbols: table 3- 24: bnf symbols and meanings symbol meaning <> defined element ::= is defined as | exclusive or {} group; one element is required [] optional; can be omitted ... previous element(s) may be repeated () comment this manual uses (end of message) to represent a message terminator. symbol meaning message terminator description command and query structure backus-naur form definition message terminators
syntax 3-86 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual the end-of-message terminator may be the ascii code for line feed (lf) sent as the last data byte. the TG700 always terminates messages with lf. it allows white space before the terminator. constructed mnemonics some header mnemonics specify one of a range of mnemonics. for example, an audio channel mne monic can be either channel1, channel2, channel3, or channel4.you use these mnemonics in the command just as you do any other mnemonic. for example, there is a :outp:eaud:chan1:stat? query, and there is also an :outp:eaud:chan2:stat? query. in the command descriptions, this list of choices is abbreviated as channel . the value of is the upper range of valid suffixes. if the numeric suffix is omitted, the TG700 uses the default value of ?1?. block arguments several TG700 commands use a block argument form: symbol meaning a non-zero digit character, in the range 1--9 a digit character, in the range 0--9 a character with the hex equivalent of 00 through ff hexadecimal (0 through 255 decimal) a block of data bytes, defined as: ::= { #[...][...] | #0[...] } specifies the number of elements that follow. taken together, the elements form a decimal integer that specifies how many elements follow.
syntax tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 3-87 special characters the remote control interface handles characters differently than the front panel or sdp2000 software. standard symbol (ascii) remote control sequence / (47) ?s \ (92) ?b -- (45) ?h ? (96) ?? : (58) ?c line return ^ (94) signal names created from sdp2000 software will be displayed as created. signals created or displayed using the scpi interface use the remote control sequence. for example: ?sinx/x? is displayed as ?sinx/x? via the front panel or sdp2000 software; however, ?sinx/x? is displayed as ?sinx?sx? via when using scpi. use the caret symbol ?^? as a line return when naming buttons and signals.
syntax 3-88 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual
tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 3-89 remote commands this section describes the remote command set used in the TG700. the commands for the TG700 are divided into the following eight groups: h common commands h display commands h instrument commands h mass memory commands h program commands h sense commands h status commands h system commands the TG700 can be controlled remotely through the ethernet interface on the rear panel. refer to connectingtoanetwork on page 3--15 for detailed information about how to connect and set up for remote operation. common commands the common commands have a ?*? prefix and address all of the installed modules. *cls *ese(?) *esr? *idn? *opc(?) *opt? *rst *sre(?) *stb? *tst? *wai command tree
remote commands 3-90 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual *cls clears sesr (standard event status register), the sbr (status byte register), and event queue, which are used in the instrument status and event reporting system. *ese sets the bits of the eser (event status enable register) used in the status and events reporting system. *ese? returns the contents of the eser. *esr? returns the contents of sesr (standard event status register) used in the status and events reporting system. *idn? returns the id information of the instrument. *opc causes bit 0 in the sesr (standard event status register) to be set , and the operation complete message to be issued, when all pending operations are finished. *opc? waits until all pending operations are finished and returns a ?1 ? ascii character. *opt? lists all of the occupied slots i n the TG700 and the nomenclature, slot, hardware version, and software version of the installed modules. each field is a slot. each field is separated by commas. the information within a field is colon delimited, as in ?:::?. *rst resets the instrument to the default state. command description
remote commands tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 3-91 *sre sets the bits of the srer (service request enable register). *sre? returns the contents of srer. *stb? returns the value of the sbr (status byte register). bit 6 of the sbr is read as a mss (master status summary) bit. *tst? self-test query. this query does not perform any tests; however, this query is accepted as a valid comma nd to comply with ieee 488.2 requirements. *wai wait-to-continue command. this command is not necessary since the TG700 handles commands sequentially; however, this query is accepted as a valid comma nd to comply with ieee 488.2 require- ments. display commands use these commands to control the contrast and backlight settings of the lcd display. :display :backlight on|off :contrast [:window][:text][:data] :display:backlight on|off turns the lcd display backlight on or off. you can use 1 or 0 instead of on or off. :display:backlight? returns the current status of the backlight. command tree command description
remote commands 3-92 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual :display:contrast controls the intensity of the front-panel lcd display. the value should be an integer number between 1 and 40. :display:contrast? returns the current contrast value. instrument commands use these commands to list, identify, and query modules. :instrument :catalog? :full? [:select] :nselect :instrument:catalog? returns a comma delimited list of all slots that are occupied by modules. :instrument:catalog:full? returns a comma delimited list of module names and slot numbers, in pairs. the string type of module and the numeric suffix indicates the slot. for example, ?agl7:1?, 1, ?hdvg7:2?, 2 indicates a agl7 in slot 1, and a hdvg7 in slot 2. :instrument:[:select] selects a module by name. :instrument:[:select]? returns a module by name. :instrument:nselect select a module by slot number. command tree command description
remote commands tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 3-93 :instrument:nselect? returns a module by slot number. mass memory commands all signal movement within the mem ory is accomplishe d by copying all appropriate files of the named signal(s) to the new location. the signal tree is traversable and the use of wildcards permits copying or storing individual signals or the entire module signal list. :mmemory :catalog? [] :cdirectory :copy , :data , :delete :load :download :preset | :signal , :mdirectory :move , :rdirectory :signal :active? :store :preset | :preset :catalog? :all? :delete | :rename , the argument is the full or partial path name to a signal found in a module. the argument is the ms-dos compatible naming convention. for example, the syntax for a complete path would be: module_type/signal_se t/button/test_signal h module_type is the directory level for a given module type h signal_set is the directory level for different sets of signals h button is the directory level for different buttons h test_signal is the directory level for different test signals command tree
remote commands 3-94 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual :mmemory:catalog? [] lists the current directory level. if at the top level, it returns a list of signal sets and the other files and directories for the module partition you are currently in. if in a signal set directory, it returns a list of buttons. if in a button directory, it returns a list of test signals. query response -- , , ,, , ,, :mmemory:cdirectory [] changes the current working directory. :mmemory:cdirectory? returns the current working directory path. :mmemory:copy , copies a file within the TG700 file system. wildcards are not supported. this command is provided to support sequence files and is not recommended for use with signal files. :mmemory:data , loads data created by a pc to the flash memory of the TG700 with the specified file name. the file name should have an appropriate extension. :mmemory:data? lists the block data for the specified file name. :mmemory:delete removes files from the flash memory of the TG700. :mmemory:load:download adds dnl files to the TG700. :mmemory:load:preset | loads a saved preset. this command accepts the name of a previously saved preset. current instrument settings are overwritten by this command. the preset_ids are from 0 to 15; 0 represents the power on default, 1 to 13 represent ordinary presets, 14 represents the user default, and 15 represents the factory default. command description
remote commands tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 3-95 :mmemory:load:signal , :mmemory:load:signal , loads the named signal into the named module. the current signal in the module is overwritten. :mmemory:mdirectory creates a directory by the given name. :mmemory:move , changes the name of the specified file. :mmemory:rdirectory removes the specified directory from the file system. :mmemory:signal:active? | lists the current output signa l in the specified module. :mmemory:store:preset | saves all the instrument settings with the specified preset id or preset name. the preset_ids are from 0 to 15; 0 represents the power on default, 1 to 13 represent ordinary presets, 14 represents the user default, and 15 represents the factory default. :mmemory:preset:catalog? lists the name of the specified preset saved in the TG700. the preset_ids are from 0 to 15; 0 represents the power on default, 1 to 13 represent ordinary presets, 14 represents the user default, and 15 represents the factory default. :mmemory:preset:catalog:all? lists the names of all presets saved in the TG700. :mmemory:preset:delete | deletes the specified preset saved in the TG700. the preset_ids are from0to15;0representsthepowerondefault,1to13represent ordinary presets, 14 represents the user default, and 15 represents the factory default. :mmemory:preset:rename , renames the specified preset saved in the TG700. the preset_ids are from 0 to 15; 0 represents the power on default, 1 to 13 represent ordinary presets, 14 represents the user default, and 15 represents the factory default.
remote commands 3-96 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual program commands use these commands to access and run programs called ?sequences?. :program [:selected]? :name :state run|pause|stop|continue :wait? :explicit :state ,run|pause|stop|continue :wait? :program[:selected]:name selects the default sequence file. :program[:selected]:name? returns the name of the default sequence file. :program[:selected]:state run|pause|stop|continue controls execution of the default sequence. the choices are run, pause, stop, and continue. :program[:selected]:state? returns the condition of the execution of the default sequence. :program[:selected]:wait holds off further commands until the default sequence completes. :program[:selected]:wait? if sequence has terminated or paused, this returns 1. if sequence is running, this returns 0. :program:explicit:state run|pause|stop|continue controls execution of the specified sequence. the choices are run, pause, stop, and continue. :program:explicit:state? returns the condition of the execution of the specified sequence. command tree command description
remote commands tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 3-97 :program:explicit:wait holds off further commands until the specified sequence completes. :program:explicit:wait? if sequence has terminated or paused, this returns 1. if sequence is running, this returns 0. sense commands use these queries to list which generator modules are using which frame reset signals. :sense :roscillator :frame[3] :catalog? :frequency? :sense:roscillator:frame:catalog? lists the modules using the frame reset signal . the suffix identifies which of three frame reset signals to query. :sense:roscillator:frame:frequency? lists the specific frame reset signal frequency. command tree command description
remote commands 3-98 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual status commands use these commands to address the instrument status and event queue. :status :operation [:event]? :condition? :enable :ptransition :ntransition :map , :instrument [:event]? :condition? :enable :ptransition :ntransition :preset :queue [:next] :enable :questionable [:event]? :condition? :enable :ptransition :ntransition :map , :instrument [:event]? :condition? :enable :ptransition :ntransition command tree
remote commands tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 3-99 preset. the operation node covers areas of instrument operational events. this node reports such items as signal settling, calibration, or running a sequence questionable. the questionable node covers areas of questionable conditions that exist within the instrument. questionable conditions might cause you to be unsure of the quality of the generated signals. subnodes. each node has a set of subnodes that query the contents, or control the involvement , of each bit. h enable selects which bits are active in reporting the status. h event is a destructive query only of the status. h condition is a nondesctructive query only of the status. h ptransition allows a status to become true on a positive transition of the event. h ntransition allows a status to become true on a negative transition of the event. h map reassigns event reporting at the top level of the status hierarchy. h instrument. both main nodes have this sub node that summarizes the operational and questionable condition of the instrument. each bit in these two registers represents a slot in the TG700. the summation of each register will feed into bit 13 of its respective parent register. preset. all of the enable registers are set to true so that they return to power-up conditions. queue. queue:enable enables certain events or error conditions to be reported. values that are not explicitly specified are not reported. status:queue[:next?] is the same as system:error?. due to the repetitiveness of this subsystem, the details will be covered for the nodes event, condition, enable, ptran sition, ntranstion, and map. the syntax and examples do not include the full command. refer to the command tree to derive what commands would be appropriate. the following text then describes each major branch within the status subsystem. command description
remote commands 3- 100 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual [:event]? performs a destructive reading of the specific event status register. the contents are cleared by reading or by *cls. :condition? performs a nondestructive reading of the specified condition register. contents are cleared as a result of *cls. :enable sets the register that enables the individual bits within the event register, which records event transition. :enable? returns the current event register settings. :ptransition sets the transistion register for enabling events to set bits true during a positive transition. :ptransition? returns the transistion register for enabling events to set bits true during a positive transition. :ntransition sets the transition register for enabling events to set bits true during a negative transition. :ntransition? returns the transition register for enabling events to set bits true during a negative transition. :status:operation:map , :status:questionable:map , reassigns events to bits in the operation or questionable registers.
remote commands tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 3- 101 system commands use these commands to query the system related information and set the front-panel lock function. :system :error [:next]? :help :syntax? :klock :state on|off :version? :system:error? lists the next event in the error/event queue. queue is cleared at power up, upon *cls, and upon reading the last item. :system:help:syntax? lists correct command syntax. :system:klock:state on|off locks or unlocks the front-panel buttons. you can use 1 or 0 instead of on or off. :system:klock:state? returns the current status of the front-panel buttons. :system:version? lists the scpi compliance version. query only. command tree command description
remote commands 3- 102 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual
tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 3- 103 sequence programming sequence programs enable the TG700 to execute routines using scpi com- mands. the TG700 accepts sequences wr itten using the tcl programming language. writing a sequence program sequence programs can be created externally to the TG700 using tcl program- ming and loaded via ethernet interface into the file system of the TG700. sequences can also be loaded through scpi commands using the program subsystem commands. a sequence program can be very simple or it can contain many steps. a running sequence program is interpreted by the tcl parser and some tcl formatting information is required. a few points are mentioned here to show why they are used in the sample. full information on tcl programming is found in part 1 of tcl and the tk toolkit: addison--wesley publishing company, 1994. h comments in tcl sequences are preceded by the # symbol as the first nonblank character in the line. the # symbol appearing in the line at other locations is treated as any other character. h scpi commands that use double quote marks require an escape backslash (\?string\?) in order to pass to scpi using the tcl scpi command. h scpi commands should a ll be preceded with the string ?scpi ?. running a sequence when you run a sequence, you need to download the corresponding sequence file (.seq) to the sequence folder (/f0:/sequence directory) of the TG700 in advance. stored sequences can be called and started from the sequence main menu. refer to using tg7 comm for file transfers on page 3--27 for instructions on how to download a sequence file. running a sequence from remote control using scpi commands requires the following steps:
sequence programming 3- 104 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 1. use the prog:sel:name command to select the sequence program to run. you can also use the prog:expl:stat ,run command at this point to start the sequence named explicitly. the syntax of the file can be used without quotes, unless a period is used in the name to separate the base from the extension. if a file extension is used, then quotes are required to convey the name to the TG700. examples: prog:expl:stat test1,run prog:name ?t_0044.tcl? 2. use the prog:sel:stat run command to start the named sequence. send prog:sel:stat stop to stop the running sequence if is is not self terminating. tcl programming changes the TG700 uses the following extended tcl commands: sleep [ []] delay for the specified seconds and optional tenths and hundredths of seconds scpi specifies that the command following is a scpi command. the tcl parser passes it immediately to the scpi command interpreter. command: usage: command: usage:
appendices

tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual a-1 appendix a: specifications tables a-1 through a-3 list the electrical, environmental, and mechanical characteristics of the tg 700 mainframe. for the specifications of a specific generator module or other module, refer to the module user manual. table a-4 lists the certification and compliances. the performance requirements listed in the electrical characteristics portion of these specifications apply over an ambient temperature range of 0 cto+50 c. the rated accuracies are valid when the instrument is calibrated at an ambient temperature range of +20 cto+30 c, after a warm-up time of 20 minutes. electrical characteristics table a-1: electrical characteristics characteristic performance requirements reference information the number of modules that can be installed maximum 4 only a limited number of some m odules can be installed in a TG700 mainframe: agl7 maximum 1 avg7 maximum 2 awvg7 maximum 2 hdvg7 maximum 2 clock stability < 1 ppm/year ac power source rating voltage 100 v to 240 vac voltage range 85 v to 250 vac frequency range 48 hz to 63 hz maximum power 100 w maximum current 1.2 a heat dissipation maximum power 100 w maximum. maximum line current is 1.2armsat50hz surge current 40 a peak for equal or less than 5 line cycles, after the instrument has been turned off for at least 30 seconds. clearance side 5cm rear 5cm
appendix a: specifications a-2 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual environmental characteristics table a-2: environmental characteristics characteristic description temperature operating 0 _ cto+50 _ c nonoperating -- 2 0 _ cto+60 _ c relative humidity operating 20% to 80% (no condensation) maximum wet-bulb temperature 29.4 _ c nonoperating 5% to 90% (no condensation) maximum wet-bulb temperature 40.0 _ c altitude operating to 4.5 km (15,000 feet) maximum operating temperature decreases 1 _ c each 300 m above 1.5 km. nonoperating to 15 km (50,000 feet) vibration operating 2.65 m/s 2( 0.27 g rms) , 5 hz to 500 hz, 10 min, three axes nonoperating 22.3 m/s 2 (2.28 g rms) , 5 hz to 500 hz, 10 min, three axes shock nonoperating 294 m/s 2 (30 g), half-sine, 11 ms duration mechanical characteristics table a-3: mechanical characteristics characteristic description dimensions height 44 mm width 483 mm depth 559 mm weight 1 net approximately 5.5 kg (mainframe only, without rack rail) 1 weight of the tg 700 will vary depending on the number and type of generator or other modules installed.
appendix a: specifications tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual a-3 (mm) figure a-1: TG700 dimensions
appendix a: specifications a-4 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual certifications and compliances table a-4: certifications and compliances category standard or description ec declaration of conformity -- emc meets the intent of directive 89/336/eec for electromagnetic compatib ility. compliance was demonstrated to the following specifications as listed in the official journal of the european communities:c en 55103-1 emissions: en 55022 class b radiated and conducted emissions en 55103-1 annex a magnetic field emissions en 55103-1 annex b power line inrush current en 61000-3-2 ac power line harmonic current emissions en 61000-3-3 line voltage alteration and flicker en 55103-2 immunity: en 61000-4-2 electrostatic discharge immunity en 61000-4-3 rf electromagnetic field amplitude modulated en 61000-4-4 electrical fast transient/burst immunity en 61000-4-5 ac mains surge immunity en 61000-4-6 conducted rf immunity en 61000-4-8 power frequency electromagnetic field immunity en 61000-4-11 mains voltage dip & interruption immunity en 55103-2 annex a magnetic field immunity high--quality shielded cables must be used to ensure compliance to the above listed standards. australia/new zealand declaration of conformity -- emc complies with emc provision of radiocommunications act per the following standard(s): as/nzs 3548 industrial, scientific, and medical equipment: 1992 safety complies with the following safety standards/regulations: ul 3111-1 csa c22.2 no.1010.1 en 61010-1 with second amendment installation (overvoltage) category terminals on this product may have different installation (overvoltage) category designa- tions. the installation categories are: cat iii distribution-level mains (usually permanently connected). equipment at this level is typically in a fixed industrial location. cat ii local-level mains (wall sockets). equipment at this level includes appliances, portable tools, and similar pr oducts. equipment is usually cord-connected. cat i secondary (signal level) or battery operated circuits of electronic equipment.
appendix a: specifications tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual a-5 table a-4: certifications and compliances (cont.) category standard or description pollution degree a measure of the contaminates that could occur in the environment around and within a product. typically the internal environment inside a product is considered to be the same as the external. products should be used only in the environment for which they are rated. pollution degree 2 normally only dry, nonconductive pollution occurs. occasionally a temporary conductivity that is caused by condensation must be expected. this location is a typical office/home environment. temporary condensation occurs only when the product is out of service. iec characteristics equipment type: test and measuring installation category ii (as defined in iec 61010-1, annex j) pollution degree 2 (as defined iec 61010-1) safety class1 (as defined in iec 61010-1, annex h)--grounded product
appendix a: specifications a-6 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual
TG700 tv signal generator platform user manual b-1 appendix b: module installation this section provides instructions for installing and removing modules from the TG700 mainframe. a screwdriver with a #1 phillips tip is the only tool you need to install or remove a module. caution. to prevent damage to the mainframe and module, always remove the power cord before installing or removing a module. preventing component damage caution. electrostatic discharge (esd) c an damage components on this module and mainframe. to prevent e sd or other component dam age, follow the steps below when installing, removing, or handling modules: 1. wear a grounded antistatic wrist strap to discharge the static voltage from your body while installing or removing modules from the TG700 mainframe. 2. transport and store modules in a static-protected bag or container. 3. do not slide the modul e over any surface. 4. handle modules as little as possible. 5. do not touch module compone nts or connector pins. 6. do not use any devices capable of generating or holding a static charge in the work area where you remove, install, or handle modules. 7. avoid handling modules in areas that have a floor or work-surface covering capable of generating a static charge. 8. do not remove the module circuit board assembly from the shield. the shield is an important stiffener whi ch prevents damage to surface-mount components.
appendix b: module installation b-2 TG700 tv signal generator platform user manual installing a m odule to install a module into the mainframe perform the following procedure: 1. unplug the power cord from the power connector on the rear panel of the mainframe. 2. select the slot you will use to insta ll the module. figure b-1 shows a sample configuration with slot numbers. note . only one agl7 module can be insta lled in the TG700 mainframe, and it must only be installed in slot 1. all other modules may be installed in any slot location. 43 21 ag7 hdvg7 dvg7 agl7 figure b-1: TG700 slot numbering note . any number (up to 4) of the following modules can be installed in the TG700 mainframe: ag7 atg7 bg7 dvg7 hdvg7 only a combined total of two (2) of the following modules can be installed in the TG700 mainframe at the same time: avg7 awvg7 hdvg7 3. use a screwdriver with a #1 phillips tip to loosen the two screws on the blank panel attached to the slot you want to use, and then pull it away. seefigureb-2.
appendix b: module installation TG700 tv signal generator platform user manual b-3 figure b-2: removing the blank panel caution. be careful not to damage the parts and cables inside of the module when you insert the module into the mainframe. 4. insert the module into the slot, paying attention to the module orientation. seefigureb-3. figure b-3: insta lling the module
appendix b: module installation b-4 TG700 tv signal generator platform user manual 5. push the module in until the connector board of the module is firmly engaged with the main board of the mainframe. 6. tighten the two screws to secure the module to the mainframe. seefigureb-4. figure b-4: securing the module removing a module to remove a module from the mainframe perform the following procedure: caution. to make module removal easy, attach terminations or bnc cables to the module connectors. the connector may be damaged if too much force is applied to it during module removal. 1. unplug the power cord from the power connector on the mainframe rear panel. 2. attach 75 ? terminations or bnc cables to the bnc connectors on the module to be removed. module removal becomes easier if the terminations or cables are attached to the connectors at the left and right ends. 3. use a screwdriver with a #1 phillips tip to loosen the two screws securing the module to the mainframe.
appendix b: module installation TG700 tv signal generator platform user manual b-5 caution. be careful not to damage the parts and cables inside of the module when you remove the module from the mainframe. 4. pull the module slowly toward you while supporting the terminations or bnc cables attached to the connectors. see figure b-5. 75 ? terminations figure b-5: removing the module 5. if this empty slot will not be used, you must attach a blank panel to the mainframe to control instrument cooling and emi emissions. a. align the blank panel with the open slot of the mainframe. b. tighten the two screws to secure the blank panel to the mainframe. a blank panel is available as an optional accessory for the TG700 main- frame. refer to accessories on page 1--2. 6. if you want to install another module i nto the slot from which the module is removed, perform installing a module on page b-2.
appendix b: module installation b-6 TG700 tv signal generator platform user manual
tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual c-1 appendix c: network interface specifications the TG700 supports remote c ontrol using the ethernet interface. this section describes the TG700 network interface specifications. the tcp/ip is used as the network protocol, and the port number is fixed 5000. the commands can be sent from the application program through the socket interface of the tcp/ip. also, the que ry can be received thr ough the interface. keep the following in mind while cont rolling the TG700 remotely with the ethernet interface. h the line feed (lf) code is needed at the end of a message as a terminator. h the ieee 488.1 standard (for instance device clear, service request, etc.) is not supported. h the message exchange control protocol in the ieee 488.2 is not supported. however, the common commands such as *ese and the event handling features are supported. h the indefinite format (the block start at #0) in the of the ieee 488.2 is not supported. checking remote command operation to check remote command operation of the TG700 mainframe perform the following procedure: 1. connect the TG700 to your pc using an ethernet cable. refer to connecting toanetwork on page 3--15 for detailed information about how to connect the TG700 to your pc. 2. click windows start button and select run fromthestartmenu 3. in the dialog box, type telnet andthenclick ok . the telnet window appears. 4. select preferences from the terminal pull-down menu. 5. in the preferences dialog box, check the local echo check box and then click ok . 6. select remote system from the connect pull-down menu. 7. in the connect dialog box, enter the ip address of the TG700 in the host name field and 5000 in the port field.
appendix c: network interface specifications c-2 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual 8. click connection . 9. type *idn? in the command line and press the enter key. 10. check that the id information of the TG700 appears on the pc. note . if you use a pc running windows 2000/xp, connect the TG700 and your pc using the hyper terminal application supplied with windows. refer to windows online help or other documentation for detailed information about hyper terminal.
tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual d-1 appendix d: error messages and codes error codes with a negative value are scpi standard error codes; errors with a positive value are unique to the TG700. command errors command errors are returned when there is a syntax error in the command. table d-1: command errors error code error message --100 command error --101 invalid character --102 syntax error --103 invalid separator --104 datatypeerror --105 get not allowed --108 parameter not allowed --109 missing parameter -- 1 1 0 command header error -- 111 header separator error -- 1 1 2 program mnemonic too long -- 1 1 3 undefined header -- 1 1 4 header suffix out of range --120 numeric data error --121 character --123 exponent too large --124 too many digits --128 numeric data not allowed --130 suffix error --131 invalid suffix --134 suffix too long --138 suffix not allowed --140 character data error
appendix d: error messages and codes d-2 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual table d-1: command errors (cont.) error code error message --141 invalid character data --144 character data too long --148 character data not allowed --150 string data error --151 invalid string data --158 string data not allowed --160 block data error --161 invalid block data --168 block data not allowed --170 command expression error --171 invalid expression --178 expression data not allowed --180 macro error --181 invalid outside macro definition --183 invalid inside macro definition --184 macro parameter error execution errors these error codes are returned when an error is detected while a command is being executed. table d-2: execution errors error code error message --200 execution error --201 invalid while in local --202 settings lost due to rtl --210 trigger error -- 2 1 1 trigger ignored --212 arm ignored --213 init ignored --214 trigger deadlock
appendix d: error messages and codes tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual d-3 table d-2: execution errors (cont.) error code error message --215 arm deadlock --220 parameter error --221 settings conflict --222 data out of range --223 too much data --224 illegal parameter value --225 out of memory --226 lists not same length --230 data corrupt or stale --231 data questionable --240 hardware error --241 hardware missing --250 mass storage error --251 missing mass storage --252 missing media --253 corrupt media --254 media full --255 directory full --256 filename not found --257 filename error --258 media protected --260 execution expression error --261 math error in expression --270 execution macro error --271 macro syntax error --272 macro execution error --273 illegal macro label --274 execution macro parameter error --275 macro definition too long --276 macro recursion error --277 macro redefinition not allowed --278 macro header not found --280 program error
appendix d: error messages and codes d-4 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual table d-2: execution errors (cont.) error code error message --281 cannot create program --282 illegal program name --283 illegal variable name --284 program currently running --285 program syntax error --286 program runtime error device specific errors these error codes are returned when an internal instrument error is detected. this type of error may indicate a hardware problem. table d-3: device specific errors error code error message --300 device specific error --310 system error -- 3 1 1 memory error --312 pud memory lost --313 calibration memory lost --314 save/recall memory lost --315 configuration memory lost --330 self test failed --350 queue overflow
appendix d: error messages and codes tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual d-5 query errors these error codes are returned in response to an unanswered query. table d-4: query errors error code error message --400 query error --410 query interrupted --420 query unterminated --430 query deadlocked --440 query unterminated after indefinite period device errors these error codes are unique to the TG700 and the installed modules. table d-5: device errors error code error message 242 module not found 243 module not a generator 249 directory not found 251 standard not compatible with input 252 no signal found on input 253 unable to release clock 254 unable to lock clock 263 signal file not found 264 current signal not saved to file 265 signal file failed to load
appendix d: error messages and codes d-6 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual
TG700 tv signal generator platform user manual e-1 appendix e: firmware upgrade the TG700 firmware needs to be upgraded when a newly released module is installed. this section describes how to upgrade the firmware. equipment required the following equipment is required to upgrade the firmware: h pc with windows 2000/xp and ethernet interface installed h 10 base-t ethernet cable h TG700 signal generator platform software library cd-rom provided with the new module upgrade procedures note . if a downloaded frame picture file is stored in the TG700 mainframe, make sure to move the file from the mainframe to your pc before starting the following procedures. if the mainframe does not have enough memory space, you cannot upgrade the firmware normally. perform the following procedure to upgr ade the firmware. it is not necessary to uninstall the earlier version. 1. connect the 10 base-t port on the TG700 rear panel to the ethernet port on your pc using the ethernet cable. refer to connecting the TG700 to your pc(s) on page 3--15 for detailed information about how to connect the TG700 to your pc. 2. power on the TG700 and your pc. 3. set the network parameters of the TG700. refer to setting ethernet network parameters on page 3--16 for detailed information about how to set the parameters. 4. insert the TG700 signal generator platform software library cd-rom provided with the new module into the cd-rom drive on your pc.
appendix e: firmware upgrade e-2 TG700 tv signal generator platform user manual 5. double-click the d: drive icon (substitute your cd-rom drive letter if it is different than d). the pc will display the contents of the TG700 signal generator platform software library cd-rom. 6. double-click the upgrade folder. the pc will display the contents of the upgrade folder. 7. double-click the tgupgrade.exe icon in the folder. the TG700 upgrade dialog box appears as shown in figure e-1. figure e-1: TG700 upgrade dialog box note . in the following cases, an error message appears when you double-click the tgupgrade.exe icon. if this happens, copy the all of the files in the up- grade folder to the hard disk, and then repeat the operation. h when you upgrade the TG700 with firmware version 1.3 or earlier and use the atg7, avg7, or awvg7 module in it. h when you upgrade the TG700 with firmware version 2.1 or earlier and use the avg7 or awvg7 module in it.
appendix e: firmware upgrade TG700 tv signal generator platform user manual e-3 8. in the dialog box, enter the ip address that you assigned to your TG700. 9. if you want to download the signals for the specified module(s), use the check boxes at the bottom of the dialog box. normally, you need not select any check boxes. select the appropriate check box(es) under the following cases: h atg7 check box: when you upgrade the TG700 with firmware version 1.3 or earlier and use the atg7 module in it. h avg7 check box: when you upgrade the TG700 with firmware version 2.1 or earlier and use the avg7 module in it. h awvg7 check box: when you upgrade the TG700 with firmware version 2.1 or earlier and use the awvg7 module in it. 10. click the copy button. the pc will start transferring the files in the upgrade folder to the TG700. caution. do not power off the TG700 until file transfer is complete. doing so will prevent the instrument from starting up normally. 11. when the file transfer is complete, the message box shown in figure e-2 appears. figure e-2: message box appearing after the file transfer is complete 12. click the ok button in the message box. 13. disconnect the power cable from the power cord connector on the TG700 rear panel, and then connect it again to restart the instrument. 14. if your TG700 includes an hdlg7 module, proceed with the following steps to complete the upgrade: a. power on the TG700. b. when ?startup TG700? appears on the display, press the format button and leave it pressed until ?hdlg7[n]? appears. c. wait for all modules to boot up.
appendix e: firmware upgrade e-4 TG700 tv signal generator platform user manual d. when ?TG700 : preset? appears on the display, disconnect the power to the instrument, then connect it again to restart the instrument. firmware version check perform the following procedure to verify that the new firmware version was properly installed: 1. press the front-panel module button to display the TG700 main menu. 2. use the up ( y )ordown( b ) arrow button to select utility , and then press the enter button. 3. use the up ( y )ordown( b ) arrow button to select version info (f/w) . 4. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to select cpu[0] . 5. verify that the new firmware version number is displayed in the menu. refer to the release notes attached to the instrument for information about the new firmware version.
tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual f-1 appendix f: inspection and cleaning inspect and clean the instrument as often as your operating conditions require. the collection of dirt can cause instrument overheating and operational failure. dirt acts as an insulating blanket, preventing efficient heat dissipation. dirt also provides an electrical conduction path that can cause an instrument failure, especially under high-humidity conditions. caution. avoid the use of chemical cle aning agents that might damage the plastics used in this instrument. use only deionized water when cleaning the front-panel controls. use a 75% ethyl alcohol solution as a cleaner, and rinse with deionized water. avoid the use of high-pressure compressed air when cleaning dust from the interior of this instrument. high-pressu re air can cause electro static discharge (esd). instead, use low-pressure compressed air (about 9 psi). exterior inspection using table f-1 as a guide, inspect the outside of the instrument for damage, wear, and missing parts. you should thoroughly check instruments that appear to have been dropped or otherwise abused to verify correct operation and perfor- mance. immediately repair defects that could cause personal injury or lead to further damage to the instrument. table f-1: external inspection check list item inspect for repair action cabinet and front panel cracks, scratches, deformations, damaged hardware replace defective module front-panel buttons missing or damaged repair or replace missing or defective buttons connectors broken shells, cracked insulation, deformed contacts, and dirt in connectors replace defective modules; clear or wash out dirt accessories missing items or parts of items, bent pins, broken or frayed cables, and damaged connectors replace damaged or missing items, frayed cables, and defective modules
appendix f: inspection and cleaning f-2 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual exterior cleaning perform the following steps when you clean the exterior of the instrument: warning. to avoid injury or death, unplug the power cord from line voltage before cleaning the instrument. avoid getting moisture inside the instrument during external cleaning. use only enough liquid to dampen the cleaning cloth. 1. remove loose dust on the outside of the instrument with a lint-free cloth. 2. remove remaining dirt with a lint-free cloth dampened with a general pur- pose detergent-and-water solution. do not use abrasive cleaners. 3. clean the monitor screen with a lint-free cloth dampened with a gentle, general purpose detergent-and-water solution.
index

tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual index- 1 index numbers 10 base--t port, 2--4 a abbreviations, commands, queries, and parameters, 3--82 ac line voltage requirements, 1--6 accessories optional, 1--2 standard, 1--2 alarm menu, 3--24 arguments block, 3--86 command, 3--78 example, 3--79 parameters, 3--81 b backing up preset files by tg7 backup, 3--72 backus-naur form, 3--85 bnf (backus-naur form), 3--85 build menu (frame picture generator), 3--44 build menu (logo generator), 3--54 c case sensitivity, 3--84 certifications and compliances, a-4 characters, special, 3--87 cleaning the instrument exterior, f-2 commands chaining, 3--83 rules for forming, 3--77 step, 3--78 structure of ieee 488.2 commands, 3--77, 3--85 syntax, 3--77 common commands, 3--89 configuration, hardware installation, 1--4 constructed mnemonics, 3--77 creating a frame picture file, 3--46 creating a logo file, 3--57 creating commands, 3--80 crossover ethernet cable, 3--15 d description, product overview, 1--1 diagnostic routines, 3--13 diagnostics submenu, 3--13 dialog boxes ethernet (tg7 comm), 3--30 ethernet (tg7 setup), 3--62 display commands, 3--91 downloading a file to the TG700 mainframe, 3--36 e electrical specifications, a-1 environmental operating requirements, 1--6 environmental specifications, a-2 error codes, d-1 commands, d-1 device specific, d-4 execution, d-2 hardware, d-4, d-5 query, d-5 TG700 unique, d-5 ethernet dialog box (tg7 comm), 3--30 ethernet dialog box (tg7 setup), 3--62 ethernet parameters, 3--30 exiting the file copy tools, 3--72 exiting the frame picture generator application, 3--41 exiting the logo generator application, 3--51 exiting the tg7 comm application, 3--31 exiting the tg7 setup application, 3--62 exterior cleaning, f-2 exterior inspection, f-1 f features, 1--1 file copy tools tutorials, 3--72 file menu (frame picture generator), 3--44 file menu (logo generator), 3--54 file menu (tg7 comm), 3--33 file menu (tg7 setup), 3--64 file transfers, 3--27 firmware upgrade, e-1 format button, 2--2 frame picture generator application, 3--39
index index- 2 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual frame picture generator tutorials, 3--46 frame reset 1, 2--4 frame reset 2, 2--4 frame reset 3, 2--4 frame reset signals, 2--4 frame reset status submenu, 3--6 front panel, operation, 2--1 front panel enable button, 2--2 g general purpose interface, 3--19 gpi, 3--19 gray scale settings dialog box (logo generator), 3--55 h hardware installation, 1--4 help menu (frame picture generator), 3--45 help menu (logo generator), 3--57 help menu (tg7 comm), 3--35 help menu (tg7 setup), 3--65 hierarchy tree, 3--80 i ieee 488.2 common commands, 3--77, 3--85 ieee std 488.2-1987, 3--85 initial product inspection, 1--4 inspection and cleaning, f-1 installation, 1--4?1--7 hardware, 1--4 installation, rackmount instructions, 1--4 installing a module, b-2 installing frame picture generator, 3--39 installing logo generator, 3--49 installing tg7 comm, 3--27 installing tg7 setup, 3--59 installing the file copy tools, 3--69 instrument commands, 3--92 k key features, 1--1 l lcd display, 2--1 logo generator application, 3--49 logo generator tutorials, 3--57 m mainframe main menu, 3--1 manual description, xi manuals, related, xi mass memory commands, 3--93 mechanical characteristics, specifications, a-2 menu control buttons, 2--2 message terminators, 3--85 miscellaneous settings dialog box (logo generator), 3--56 mnemonics, constructed, 3--86 module button, 2--2 module slot, 2--4 n network information submenu, 3--10 network setup submenu, 3--11, 3--16 o operating basics, 2--1 optional accessories, 1--2 options option d1 (calibration test data report), 1--2 power cords, 1--3 p parameter types used in syntax descriptions, 3--81 pc system requirements for file copy tools, 3--69 pc system requirements for frame picture generator, 3--39 pc system requirements for logo generator, 3--49 pc system requirements for tg7 comm, 3--27 pc system requirements for tg7 setup, 3--59 performance requirements, specifications, a-1 power connector, 2--3 preface, xi preset submenu, 3--2 product description, 1--1 program commands, 3--96 programming, 3--78 sequences, 3--103 q queries, 3--80 quotes, 3--84
index tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual index- 3 r rackmount, installation instructions, 1--4 reference indicator, 2--3 related manuals, xi removing a module, b-4 restoring preset files by tg7 restore, 3--74, 3--75 rules command forming, 3--77 for using scpi commands, 3--84 s scpi abbreviating, 3--82 chaining commands, 3--83 commands, 3--80 general rules, 3--84 parameter types, 3--81 programming, 3--78 subsystem hierarchy tree, 3--80 scpi commands and queries syntax, 3--80?3--84 creating commands, 3--80 creating queries, 3--80 sense commands, 3--97 sequence submenu, 3--4 sequences, running, 3--103 service, manual, xi setting ethernet parameters, 3--16 setting the gpi, 3--19 settings menu (frame picture generator), 3--45 settings menu (logo generator), 3--54 signal assign submenu, 3--9 specifications electrical, a-1 environmental, a-2 mechanical characteristics, a-2 performance requirements, a-1 standard accessories, 1--2 starting the file copy tools, 3--72 starting the frame picture generator application, 3--41 starting the logo generator application, 3--51 starting the tg7 comm application, 3--31 starting the tg7 setup application, 3--62 status commands, 3--98 step, 3--78 syntax, command, 3--77 system commands, 3--101 t tcl programming, 3--103 programming changes, 3--104 terminators, message, 3--85 test signal buttons, 2--2 tg7 backup application, 3--69 tg7 comm application, 3--27 tg7 comm tutorials, 3--35 tg7 duplicator application, 3--69 tg7 restore application, 3--69 tg7 setup application, 3--59 tg7 setup tutorial, 3--66 tutorial, tg7 setup, 3--66 tutorials file copy tools, 3--72 frame picture generator, 3--46 logo generator, 3--57 tg7 comm, 3--35 u upgrade procedures, e-1 upgrading the firmware, e-1 uploading a file to a pc, 3--37, 3--47 utility menu (tg7 comm), 3--35 utility submenu, 3--7 v view menu (tg7 comm), 3--34 view menu (tg7 setup), 3--65 w window menu (frame picture generator), 3--45 window menu (tg7 setup), 3--65
index index- 4 tg 700 tv signal generator platform user manual

user manual ag7 audio generator www.tektronix.com
copyright ? tektronix. all rights reserved. licensed software products are owned by tektronix or its suppliers and are protected by united states copyright laws and international treaty provisions. tektronix products are covered by u.s. and foreign patents, issued and pending. information in this publication supercedes that in all previously published material. specifications and price change privileges reserved. tektronix and tek are registered trademarks of tektronix, inc. contacting tektronix tektronix, inc. 14200 sw karl braun drive p.o. box 500 beaverton, or 97077 usa for product information, sales, service, and technical support: h in north america, call 1-800-833-9200. h worldwide, visit www.tektronix.com to find contacts in your area.
ag7 audio generator user manual i table of contents preface iii ................................................... about this manual iii ............................................... related manuals iii ................................................. getting started product description 1--1 .............................................. accessories 1--2 ..................................................... option 1--2 ......................................................... installation 1--2 ..................................................... functional check 1--2 ................................................ operating basics operating procedure 2--1 .............................................. ag7 module main menu 2--2 .......................................... rear-panel connector 2--5 ............................................. factory default settings 2--6 ........................................... reference syntax 3--1 ................................................... programming model 3--1 .............................................. scpi commands and queries 3--3 ...................................... remote commands 3--5 ........................................ output commands 3--5 ............................................. sense commands 3--7 ............................................... appendices appendix a: specifications a--1 .................................. electrical characteristics a--1 .......................................... environmental characteristics a--2 ...................................... index
table of contents ii ag7 audio generator user manual list of figures figure 2--1: ag7 module main menu 2--2 .......................... figure 2--2: channel submenu 2--3 ............................ figure 2--3: audio timing submenu 2--4 ....................... figure 2--4: ag7 module rear-panel connectors 2--5 ................. figure 2--5: location of j452 connector pin 2--6 .................... figure 3--1: example of scpi subsystem hierarchy 3--3 .............. list of tables table 1--1: standard and optional accessories 1--2 .................. table 2--1: factory default settings 2--6 .......................... table a--1: aes/ebu serial digital audio outputs a--1 .............. table a--2: silence output a--1 ............................... table a--3: 48 khz clock output a--2 .......................... table a--4: output timing a--2 .................................. table a--5: environmental characteristics a--2 .....................
ag7 audio generator user manual iii preface this manual documents the capabilities, operation, and specifications of the ag7 audio generator module. about this manual this manual is composed of the following sections: h getting started contains product description and functional check procedure. h operating basics explains how to operate the ag7 module using the menus and front-panel buttons. h reference describes the syntax used in command descriptions and in all programming commands. h appendices provides the specifications. related manuals the following documents are also available. h the TG700 tv signal generator platform service manual (tektronix part number 070-a800-xx) describes how to maintain and service the mainframe and generator modules. this ma nual is an optional accessory. h the TG700 tv signal generator platform module installation instructions (tektronix part number 070-a824-xx) describes how to install and remove the modules, and how to upgrade the firmware of the mainframe.
preface iv ag7 audio generator user manual
getting started

ag7 audio generator user manual 1-1 getting started this section contains the following information: h product description h accessories h option h installation h functional check product description the ag7 audio generator module is designed to be installed in the TG700 tv signal generator platform. the module can output serial digital audio signals that comply with the aes/ebu standard. the module contains the following features: h 8 channels (4 aes/ebu audio pairs) of serial digital audio outputs with 24 or 20 bits resolution h frequencies, amplitudes, and audio clicks are adjustable in every channel h silence and 48 khz clock (word clock) outputs h full remote control using ethernet interface the module also supports the following audio frequencies: silence 500 hz 2000 hz 8000 hz 50 hz 600 hz 2400 hz 9600 hz 100 hz 750 hz 3000 hz 10000 hz 150 hz 800 hz 3200 hz 12000 hz 200 hz 1000 hz 4000 hz 15000 hz 250 hz 1200 hz 4800 hz 16000 hz 300 hz 1500 hz 5000 hz 20000 hz 400 hz 1600 hz 6000 hz
getting started 1-2 ag7 audio generator user manual accessories table 1--1 lists the standard and optional accessories provided with the ag7 generator module. table 1- 1: standard and optional accessories accessory std. opt. tektronix part number TG700 tv signal generator platform module installation instructions d 070-a824-xx TG700 signal generator platform software library cd-rom d 062-a249-xx TG700 tv signal generator platform service manual d 070-a800-xx option this subsection describes the option available for the ag7 generator module. the following option is available: option d1 (test data report) a calibration test data report will be provided with the ag7 generator module when this option is specified. installation refer to the TG700 tv signal generator platform module installation instructions for instructions on how to install the ag7 generator module. functional check the following procedure determines whether the module is operating correctly. the following equipment is required for the functional check: h digital audio monitor h oscilloscope h 75 ? bnc cable h 75 ? termination option d1 (test data report) required equipment
getting started ag7 audio generator user manual 1-3 1. install the module into the TG700 platform mainframe using the installation procedures described in the TG700 tv signal generator platform user manual . 2. power on the TG700 tv signal generator platform by connecting it to the power source. the initialization process for all installed modules is executed. 3. check that no error messages appear on the lcd display. 4. warm up the instrument for 20 minutes. 5. press the front-panel module button until the ag7 main menu as shown below appears. ag7 [x] : channel parameters channel 1 6. connect the 1+2 connector to the digital audio monitor using the 75 ? bnc cable. 7. set the digital audio monitor to display the status for the audio data. 8. check that any crc error does not appear on the monitor. 9. change the bnc cable from the 1+2 connector to the 3+4 connector, and check that no crc errors appear on the monitor. 10. change the bnc cable from the 3+4 connector to the 5+6 connector, and check that no crc errors appear on the monitor. 11. change the bnc cable from the 5+6 connector to the 7+8 connector, and check that no crc errors appear on the monitor. 12. change the bnc cable from the 7+8 connector to the silence connector, and check that no crc errors appear on the monitor. 13. connect the 48 khz clock connector to the oscilloscope ch1 input using the 75 ? bnc cable and 75 ? termination. 14. check that the appropriate clock signal is displayed on the screen. procedure
getting started 1-4 ag7 audio generator user manual
operating basics

ag7 audio generator user manual 2-1 operating basics this section explains the operation of the ag7 generator module using the front-panel buttons and menus, followed by a description of the rear-panel connectors refer to the TG700 tv signal generator platform user manual for a detailed explanation of the front-panel buttons and lcd display. operating procedure after the module is installed in the mainframe, and the mainframe is installed in the rack or other location where it will be used, access each function of the module with the following procedure: 1. connect the power connector on the rear panel and ac electric power source using the power cord. electric power is supplied to the mainframe. 2. wait until the power up initialization process is complete, and check that there are no error messages on the display. 3. following the initialization process t he mainframe main menu appears, as shown below. TG700 : preset 4. press the front-panel module button until the ag7 module main menu appears, as shown below. ag7 [x] : channel parameters channel 1 5. use the front-panel arrow buttons to navigate and select items in the main menu and submenus. the details of the main menu and submenus are explained on the following pages.
operating basics 2-2 ag7 audio generator user manual ag7 module main menu you can select the audio channel whose parameters are to be changed, set the audio data resolution, select the frame reset signal to be synchronized, and adjust the timing offset for the audio signal outputs, using the ag7 module main menu. use the up ( y )ordown( b ) arrow button to scroll through the main menu. figure 2--1 shows the ag7 module main menu. ag7 [x] : channel parameters channel 1 ag7 [x] : resolution 20 bits ag7 [x] : audio timing selection by the module button free run frame reset 1 frame reset 2 ag7 [x] : audio--video sync free run channel 1 channel 2 channel 3 channel 4 channel 5 channel 6 channel 7 channel 8 24 bits 20 bits enter cancel enter cancel to channel submenu (page 2--3) to audio timing submenu (page 2--4) figure 2- 1: ag7 module main menu channel parameters. select the channel for which the parameters are to be set, from channel 1 to channel 8, by pressing the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button. you can access the channel submenu to set frequency, amplitude, and audio click insertion by pressing the front-panel enter button. refer to the channel submenu on page 2--3 for detailed information. resolution. sets the resolution of the serial digital audio signal data. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to make the selection. the choices are 24 bits or 20 bits .pressthe enter button to enable the selection.
operating basics ag7 audio generator user manual 2-3 audio- video sync. selects the frame reset signal synchronized with the digital audio signals. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to make the selection. the selection items are free run , frame reset 1 ,and frame reset 2 .forfree run, the audio signal is not synchronized with any of the frame reset signals. press the enter button to enable the selection. note . if the frame reset signal used by the audio signals is reset by the change of the video format, the audio signal timing is also reset. audio timing. sets the timing offset of the audio signal outputs relative to the genlock signal or the internal reference signal. select this menu item and press the enter button to access the audio timing submenu. refer to the audio timing submenu on page 2--4 for detailed information. this menu allows you to set the frequency, amplitude, and audio click of the selected audio channel. use the up ( y )ordown( b ) arrow button to scroll through the menu items. figure 2--2 shows the channel submenu. ag7 [x] : channel 1 frequency : 1000 hz ag7 [x] : channel 1 amplitude : --20.0 db ag7 [x] : channel 1 audio click : off --60 dbfs to 0 dbfs inactive 300 hz 1200 hz 4000 hz 12000 hz silence 400 hz 1500 hz 4800 hz 15000 hz 50 hz 500 hz 1600 hz 5000 hz 16000 hz 100 hz 600 hz 2000 hz 6000 hz 20000 hz 150 hz 750 hz 2400 hz 8000 hz 200 hz 800 hz 3000 hz 9600 hz 250 hz 1000 hz 3200 hz 10000 hz off 1sec 2sec 3sec 4sec from channel parameters in the main menu figure 2- 2: channel submenu channel submenu
operating basics 2-4 ag7 audio generator user manual h frequency : sets the audio signal frequency for the selected audio channel. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to make the selection. the choices are: inactive 400 hz 1600 hz 6000 hz silence 500 hz 2000 hz 8000 hz 50 hz 600 hz 2400 hz 9600 hz 100 hz 750 hz 3000 hz 10000 hz 150 hz 800 hz 3200 hz 12000 hz 200 hz 1000 hz 4000 hz 15000 hz 250 hz 1200 hz 4800 hz 16000 hz 300 hz 1500 hz 5000 hz 20000 hz when inactive is selected, audio data output is disabled. press the enter button to enable the selection. h amplitude : sets the audio signal amplitude for the selected audio channel. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to set the value. you can set the valuefrom--60dbfsto0dbfsin1dbfssteps. h audio click : inserts audio clicks in the selected audio channel. the audio tone, if any, is turned off for an interval around the audio click. use the left ( a ) or right ( " ) arrow button to make the selection. the choices are off , 1sec , 2sec , 3sec ,and 4sec .pressthe enter button to enable the selection. audio click becomes valid when you select 1sec to 4sec for the audio click rate. when audio click is valid, audio tone is turned off for 0.25 seconds around the click. for example, if you select 3sec for the click rate, the audio tone will be output for 2.75 seconds, and silent for 0.25 seconds; the click occurs during this silence. when audio click is off , the audio tone selected in the frequency menu is output continuously. audio click makes it easy to identify any channel(s) of the four output channels. this menu allows you to adjust the timing offset of the audio signal outputs relative to the internal reference signal (frame reset signal). figure 2--3 shows the audio timing submenu. ag7 [x] : audio timing delay : 0.0 m sec --160 ms to +160 ms figure 2- 3: audio timing submenu use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to change the value. you can set the value from --160 ms to +160 ms in 1 m s steps. a minus timing value is set as delay and plus is set as advance . audio timing submenu
operating basics ag7 audio generator user manual 2-5 note . you can reset the timing offset to zero by pressing the left ( a ) and right ( " ) arrow buttons simultaneously. rear-panel connectors the ag7 generator module is equipped with four aes/ebu serial digital audio pair outputs (1+2, 3+4, 5+6, and 7+8 ), silence output, and 48 khz clock output connectors. figure 2--4 shows the ag7 generator module rear-panel connectors. figure 2- 4: ag7 module rear-panel connectors h 1+2 : aes/ebu serial digital audio output for channels 1 and 2 h 3+4 : aes/ebu serial digital audio output for channels 3 and 4 h 5+6 : aes/ebu serial digital audio output for channels 5 and 6 h 7+8 : aes/ebu serial digital audio output for channels 7 and 8 h silence : silence signal (dar signal) output h 48 khz clock : 48 khz clock signal output
operating basics 2-6 ag7 audio generator user manual the output level of the 48 khz clock signal can be set to either a cmos compatible level or 1 v. this feature is available through jumper j452 on the circuit board. figure 2--5 shows the location of j452 . ( 48khz ) ( silence ) ( 7+8 ) ( 5+6 ) ( 3+4 ) ( 1+2 ) front panel j452 figure 2- 5: location of j452 connector pin when you place the jumper on pins 3--4 of j452, the clock signal output level is cmos compatible. the jumper is placed in this pos ition when the module is shipped. when you move the jumper to pins 1--2 of j452, the clock signal output level is set to 1v. factory default settings table 2--1 shows the factory default settings for the ag7 generator module. these settings are recalled when you select factory default from the preset : recall menu item in the mainframe main menu. table 2- 1: factory default settings menu item name settings channel 1 to channel 8 frequency 1000 hz amplitude --20.0 dbfs audio click off resolution 20 bits audio--video sync free run audio timing delay or advance 0.0 m sec setting the clock output level
reference

ag7 audio generator user manual 3-1 syntax this section contains information on the standard commands for programmable instruments (scpi) and the programming structure you can use to program your ag7 generator module. programming model specific conditions must exist before programming commands will affect the test signal generated by a module. select the module by using the :instrument:select command before executing any commands. many of the commands used by the ag7 module are shared by several modules and w ill be accepted w ithout a reported error. many commands will accept either string or numeric arguments. for example: a boolean argument can either be ?1? or ?on?. signal parameter commands that hav e a :step node can accept either a numeric value or a string argument that refers to the :step increment. signal parameter commands with a :s tep node will accept the fo llowing strings in addition to a numeric value: up. use this argument to increase the parameter value one increment as defined by the :step value. down. use this argument to decrease the parameter value one increment as defined by the :step value. minimum. use this argument to set the parameter value to the minimum acceptable value. maximum. use this argument to set the parameter value to the maximum acceptable value. default. use this argument to set the parameter value to the default value. selecting the module command arguments
syntax 3-2 ag7 audio generator user manual if you send a query with no argument, the response is the current value. you can also use minimum, maximum, and default as arguments for queries whose command form can use these arguments (refer to the command syntax for the specific command). instead of returning the current value, queries using these arguments return the following information: minimum. returns the minimum acceptable value. maximum. returns the maximum acceptable value. default. returns the default value. the following example demonstrates the effect of each of the arguments when used with a step value. 1. :instrument:select "hdvg7:#" selects the digital video generator module located in the slot number indicated by the ?#? symbol. 2. :output:circle:state on displays a circle on the video display. note . :output:circle:diameter uses an argument that is the percent of picture height. 3. :output:circle:diameter default sets the circle diameter to 90 percent of the screen height. 4. :output:circle:diameter:step 10 sets the step increment to 10 percent. 5. :output:circle:diameter down changes the circle diameter to 80 percent of the screen height. 6. :output:circle:diameter 50 changes the circle diameter to 50 percent of the screen height. 7. :output:circle:diameter maximum changes the circle diameter to 100 percent of the screen height. 8. :output:circle:diameter minimum changes the circle diameter to 0 percent of the screen height. 9. :output:circle:diameter up changes the circle diameter to 10 percent of the screen height. 10. :output:circle:diameter? maximum queries the maximum circle diameter (not the current diameter). the query returns the value of 100 percent, which is the maximum circle diameter allowable. query arguments argument example
syntax ag7 audio generator user manual 3-3 scpi commands and queries scpi is a standard created by a consortium that provides guidelines for remote programming of instruments. these guidelines provide a consistent program- ming environment for instrument control and data transfer. this environment uses defined programming messages, instrument responses, and data format across all scpi instruments, regardless of manufacturer. the ag7 generator module uses a command language based on the scpi standard. the scpi language is based on a hierarchical or tree structure (see figure 3--1) that represents a subsystem. the top level of the tree is the root node; it is followed by one or more lower-level nodes. diameter output circle position state root node lower-level nodes figure 3- 1: example of scpi subsystem hierarchy you can create commands and queries from these subsystem hierarchy trees. commands specify actions for the instrument to perform. queries return measurement data and information about parameter settings. for more information on scpi commands and programming structure, refer to the TG700 signal generator platform user manual .
syntax 3-4 ag7 audio generator user manual
ag7 audio generator user manual 3-5 remote commands this section describes the command sets used for the ag7 generator module remote operation. the commands for the module are divided into the following groups: h output commands h sense commands output commands use these commands to set the parameters for each audio channel, the audio data resolution, and the synchronization state relative to the frame reset signals. :output :audio :channel :amplitude :frequency :click 0|1|2|3|4 :nbits :synchronized freerun|frame_one|frame_two :output:audio:channel:amplitude sets the amplitude of a specific audio channel. the numeric value canrangefrom--60dbfsto0dbfsin1dbfssteps.thein the command represents the channel number. you can use any channel number from 1 through 8. :output:audio:channel:amplitude? returns the amplitude of a specific audio channel. the in the command represents the channel number. you can use any channel number from 1 through 8. command tree command description
remote commands 3-6 ag7 audio generator user manual :output:audio:channel:frequency sets the frequency of a specific audio channel. the unit is hertz. the choices are 0, 50, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 400, 500, 600, 750, 800, 1000, 1200, 1500, 1600, 2000, 2400, 3000, 3200, 4000, 4800, 5000, 6000, 8000, 9600, 10000, 12000, 15000, 16000, and 20000. the in the command represents the channel number. you can use any channel number from 1 through 8. :output:audio:channel:frequency? returns the frequency of a specific audio channel. the in the command represents the channel number. you can use any channel number from 1 through 8. :output:audio:channel:click 0|1|2|3|4 sets the audio click of a specific audio channel. the choices are 1 sec to 4 sec, or 0. when 1 to 4 is selected, the audio click becomes valid. when audio click is valid, audio tone is turned off for 0.25 seconds around the time of the click. the in the command represents the channel number. you can use any channel number from 1 through 8. :output:audio:channel:click? returns the audio click setting for the specified audio channel. the in the command represents the channel number. you can use any channel number from 1 through 8. :output:audio:nbits 20|24 sets the sample bits of the audio signal. the choices are 20 bits or 24 bits. :output:audio:nbits? returns the sample bits of the audio signal. :output:audio:synchronized freerun|frame_one|frame_two selects the frame reset signal to synchronize with the audio signal. the choices are freerun (free run), frame_one (frame reset signal 1), and frame_two (frame reset signal 2). for freerun, the audio signal is not synchronized with any of the frame reset signals. :output:audio:synchronized? returns the frame reset signal synchronized with the audio signal.
remote commands ag7 audio generator user manual 3-7 sense commands use these commands to adjust the timing offset of the audio outputs relative to the internal reference signal (frame reset signal). :sense :correction :mdelay :step :sense:correction:mdelay sets the timing offset of the audio outputs. the numeric values range from --160 ms to 160 ms in 1 m s steps. you can use up, down, or def instead of the numeric values. :sense:correction:mdelay? returns the timing offset of the audio outputs. :sense:correction:mdelay:step sets the step increment used by the up or down commands. the unit is microseconds. :sense:correction:mdelay:step? returns the step increment used by the up or down commands. command tree command description
remote commands 3-8 ag7 audio generator user manual
appendices

ag7 audio generator user manual a- 1 appendix a: specifications tables a--1 through a--5 list the electrical characteristics and the environmental characteristics of the ag7 audio generator module. electrical characteristics table a- 1: aes/ebu serial digital audio outputs characteristic performance requirements reference information connector 4 bnc number of channels 8 1+2, 3+4, 5+6, and 7+8 quantized resolution 20 or 24 bits user selectable audio tone frequency silence to 20 khz 31 discrete settings level 0to--60dbfsin1dbsteps pre-emphasis none output level 1 ? 0.1 v measured across 75 ? . required receiver termination 75 ? ? 10% jitter within ? 20% rise and fall times between 30 ns and 44 ns measured from the 10 % to 90% points. table a- 2: silence output characteristic performance requirements reference information silence same signal as aes/ebu serial digital audio ?silence?. connector bnc output level 1 ? 0.1 v measured across 75 ? . required receiver termination 75 ? ? 10% jitter within ? 20% rise and fall times between 30 ns and 44 ns measured from the 10% to 90% points.
appendix a: specifications a- 2 ag7 audio generator user manual table a- 3: 48 khz clock output characteristic performance requirements reference information 48 khz clock reference clock for aes/ebu serial digital audio. connector bnc output level user selectable by the internal jumper. level 1 is selected at the factory. level 1 cmos compatible high > 2.1 v, low < 0.8 v level 2 1 ? 0.1 v measured across 75 ? . table a- 4: output timing characteristic performance requirements reference information range ? 160 ms relative to the frame reset signal. resolution 1 m s environmental characteristics table a- 5: environmental characteristics characteristic description temperature operating 0 _ cto+50 _ c nonoperating -- 2 0 _ cto+60 _ c relative humidity operating 20% to 80% (no condensation); maximum wet-bulb temperature 29.4 _ c nonoperating 5% to 90% (no condensation); maximum wet-bulb temperature 40.0 _ c altitude operating to 4.5 km (15,000 feet) maximum operating temperature decreases 1 _ c each 300 m above 1.5 km. nonoperating to 15 km (50,000 feet) vibration operating 3.04 m/s 2 (0.31 g rms) , 5 hz to 500 hz, 10 min, three axes nonoperating 23.3 m/s 2 (2.38 g rms) , 5 hz to 500 hz, 10 min, three axes shock nonoperating 294 m/s 2 (30 g), half-sine, 11 ms duration
index

ag7 audio generator user manual index- 1 index numbers 1+2 connector, 2--5 3+4 connector, 2--5 48 khz clock connector, 2--5 5+6 connector, 2--5 7+8 connector, 2--5 a accessories optional, 1--2 standard, 1--2 ag7 features, 1--1 ag7 module main menu, 2--2 audio timing, 2--3 audio--video sync, 2--3 channel param eters, 2--2 resolution, 2--2 audio click, 2--4 audio timing, 2--4 audio timing submenu, 2--4 c channel submenu, 2--3 commands rules for forming, 3--1 syntax, 3--1 e electrical specifications, a--1 environmental specifications, a--2 f factory default settings, 2--6 functional check, 1--2 functional command groups, 3--5 h hierarchy (scpi), 3--3 i installation, 1--2 m manuals, related, iii o operating procedure, 2--1 option, 1--2 optional accessories, 1--2 output commands, 3--5 p product description, 1--1 r rear-panel connectors, 2--5 related manuals, iii rules, command forming, 3--1 s scpi, subsystem hierarchy tree, 3--3 scpi commands and queries syntax, 3--3?3--4 sense commands, 3--7 silence connector, 2--5 specifications electrical, a--1 environmental, a--2 standard accessories, 1--2 syntax, command, 3--1
index index- 2 ag7 audio generator user manual

user manual agl7 analog genlock module www.tektronix.com
copyright ? tektronix. all rights reserved. licensed software products are owned by tektronix or its suppliers and are protected by united states copyright laws and international treaty provisions. tektronix products are covered by u.s. and foreign patents, issued and pending. information in this publication supercedes that in all previously published material. specifications and price change privileges reserved. tektronix and tek are registered trademarks of tektronix, inc. contacting tektronix tektronix, inc. 14200 sw karl braun drive p.o. box 500 beaverton, or 97077 usa for product information, sales, service, and technical support: h in north america, call 1-800-833-9200. h worldwide, visit www.tektronix.com to find contacts in your area.
agl7 analog genlock module user manual i table of contents preface iii ................................................... about this manual iii ............................................... related manuals iii ................................................. getting started product description 1--1 .............................................. accessories 1--2 ..................................................... option 1--2 ......................................................... installation 1--2 ..................................................... functional check 1--2 ................................................ operating basics operating procedure 2--1 .............................................. agl7 module main menu 2--2 ......................................... rear-panel connectors 2--10 ............................................ factory default settings 2--12 ........................................... reference syntax 3--1 ................................................... programming model 3--1 .............................................. scpi commands and queries 3--3 ...................................... remote commands 3--5 ........................................ input commands 3--5 ............................................... source commands 3--7 ............................................. output commands 3--8 ............................................. sense commands 3--10 ............................................... appendices appendix a: specifications a--1 .................................. electrical characteristics a--1 .......................................... environmental characteristics a--3 ...................................... index
table of contents ii agl7 analog genlock module user manual list of figures figure 2--1: agl7 module main menu 2--2 ........................ figure 2--2: genlock submenu 2--3 ............................ figure 2--3: output submenu 2--5 .............................. figure 2--4: signal submenu 2--7 ............................... figure 2--5: timing submenu 2--8 ............................... figure 2--6: agl7 module rear-panel connectors 2--10 ............... figure 2--7: location of the j040 and j960 connectors 2--11 ........... figure 3--1: example of scpi subsystem hierarchy 3--3 .............. list of tables table 1--1: standard and optional accessories 1--2 .................. table 2--1: timing adjustment ranges for input signals 2--9 .......... table 2--2: timing adjustment ranges for output signals 2--9 ......... table 2--3: factory default settings 2--12 .......................... table a--1: genlock function a--1 ................................ table a--2: black burst signal and hdtv trilevel sync signal outputs a--2 .............................................. table a--3: word clock signal output* a--2 ....................... table a--4: environmental characteristics a--3 .....................
agl7 analog genlock module user manual iii preface this manual documents the capabilities, operation, and specifications of the agl7 analog genlock module. about this manual this manual is composed of the following sections: h getting started contains product description and functional check procedure. h operating basics explains how to operate the agl7 module using the menus and front-panel buttons. h reference provides the syntax used in command descriptions and describes all programming commands. h appendices provides the specifications. related manuals the following documents are also available. h the TG700 tv signal generator platform service manual (tektronix part number 070-a800-xx) describes how to maintain and service the mainframe and generator modules. this ma nual is an optional accessory. h the TG700 tv signal generator platform module installation instructions (tektronix part number 070-a824-xx) describes how to install and remove the modules, and how to upgrade the firmware of the mainframe.
preface iv agl7 analog genlock module user manual
getting started

agl7 analog genlock module user manual 1-1 getting started this section contains the following information: h product description h accessories h option h installation h functional check product description the agl7 analog genlock module is designed to be installed in the TG700 tv signal generation platform. the module provides genlock function for the mainframe and installed modules. it is equipped with two reference inputs, the loopthrough inputs and the terminated cw input. the agl7 module can genlock the following signals: h ntsc black burst signal: burst lock or sync lock h pal black burst signal: burst lock and sync lock h hdtv trilevel sync signal h cw: 1, 3.58 (ntsc sub-carrier), 4.43 (pal sub-carrier), 5, and 10 mhz in addition, there are three signal output connectors provided on the rear panel which can output black burst signals and hdtv trilevel sync signals.
getting started 1-2 agl7 analog genlock module user manual accessories table 2--1 lists the standard and optional accessories provided with the agl7 genlock module. table 1- 1: standard and optional accessories accessory std. opt. tektronix part number TG700 tv signal generator platform module installation instructions d 070-a824-xx TG700 signal generator platform software library cd-rom d 062-a249-xx TG700 tv signal generator platform service manual d 070-a800-xx option this subsection describes the option available for the agl7 genlock module. the following option is available: option d1 (test data report) a calibration test data report will be provided with the agl7 genlock module when this option is specified. installation refer to the TG700 tv signal generator platform module installation instructions for instructions on how to install the agl7 genlock module. functional check the following procedure determines whether the module is operating correctly. the following equipment is required for the functional check: h tv signal generator h ntsc/pal waveform monitor h hdtv waveform monitor h 75 ? bnc cable h 75 ? termination option d1 (test data report) required equipment
getting started agl7 analog genlock module user manual 1-3 1. install the module into the TG700 platform mainframe using the installation procedures described in the TG700 tv signal generator platform user manual . 2. power on the TG700 tv signal generator platform by connecting it to the power source. the initialization process for all installed modules is executed. 3. check that no error messages appear on the lcd display. 4. warm up the instrument for 20 minutes. genlock function. 5. press the front-panel module button until the agl7 main menu shown below appears. agl7[1]:genlock:status internal 6. press the up ( y )ordown( b ) arrow button to select genlock from the main menu and then press the enter button. 7. press the left ( a ) or right ( " ) arrow button to select internal and then press the enter button. 8. check that int.ref indicator at the right side of the front panel lights. this shows that the instrument is using the internal reference signal. 9. connect one of the tv signal generators output connectors to the agl7 ref connector, using the 75 ? bnc cable. terminate the other side of the ref connector with the 75 ? termination. 10. press the left ( a ) or right ( " ) arrow button to select the menu item corresponding to the input signal and then press the enter button. 11. check that ext.ref indicator at the right side of the front panel lights. this shows that the instrument is locked to the input signal. 12. disconect the bnc cable from the ref connector. 13. check that ext.ref indicator at the right side of the front panel blinks. this shows that the appropriate external reference signal is not being input to the ref connector. procedure
getting started 1-4 agl7 analog genlock module user manual black signal outputs. 14. press the front-panel cancel button. 15. press the up ( y ) or down ( b ) arrow button to select select output from the main menu. 16. press the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to select black 1 ,thenpress the enter button. the select format submenu shown below appears. agl7 [1] : black 1 : select format ntsc 17. press the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to select ntsc or pal for your waveform monitor and then press the enter button. this appears the signal submenu shown below. agl7 [1] : black 1 : ntsc black burst 18. press the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to select black burst ,thenpress the enter button. 19. connect the black 1 connector to the ntsc/pal waveform monitor using the 75 ? bnc cable. 20. set the waveform monitor to view the black burst signal. 21. check that the appropriate black burst signal is displayed. 22. press the cancel button twice to display the select output menu. 23. press the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to select black 2, then press the enter button. 24. repeat steps 17 and 18. 25. connect the black 2 connector to the ntsc/pal waveform monitor using the 75 ? bnc cable. 26. set the waveform monitor to view the black burst signal. 27. check that the appropreate black burst signal is displayed. 28. press the cancel button twice to display the select output menu.
getting started agl7 analog genlock module user manual 1-5 29. press the left ( a ) or right ( " ) arrow button to select black 3 and then press the enter button. this appears the select format submenu. 30. press the left ( a ) or right ( " ) arrow button to select 1080 60i andthenpress the enter button. 31. connect the black 3 connector to the hdtv waveform monitor using the 75 ? bnc cable. 32. check that the appropreate hdtv trilevel sync signal is displayed.
getting started 1-6 agl7 analog genlock module user manual
operating basics

agl7 analog genlock module user manual 2-1 operating basics this section explains the operation of the agl7 genlock module using the front-panel buttons and menus, followed by a description of the rear--panel connectors refer to the TG700 tv signal generator platform user manual for a detailed explanation of the front-panel buttons and lcd display. operating procedure after the module is installed in the mainframe, and the mainframe is installed in the rack or other location where it will be used, access each function of the module with the following procedure: 1. connect the power connector on the rear panel and ac electric power source using the power cord. electric power is supplied to the mainframe. 2. wait until the power up initialization process is complete, and check that there are no error messages on the display. 3. following the initialization process t he mainframe main menu appears, as shown below. TG700 : preset 4. press the front-panel module button until the agl7 module main menu appears, as shown below. agl7[1]:genlock:status internal 5. use the front-panel arrow buttons to navigate and select items in the main menu and submenus. the details of the main menu and submenus are explained on the following pages.
operating basics 2-2 agl7 analog genlock module user manual agl7 module main menu you can select the genlock source and the output whose parameters are to be changed using the agl7 module main menu. use the up ( y )ordown( b ) arrow button to scroll through the main menu. figure 2--1 shows the agl7 module main menu. agl7[1]:genlock:status 1080 59.94i : locked agl7 [1] : select output black 1 to output submenu (page 2--5) enter cancel black 1 black 2 black 3 to genlock submenu (page 2--3) enter cancel agl7 [1] : genlock selection by the module button figure 2- 1: agl7 module main menu status. displays the genlock source and status. the possible messages for the status are as follows: locked , loss of lock ,and no signal . genlock. selects the genlock source and sets the timing offset of the genlock signal relative to the internal reference signal. when you select this menu item and press the enter button, you will access the genlock submenu. refer to genlock submenu on page 2--3 for detailed information. select output. selects the output for you to change the signal format, output signal, and timing offset relative to the internal reference signal (frame reset signal). use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to select black 1 , black 2 ,or black 3 . when you select any of these and press the enter button, you will access the output submenu to set the parameters of the selected output. refer to output submenu on page 2--5 for detailed informa- tion.
operating basics agl7 analog genlock module user manual 2-3 this menu allows you to select the genlock source for the mainframe and the installed modules, set the timing offset, and the instrument actions when lock is lost. use the up ( y )ordown( b ) arrow button to scroll through the menu. figure 2--2 shows the genlock submenu. agl7 [1] : genlock : source internal agl7 [1] : genlock : timing select genlock in the main menu to timing submenu (page 2--7) enter cancel internal 525 sync ntsc burst 625 sync ntsc burst with 10 field id hd sync pal burst cw * except when internal is selected agl7 [1] : genlock : lock loss action go internal frequency go internal frequency stay current frequency agl7 [1] : genlock : frame reset (cw) 14.985 hz : ntsc and 59.94 hz group 14.985 hz : ntsc and 59.94 hz group 6.250 hz : pal and 50 hz group 15.000 hz : 60 hz group 2.997 hz : 23.98 hz group 3.000 hz : 24 hz group keep composite timing figure 2- 2: genlock submenu source. selects the signal source to genlock the mainframe and the installed modules. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to select the genlock source. the choices are: h internal : uses the internal reference signal. h ntsc burst : burst locks to an ntsc black burst signal applied to the ref connector. h ntsc burst with 10 field id : burst locks to an ntsc black burst with 10 field id signal applied to the ref connector. h pal burst : burst locks to a pal black burst signal applied to the ref connector. h 525 sync : sync locks to an ntsc black burst signal applied to the ref connector. genlock submenu
operating basics 2-4 agl7 analog genlock module user manual h 625 sync : sync locks to a pal black burst signal applied to the ref connector. h hd sync : locks to an hdtv trilevel signal applied to the ref connector. h cw : locks to 1, 3.58, 4.43, 5, and 10 mhz continuous wave signals applied to the cw connector. press the enter button to confirm the selection. timing. adjusts the timing offset of the input signal relative to the internal reference signal (frame reset signal). when you select this menu item and then press the enter button, you will access the timing submenu. refer to timing submenu on page 2--7 for detailed information. lock loss action. sets the way the agl7 will react when a loss of genlock state occurs (for example, genlock source is absent or incompatible). the selections are: h go internal frequency : when a loss of genlock state occurs, the instrument will automatically switch to the internal reference, and the ext.ref indicator blinks. h stay current frequency : when a loss of genlock state occurs, the instrument will maintain the current state. press the enter button to confirm the selection. frame reset (cw). selects the frame reset signal frequency to be used when a cw signal is applied to the cw connector. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to select the frequency. the choices are: h 14.985 hz : ntsc and 59.94 hz group :usesaframeresetsignalwitha frequency of 14.985 hz. h 6.250 hz : pal and 50 hz group :usesaframeresetsignalwitha frequency of 6.250 hz. h 15.000 hz : 60 hz group : uses a frame reset signal with a frequency of 15.000 hz. h 2.997 hz : 23.98 hz group : uses a frame reset signal with a frequency of 2.997 hz. h 3.000 hz : 24 hz group : uses a frame reset signal with a frequency of 3.000 hz.
operating basics agl7 analog genlock module user manual 2-5 h keep composite timing : in this mode, even if you change the genlock source to cw while the instrument is genlocked to a ntsc or pal black burst signal, synchronization shock is small (at this time, the instrument keeps the previously used timing of ntsc or pal whenever possible). the frame frequency is the same as that of ntsc or pal that was previously used. use a 5 mhz, 10 mhz, 3.58 mhz (for ntsc), or 4.43 mhz (for pal) signal as a cw signal source. press the enter button to confirm the selection. use this submenu to set the signal format and the timing offset for the output selected in the select output menu. use the up ( y )ordown( b ) arrow button to change the menu items. figure 2--3 shows the output submenu. agl7 [1] : black 1 : select format ntsc agl7 [1] : black 1 : timing select select output in the main menu to timing submenu (page 2--7) enter cancel to signal submenu (page 2--7) enter cancel select the format for black 1, black 2, or black 3 * except when black 3 is selected figure 2- 3: output submenu note . when you change signal format, synchronization shock occurs. select format. selects the format for the signal output from the black 1, black 2, or black 3 connector. use the left ( a ) or right ( " ) arrow button to select the format. the available choices depend on the selected output connector. the choices are: h when black 1 is selected: ntsc ntsc no setup pal output submenu
operating basics 2-6 agl7 analog genlock module user manual press the enter button to confirm the selection. when you press the enter button, you will access the signal submenu to select a black burst signal. refer to signal submenu on page 2--7 for detailed information. h when black 2 is selected: ntsc ntsc no setup pal hd sync (same as black 3) press the enter button to confirm the selection. when you press the enter button, you will access the signal submenu to select a black burst signal. refer to signal submenu on page 2--7 for detailed information. h when black 3 is selected: 1080 60i 1080 59.94i 1080 50i 1080 24sf 1080 23.98sf 1080 30p 1080 29.97p 1080 25p 1080 24p 1080 23.98p 720 60p 720 59.94p 720 50p black burst (same as black 2) when you press the enter button, the selected trilevel sync signal or black burst signal (when black burst (same as black2) is selected) is enabled. timing. adjusts the timing offset for the output signals relative to the internal reference signal (frame reset signal). when you select this menu item and then
operating basics agl7 analog genlock module user manual 2-7 press the enter button, you can access the timing submenu. however, you cannot set the timing offset under the following conditions: when hd sync (same as black 3) is selected as a format for the black 2 output. when bb (same as black 2) is selected as a format for the black 2 output. refer to timing submenu on page 2--7 for detailed information about the menu. this menu allows you to select the black burst signal for the ntsc, ntsc no setup, and pal formats. figure 2--4 shows the signal submenu. agl7 [1] black 1 : ntsc black burst from select format submenu forblack1orblack2 ntsc and ntsc no setup : black burst black burst with field ref pal : black burst black burst no field ref figure 2- 4: signal submenu use the left ( a ) or right ( " ) arrow button to select the black burst signal. the available selections vary, depending on the format selected. h when the ntsc or ntsc no setup format is selected: black burst black burst with field ref h when the pal format is selected: black burst black burst with no field ref press the enter button to confirm the selection. this menu allows you to adjust the timing offset of the input and output signals relative to the internal reference signal (frame reset signal). use the up ( y )or down ( b ) arrow button to scroll through the menu. signal submenu timing submenu
operating basics 2-8 agl7 analog genlock module user manual the timing submenu uses the same menu structure for both input and output signals, except for the menu items displayed in the first line. figure 2--5 shows the timing submenu. agl7 [1] : genlock : timing : ntsc burst vertical : 0 line (s) agl7 [1] genlock : timing : ntsc burst horizontal coarse : 0.0000 m sec agl7 [1] genlock : timing : ntsc burst horizontal fine : 0.00 nsec set the vertical timing in 1 line steps set the horizontal timing in 1 clock steps select timing in the genlock or output submenu set the horizontal timing in 0.1 ns steps figure 2- 5: timing submenu h vertical :usetheleft( a )orright( " ) arrow button to adjust the vertical offset. the range of the timing adjustment depends on the selected signal format. refer to table 2--1 and table 2--2 for the appropriate range. h horizontal coarse :usetheleft( a )orright( " ) arrow button to adjust the coarse horizontal offset. the range of the timing adjustment depends on the selected signal format. refer to table 2--1 and table 2--2 for the appropriate range. h horizontal fine :usetheleft( a ) or right ( " ) arrow button to adjust the fine horizontal offset. the range of the timing adjustment depends on the selected signal format. refer to table 2--1 and table 2--2 for the appropriate range. note . you can reset the timing offset to zero by pressing the left ( a ) and right ( " ) arrow buttons simultaneously.
operating basics agl7 analog genlock module user manual 2-9 table 2- 1: timing adjustment ranges for input signals format name line settings coarse settings ( m s) fine settings (ns) ntsc ? 525 ? 63.5556 ? 10.00 pal ? 1250 ? 64.0000 ? 10.00 1080 60i ? 562 ? 29.6296 ? 10.00 1080 59.94i ? 562 ? 29.6593 ? 10.00 1080 50i ? 562 ? 35.5556 ? 10.00 1080 24sf ? 562 ? 37.0370 ? 10.00 1080 23.98sf ? 562 ? 37.0741 ? 10.00 1080 30p ? 562 ? 29.6296 ? 10.00 1080 29.97p ? 562 ? 29.6593 ? 10.00 1080 25p ? 562 ? 35.5556 ? 10.00 1080 24p ? 562 ? 37.0370 ? 10.00 1080 23.98p ? 562 ? 37.0741 ? 10.00 720 60p ? 375 ? 22.2222 ? 10.00 720 59.94p ? 375 ? 22.2444 ? 10.00 table 2- 2: timing adjustment ranges for output signals format name line settings coarse settings ( m s) fine settings (ns) ntsc ? 525 ? 63.5556 ? 10.00 pal ? 1250 ? 64.0000 ? 10.00 1080 60i ? 562 ? 29.6296 ? 7.00 1080 59.94i ? 562 ? 29.6593 ? 7.00 1080 50i ? 562 ? 35.5556 ? 7.00 1080 24sf ? 562 ? 37.0370 ? 7.00 1080 23.98sf ? 562 ? 37.0741 ? 7.00 1080 30p ? 562 ? 29.6296 ? 7.00 1080 29.97p ? 562 ? 29.6593 ? 7.00 1080 25p ? 562 ? 35.5556 ? 7.00 1080 24p ? 562 ? 37.0370 ? 7.00 1080 23.98p ? 562 ? 37.0741 ? 7.00 720 60p ? 375 ? 22.2222 ? 7.00 720 59.94p ? 375 ? 22.4444 ? 7.00
operating basics 2-10 agl7 analog genlock module user manual rear-panel connectors the agl7 genlock module is equipped with the ref input connectors, the cw input connector, and three black signal output connectors : black1, black 2, black 3. figure 2--6 shows the agl7 genlock module rear-panel connectors. note . you cannot output hdtv t rilevel sync signals from the black 1 connector. figure 2- 6: agl7 module rear-panel connectors h ref : loopthrough connectors for an external reference signal. these inputs accept ntsc/pal black burst signals and hdtv trilevel sync signal. the inputs require proper termination at one end of the connector. h cw : input connector for cw (continuous wave) signals: 1, 3.58, 4.43, 5, and 10 mhz. this connector is internally terminated. you can output a 48 khz word clock signal from the connector. refer to changing the input/output configuration on page 2--11. h black 1 : black burst signal output. h black 2 : black burst signal and hdtv trilevel sync signal output. h black 3 : black burst signal and hdtv trilevel sync signal output.
operating basics agl7 analog genlock module user manual 2-11 the cw connector can be configured to output a 48 khz word clock signal by changing internal cabling. caution. to prevent damage to the mainframe and the module, be sure to disconnect the power cord before removing the module. to output a word clock signal from the connector: 1. disconnect the coaxial cable from the connector labeled j040 on the circuit board. see figure 2--7. 2. reconnect the cable to the connector labeled j960 on the circuit board. see figure 2--7. j960 j040 rear panel figure 2- 7: location of the j040 and j960 connectors 3. place the 48 khz clock label provided with the instrument on the rear panel below the cw connector. note . the word clock signal automatically follows the format of the black 1 signal. changing the input/output configuration
operating basics 2-12 agl7 analog genlock module user manual factory default settings table 2--3 shows the factory default settings of the agl7 genlock module. these settings are recalled when you select factory default from the preset : recall menu item in the mainframe main menu. table 2- 3: factory default settings menu item name settings genlock : source internal genlock : timing vertical 0 line(s) horizontal coarse 0.0000 m s horizontal fine 0.00 nsec genlock : lock loss action go internal frequency genlock : frame reset (cw) 14.985 hz : ntsc and 59.94 hz group output : black 1 format ntsc signal black burst output : black 2 format ntsc signal black burst output : black 3 format 1080 59.94i signal tri level sync black x : timing vertical 0 line(s) horizontal coarse 0.0000 m s horizontal fine 0.00 nsec
reference

agl7 analog genlock module user manual 3-1 syntax this section contains information on the standard commands for programmable instruments (scpi) and the programming structure you can use to program your agl7 genlock module. programming model specific conditions must exist before programming commands will affect the test signal generated by a module. select the module using the :instrument:select command before executing any commands. many of the commands used by the agl7 module are shared by several modules and w ill be accepted w ithout a reported error. many commands will accept either string or numeric arguments. for example: a boolean argument can either be ?1? or ?on?. signal parameter commands that hav e a :step node can accept either a numeric value or they can accept a string argument that refers to the :step increment. signal parameter commands with a :s tep node will accept the fo llowing strings in addition to a numeric value: up. use this argument to increase the parameter value one increment as defined by the :step value. down. use this argument to decrease the parameter value one increment as defined by the :step value. minimum. use this argument to set the parameter value to the minimum acceptable value. maximum. use this argument to set the parameter value to the maximum acceptable value. default. use this argument to set the parameter value to the default value. selecting the module command arguments
syntax 3-2 agl7 analog genlock module user manual if you send a query with no argument, the response is the current value. you can also use minimum, maximum, and default as arguments for queries whose command form can use these arguments (refer to the command syntax for the specific command). instead of returning the current value, queries using these arguments return the following information: minimum. return the minimum acceptable value. maximum. return the maximum acceptable value. default. return the default value. the following example demonstrates the effect of each of the arguments when used with a step value. 1. :instrument:select "hdvg7:#" selects the digital video generator module located in the slot number indicated by the ?#? symbol. 2. :output:circle:state on displays a circle on the video display. note . :output:circle:diameter uses an argument that is the percent of picture height. 3. :output:circle:diameter default sets the circle diameter to 90 percent of the screen height. 4. :output:circle:diameter:step 10 sets the step increment to 10 percent. 5. :output:circle:diameter down changes the circle diameter to 80 percent of the screen height. 6. :output:circle:diameter 50 changes the circle diameter to 50 percent of the screen height. 7. :output:circle:diameter maximum changes the circle diameter to 100 percent of the screen height. 8. :output:circle:diameter minimum changes the circle diameter to 0 percent of the screen height. 9. :output:circle:diameter up changes the circle diameter to 10 percent of the screen height. 10. :output:circle:diameter? maximum queries the maximum circle diameter (not the current diameter). the query returns the value of 100 percent, which is the maximum circle diameter allowable. query arguments argument example
syntax agl7 analog genlock module user manual 3-3 scpi commands and queries scpi is a standard created by a consortium that provides guidelines for remote programming of instruments. these guidelines provide a consistent program- ming environment for instrument control and data transfer. this environment uses defined programming messages, instrument responses, and data format across all scpi instruments, regardless of manufacturer. the agl7 genlock module uses a command language based on the scpi standard. the scpi language is based on a hierarchical or tree structure (see figure 3--1) that represents a subsystem. the top level of the tree is the root node; it is followed by one or more lower-level nodes. diameter output circle position state root node lower-level nodes figure 3- 1: example of scpi subsystem hierarchy you can create commands and queries from these subsystem hierarchy trees. commands specify actions for the instrument to perform. queries return measurement data and information about parameter settings. for more information on scpi commands and programming structure, refer to the TG700 signal generator platform user manual .
syntax 3-4 agl7 analog genlock module user manual
agl7 analog genlock module user manual 3-5 remote commands this section describes the commands used for the agl7 genlock module remote operation. the commands for the module a re divided into the following four groups: h input commands h source commands h output commands h sense commands input commands use these commands to set the input standard and input connector for the genlock signal. :input :reference :standard nburst|pburst|n318m|nsync|psync|hdsync :status? :hdsync? :select reference|cw :source internal|external :cwave :frame 2.997|3.0|6.25|14.985|15.0|0 :frequency? :lloss:action internal|stay :input:reference:standard nburst|pburst|n318m|nsync|psync|hdsync selects the input standard expected at the ref connector. the choices are nburst (burst lock to ntsc black burst), pburst (burst lock to pal black burst), n318m (burst lock to ntsc black burst with 10 field id), nsync (sync lock to ntsc black burst), psync (sync lock to pal black burst), and hdsync (lock to hdtv trilevel sync). command tree command description
remote commands 3-6 agl7 analog genlock module user manual :input:reference:standard? returns the current input standard. :input:reference:status? returns the current genlock status. the available responses are internal, absent, unlocked, or locked. :input:reference:hdsync? returns the format of the hdtv trilevel sync signal currently inputted. the available responses are hd1080_60i, hd1080_59i, hd1080_50i, hd1080_24sf, hd1080_23sf, hd1080_30p, hd1080_29p, hd1080_25p, hd1080_24p, hd1080_23p, hd720_60p, or hd720_59p. :input:select ref|cw sets the reference input for the genlock source. for ref, a black burst signal or hdtv trilevel signal applied to the ref connector is used. for cw, a cw signal applied to the cw connector is used for the genlock source. :input:select? returns the reference input currently used. :input:source internal|external determines whether the internal signal or external signal is used as a reference signal. :input:source? returns the signal source (internal or external) used as a reference signal. :input:cwave:frame 2.997|3.0|6.25|14.985|15.0|0 sets the frame reset signal frequency used when a cw signal is applied to the cw connector. the choices are 2.997 hz, 3.0 hz, 6.25 hz, 14.985 hz, and 15.0 hz. for 0, the instrument is set to keep composite timing. for detailed information about keep composite timing, refer to page 2--5. :input:cwave:frame? returns the current frequency of the frame reset signal for the cw input.
remote commands agl7 analog genlock module user manual 3-7 :input:cwave:frequency? returns the frequency of the cw signal currently applied. the available responses are 1.0, 3.58, 4.43, 5.0, or 10.0. :input:lloss:action internal|stay sets the instrument action when a loss of genlock state occurs. for internal, the instrument automatically switches to the internal reference. for stay, the instrument maintains the current state. :input:lloss:action? returns the current instrument action when a loss of genlock state occurs. the available responses are int or sta. source commands use these commands to set the timing offset of the genlock input signal relative to the internal reference signal (frame reset signal). refer to operating basics for detailed information about the setting range. :source :correction :mdelay :horizontal :step :vertical :step :source:correction:mdelay:horizontal sets the horizontal timing offset of the genlock input signal relative to the internal reference signal. the units are microseconds. you can use up, down, or def instead of a numeric value. :source:correction:mdelay:horizontal? returns the horizontal timing offset of the genlock input signal. command tree command description
remote commands 3-8 agl7 analog genlock module user manual :source:correction:mdelay:horizontal:step sets the step increment used by the up or down command. the units are microseconds. you can use min, max, or def instead of a numeric value. :source:correction:mdelay:horizontal:step? returns the step increment used by the up or down command. :source:correction:mdelay:vertical sets the vertical timing offset of the genlock input signal relative to the internal reference signal. the units are line numbers. you can use up, down, or def instead of a numeric value. :source:correction:mdelay:vertical? returns the vertical timing offset of the genlock input signal. :source:correction:mdelay:vertical:step sets the step increment used by the up or down command. the units are line numbers. you can use min, max, or def instead of a numeric value. :source:correction:mdelay:vertical:step? returns the step increment used by the up or down command. output commands use these commands to set the video standard and the type of signal for the black outputs. :output1 :standard ntsc|pal|ntsc_nsu :output2 :standard ntsc|pal|ntsc_ns|hdsync :output3 :standard bb|hd1080_60i|hd1080_59i|hd1080_50i| hd1080_24sf|hd1080_30p|hd1080_29p| hd1080_25p|hd1080_24p|hd1080_23p| hd720_60p|hd720_59p|hd720_50p :output :signal bb|bb_fref|bb_no_free command tree
remote commands agl7 analog genlock module user manual 3-9 :output1:standard ntsc|pal|ntsc_nsu sets the video standard for the black 1 output. the choices are ntsc, pal, and ntsc_nsu (ntsc no setup). :output1:standard? returns the video standard for the black 1 output. :output2:standard ntsc|pal|ntsc_nsu|hdsync sets the video standard for the black 2 output. the choices are ntsc, pal, ntsc_nsu (ntsc no setup), and hdsync (hdtv trilevel sync). :output2:standard? returns the video standard for the black 2 output. :output3:standard bb|hd1080_60i|hd1080_59i|hd1080_50i| hd1080_24sf|hd1080_30p|hd1080_29p| hd1080_25p|hd1080_24p|hd1080_23p| hd720_60p|hd720_59p|hd720_50p sets the video standard for the black 3 output. the choices are bb (black burst) and hd1080_60i to hd720_50p. :output3:standard? returns the video standard for the black 3 output. :output:signal bb|bb_fref|bb_no_fref sets what kind of signal is available from a specific black output. the in the command represents the connector number. you can use connector number 1 and 2. if the standard is ntsc or ntsc_nsu, the options are bb (black burst) or bb_fref (black burst with field reference). if the standard is pal, the options are bb (black burst) or bb_no_fref (black burst no field reference). :output:signal? returns the current output signal. the in the command represents the connector number. you can use connector number 1 and 2. command description
remote commands 3-10 agl7 analog genlock module user manual sense commands use these commands to set the timing offset of the black outputs relative to the internal reference signal (frame reset signal). refer to operating basics for detailed information about the setting range. :sense :correction :mdelay :horizontal :step :vertical :step :sense:correction:mdelay:horizontal sets the horizontal timing offset of a specific black output. the units are microseconds. you can use up, down, or def instead of a numeric value. if the argument exceeds the horizontal time value, then the vertical offset is adjusted to accommodate the requested offset. the in the command represents the connector number. you can use any connector number from 1 through 3. :sense:correction:mdelay:horizontal? returns the horizontal timing offset of a specific black output. the in the command represents the connector number. you can use any connector number from 1 through 3. :sense:correction:mdelay:horizontal:step sets the step increment used by the up or down command. the units are microseconds. you can use min, max, or def instead of a numeric value. the in the command represents the connector number. you can use any connector number from 1 through 3. :sense:correction:mdelay:horizontal:step? returns the step increment used by the up or down command. the in the command represents the connector number. you can use any connector number from 1 through 3. command tree command description
remote commands agl7 analog genlock module user manual 3-11 :sense:correction:mdelay:vertical sets the vertical timing offset of a specific black output. the units are horizontal lines. you can use up, down, or def instead of a numeric value. the in the command represents the connector number. you can use any connector number from 1 through 3. :sense:correction:mdelay:vertical? returns the vertical timing offset of a specific black output. the in the command represents the connector number. you can use any connector number from 1 through 3. :sense:correction:mdelay:vertical:step sets the step increment used by the up or down commands. the units are horizontal lines. you can use min, max, or def instead of a numeric value. the in the command represents the connector number. you can use any connector number from 1 through 3. :sense:correction:mdelay:vertical:step? returns the step increment used by the up or down commands. the in the command represents the connector number. you can use any connector number from 1 through 3.
remote commands 3-12 agl7 analog genlock module user manual
appendices

agl7 analog genlock module user manual a- 1 appendix a: specifications tables a--1 through a--4 list the electrical and environmental characteristics of the agl7 genlock module. electrical characteristics table a- 1: genlock function characteristic performance requirements reference information input configuration 75 ? loop through ref inputs 75 ? terminated cw input return loss > 40 db 5mhz > 35 db 5mhzto30mhz input requirements reference inputs ntsc/pal black burst or trilevel sync amplitude ? 6db s/n ratio > 40 db sch phase ? 40 _ cw input 1, 3.58, 4.43, 5, or 10 mhz cw the cw input connector can be configured t o o u t p u t a 4 8 k h z w o r d c l o c k s i g n a l b y input range 1 to 2.5 vp-p to output a 48 khz word clock signal by changing internal cabling. pull-in range subcarrier frequency ? 15 hz jitter burst lock < 0.5 _ sync lock < 1ns
appendix a: specifications a- 2 agl7 analog genlock module user manual table a- 2: black burst signal and hdtv trilevel sync signal outputs characteristic performance requirements reference information connector bnc number of outputs 3 black1, black2, and black3 configuration black1 black burst black1 always generates black burst. black2 black burst or trilevel sync when the trilevel sync signal is selected, the signal to be the same signal as black 3 is output. black3 black burst or trilevel sync when the black burst is selected, the signal to be the same signal as black 2 is output. burst amplitude accuracy ? 2% sync amplitude accuracy ? 2% sync rise time ntsc 140 ns pal 250 ns return loss > 30 db to 30 mhz timing offset range full color frame resolution < 0.5 _ of sub carrier table a- 3: word clock signal output* characteristic performance requirements reference information connector bnc same connector as cw frequency 48 khz level cmos compatible without termination impedance 75 ? ? 10% * this output is enabled when the configuration of the cw connector is changed.
appendix a: specifications agl7 analog genlock module user manual a- 3 environmental characteristics table a- 4: environmental characteristics characteristic description temperature operating 0 _ cto+50 _ c non-operating -- 2 0 _ cto+60 _ c relative humidity operating 20% to 80% (no condensation) ; maximum wet-bulb temperature 29.4 _ c non-operating 5% to 90% (no condensation) ; maximum wet-bulb temperature 40.0 _ c altitude operating to 4.5 km (15,000 feet) maximum operating temperature decreases 1 _ c each 300 m above 1.5 km. non-operating to 15 km (50,000 feet) vibration operating 3.04 m/s 2 (0.31 g rms) , 5 hz to 500 hz, 10 min, three axes non-operating 23.3 m/s 2 (2.38 g rms) , 5 hz to 500 hz, 10 min, three axes shock non-operating 294 m/s 2 (30 g), half-sine, 11 ms duration
appendix a: specifications a- 4 agl7 analog genlock module user manual
index

agl7 analog genlock module user manual index- 1 index a accessories optional, 1--2 standard, 1--2 agl7 features, 1--1 agl7 module main menu, 2--2 genlock, 2--2 select output, 2--2 status, 2--2 b black 1 connector, 2--10 black 2 connector, 2--10 black 3 connector, 2--10 c commands rules for forming, 3--1 syntax, 3--1 cw connector, 2--10 e electrical specifications, a--1 environmental specifications, a--3 f factory default settings, 2--11 functional check, 1--2 functional command groups, 3--5 g genlock submenu, 2--3 h hierarchy (scpi), 3--3 i input commands, 3--5 installation, 1--2 m manuals, related, iii o operating procedure, 2--1 option, 1--2 optional accessories, 1--2 output commands, 3--8 output submenu, 2--5 p product description, 1--1 r rear-panel connectors, 2--10 ref connector, 2--10 related manuals, iii rules, command forming, 3--1 s scpi, subsystem hierarchy tree, 3--3 scpi commands and queries syntax, 3--3?3--4 sense commands, 3--10 signal submenu, 2--7 source commands, 3--7 specifications electrical, a--1 environmental, a--3 standard accessories, 1--2 syntax, command, 3--1 t timing submenu, 2--7
index index- 2 agl7 analog genlock module user manual

user manual atg7 analog test generator www.tektronix.com
copyright ? tektronix. all rights reserved. licensed software products are owned by tektronix or its suppliers and are protected by united states copyright laws and international treaty provisions. tektronix products are covered by u.s. and foreign patents, issued and pending. information in this publication supercedes that in all previously published material. specifications and price change privileges reserved. tektronix and tek are registered trademarks of tektronix, inc. contacting tektronix tektronix, inc. 14200 sw karl braun drive p.o. box 500 beaverton, or 97077 usa for product information, sales, service, and technical support: h in north america, call 1-800-833-9200. h worldwide, visit www.tektronix.com to find contacts in your area.
atg7 analog test generator user manual i table of contents preface iii ................................................... about this manual iii ............................................... related manuals iii ................................................. getting started product description 1--1 .............................................. accessories 1--2 ..................................................... option 1--2 ......................................................... installation 1--2 ..................................................... functional check 1--3 ................................................ operating basics operating procedure 2--1 .............................................. selecting an output signal 2--2 ......................................... atg7 module main menu 2--5 ......................................... rear-panel connectors 2--13 ............................................ factory default settings 2--13 ........................................... reference syntax 3--1 ................................................... programming model 3--1 .............................................. scpi commands and queries 3--3 ...................................... remote commands 3--5 ........................................ mass memory commands 3--5 ...................................... output commands 3--6 ............................................. sense commands 3--10 ............................................... appendices appendix a: specifications a--1 .................................. electrical characteristics a--1 .......................................... environmental characteristics a--4 ...................................... index
table of contents ii atg7 analog test generator user manual list of figures figure 2--1: front-panel test signal buttons 2--3 .................... figure 2--2: atg7 module main menu 2--5 ........................ figure 2--3: select output submenu 2--7 ..................... figure 2--4: select signal submenu 2--8 ...................... figure 2--5: id text submenu 2--9 .............................. figure 2--6: timing submenu 2--11 ............................... figure 2--7: apl submenu 2--12 .................................. figure 2--8: atg7 module rear-panel connectors 2--13 ................ figure 3--1: example of scpi subsystem hierarchy 3--3 .............. list of tables table 1--1: standard and optional accessories 1--2 .................. table 2--1: signal set assigned to the test signal buttons 2--3 .......... table 2--2: selectable signals in the select signal submenu 2--8 .. table 2--3: factory default settings 2--13 .......................... table a--1: black burst and timing pulse outputs a--1 .............. table a--2: color bars signal output a--2 ........................ table a--3: test signal output a--3 .............................. table a--4: common outputs characteristics a--3 .................. table a--5: environmental characteristics a--4 .....................
atg7 analog test generator user manual iii preface this manual documents the capabilities, operation, and specifications of the atg7 analog test generator module. about this manual this manual is composed of the following sections: h getting started contains product description and functional check procedure. h operating basics explains how to operate the atg7 module using the menus and front-panel buttons. h reference provides the syntax used in command descriptions and describes all programming commands. h appendices provides the specifications. related manuals the following documents are also available: h the TG700 tv signal generator platform service manual (tektronix part number 070-a800-xx) describes how to maintain and service the mainframe and generator modules. this ma nual is an optional accessory. h the TG700 tv signal generator platform module installation instructions (tektronix part number 070-a824-xx) describes how to install and remove the modules, and how to upgrade the firmware of the mainframe.
preface iv atg7 analog test generator user manual
getting started

atg7 analog test generator user manual 1-1 getting started this section contains the following information: h product description h accessories h option h installation h functional check product description the atg7 analog test generator module is designed to be installed in the TG700 tv signal generator platform. the module is an analog test signal generator which provides ntsc/pal analog composite signals. pal-m and pal-n are not supported by the agl7, atg7 and bg7 modules. the atg7 generator modul e contains the following features: h signal output: outputs test signals selectable fro m the front-panel test signal buttons overlay id text on the video signal h bars output: outputs ntsc (with or without setup) /pal color bars signals, black burst signals, and other test signals (other 1 and other 2) overlay id text on the video signal h black 1 and black 2 outputs: outputs ntsc (with or without set up)/pal black burst signals, composite sync signal, composite blanking signa l, ntsc (with or without setup)/pal subcarrier signals, h/v drive signals, color frame id signal, and pal pulse signal h individual format and timing control for each output h full remote control using ethernet interface
getting started 1-2 atg7 analog test generator user manual accessories table 1--1 lists the standard and optional accessories provided with the atg7 generator module. table 1- 1: standard and optional accessories accessory std. opt. tektronix part number TG700 tv signal generator platform module installation instructions d 070-a824-xx TG700 signal generator platform software library cd-rom d 062-a249-xx TG700 tv signal generator platform service manual d 070-a800-xx option this subsection describes the option available for the atg7 generator module. the following option is available: option d1 (test data report) a calibration test data report will be provided with the atg7 generator module when this option is specified. installation refer to the TG700 tv signal generator platform module installation instructions for instructions on how to install the atg7 generator module. note . if the firmware version of your TG700 mainframe is 1.3 or earlier, you need to upgrade the firmware of the mainframe before using the atg7 module. refer to the TG700 tv signal generator platform module installation instruc- tions for the procedures. option d1 (test data report)
getting started atg7 analog test generator user manual 1-3 functional check the following procedure determines whether the module is operating correctly. the following equipment is required for the functional check: h ntsc/pal waveform monitor h 75 ? bnc cable h 75 ? terminator 1. install the module into the TG700 platform mainframe using the installation procedures described in the TG700 tv signal generator platform user manual . 2. power on the TG700 tv signal generator platform by connecting it to the power source. the initializing process for all installed modules is executed. 3. check that no error messages appear on the display. 4. warm up the instrument for 20 minutes. signal output : 5. use the 75 ? bnc cable to connect the signal connector to one of the input connectors on the waveform monitor rear panel. 6. use the 75 ? terminator to terminate the other loop through connector on the waveform monitor rear panel. 7. press the front-panel module button until the atg7 main menu shown below appears. atg7 [x] : status : ntsc no setup smpte color bars 8. press the front-panel format button. 9. press the left ( a ) or right ( " ) arrow button to select ntsc or pal . 10. press one of the front-panel test signal buttons (for example color bar ) to output a signal. 11. set the waveform monitor to view the signal. required equipment procedure
getting started 1-4 atg7 analog test generator user manual 12. check that the signal appears as expected. for example, if you selected a color bars signal in step 10, check that the color bars signal appears. black 1 and black 2 outputs : 13. disconnect the bnc cable from the signal connector, and then connect it to the black 1 connector. 14. press the up ( y ) or down ( b ) arrow button to select select output from the main menu. 15. press the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to select black 1 . 16. press the front-panel enter button. the select format submenu shown below appears. atg7 [x] : black 1 : select format ntsc 17. press the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to select ntsc or pal . 18. press the enter button. the select signal submenu shown below appears. atg7 [x] : black 1 : select signal black burst 19. press the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to select black burst. press the enter button to enable the selection. 20. set the waveform monitor to view the blanking area of the signal. 21. check that the appropriate black burst signal is displayed. 22. move the bnc cable from the black 1 connector to the black 2 connector. 23. press the front-panel cancel button twice to return to the main menu. 24. repeat steps 15 through 21 to check the black 2 output. bars output 25. move the bnc cable from the black2 connector to the bars connector. 26. press the cancel button twice to return to the main menu.
getting started atg7 analog test generator user manual 1-5 27. press the left ( a ) or right ( " ) arrow button to select bars . 28. press the enter button. the select format submenu appears. 29. press the left ( a ) or right ( " ) arrow button to select ntsc or pal . 30. press the enter button. the select signal submenu appears. 31. press the left ( a ) or right ( " ) arrow button to select 100 % color bars. press the enter button to enable the selection. 32. set the waveform monitor to view the color bars signal. 33. check that the appropriate color bars signal appears.
getting started 1-6 atg7 analog test generator user manual
operating basics

atg7 analog test generator user manual 2-1 operating basics this section explains how to operate the atg7 generator module using the front-panel buttons and menu. there is also a description of the rear-panel output connectors. refer to the TG700 tv signal generator platform user manual for a detailed explanation of the front-panel buttons and lcd display. operating procedure after the module is installed in the mainframe, and the mainframe is installed in the rack or other location where it will be used, access each function of the module with the following procedure: 1. connect the power connector on the rear panel and ac electric power source using the power cord. electric power is supplied to the mainframe. 2. wait until the power up initialization process is complete, and check that there are no error messages on the display. 3. after the initialization process is complete, the mainframe main menu appears, as shown below. TG700 : preset 4. press the front-panel module button until the atg7 module main menu shown below appears. atg7[x]:status:ntsc smpte color bars 5. select the signal format and si gnal you want to output from the signal connector. refer to selecting an output signal on page 2--2 for more information. 6. use the main menu or submenu item to select the signal format and signal you want to output from the black 1, black 2, and bars connectors, and set all the other output parameters.
operating basics 2-2 atg7 analog test generator user manual refer to atg7 module main menu beginning on page 2--5 for detailed information about the main menu and the submenu items. selecting an output signal the atg7 generator module provides the capability to output test signals assigned to the corresponding test signal buttons (see figure 2--1) from the signal connector. when you output a signal from the connector, you need to select a signal format and output signal. this subsection provides instructions on how to output a signal. if you press the front-panel format button when the atg7 generator module is selected (active), you can select the format for the output signals. perform the following steps to select the format: 1. confirm that any of the menu items of the atg7 module main menu is displayed. if the menu is not displayed, press the front-panel module button until the atg7 module main menu appears, as shown below. atg7[x]:status:ntsc smpte color bars 2. press the format button. the menu display changes as follows: atg7 [x] : select format ntsc (current) 3. press the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button, or press the format button repeatedly to select one of the signal formats, and then press the enter button to confirm the selection. note . when you change signal format, synchronization shock occurs. since all the signal sets available in the module are already assigned to corre- sponding test signal buttons (see figure 2--1), when you press any of the buttons one of the signals in the signal set is output. for example, when you press the color bar test signal button, you can output the 100% color bars signal in the color bars signal set. selecting a format selecting a signal
operating basics atg7 analog test generator user manual 2-3 press the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button, or press the test signal button repeatedly to select different signals assigned to the test signal button. test signal buttons figure 2- 1: front-panel test signal buttons table 2--1 lists the signal sets assigned to the test signal buttons, and shows the signals available in each signal set. the list of available signals changes, depending on the signal format. table 2- 1: signal set assigned to the test signal buttons button name signal set signals in the signal set ntsc and ntsc no setup formats color bar color bars 100% color bars, 75% color bars, smpte color bars linearity linearity 5step , 10 step , modulated 5 step , modulated pedestal , modulated ramp , ramp, shallow ramp flat field flat fields 0% flat field (ntsc format only) , 10% flat field , 40% flat field , 50% flat field , 100% flat field , field square wave, black burst, black burst with field ref multiburst multiburst 100% multiburst , 60% multiburst , multipulse sweep sweep 100% sweep , 60% sweep , chroma frequency response monitor monitor 100% red field , 75% red field , 2 level pedestal & pluge , 4 level pedestal & pluge , convergence pattern , grey window , white window , safe area, monitor setup pulse bar pulse & bar window 2t pulse & bar, sin x/x other other fcc composite , fcc multiburst , ntc7 combination , ntc7 composite, matrix 1, sng color bars
operating basics 2-4 atg7 analog test generator user manual table 2- 1: signal set assigned to the test signal buttons (cont.) button name signals in the signal set signal set pal format color bar color bars 100% colour bars, 75% colour bars, 100% colour bars over red, 75% colour bars over red linearity linearity 5step , 10 step , modulated 5 step , modulated 10 step , modulated pedestal , modulated ramp , ramp, shallow ramp flat field flat fields 40% flat field , 50% flat field , 100% flat field , field square wave , black burst, black burst with no field ref, field square wave multiburst multiburst 100% multiburst , 60% multiburst, multipulse sweep sweep 100% sweep , 60% sweep monitor monitor 100% red field , 75% red field , 2 level pedestal & pluge , 4 level pedestal & pluge , convergence pattern , grey window , white window , safe area, monitor setup matrix pulse bar pulse & bar 2t pulse & bar , sin x/x other other ccir 17, ccir 18, ccir 330, ccir 331, ukits1,ukits2,uk1lineits, its matrix 1
operating basics atg7 analog test generator user manual 2-5 atg7 module main menu you can set the text overlay, timing o ffset, and apl feature of the signal output using the atg7 module main me nu. this menu also provides t he access point to the select output submenu where you can set the output parame- ters for the black 1, black 2, and bars outputs. use the up ( y )ordown( b ) arrow button to scroll through the main menu. figure 2--2 shows the atg7 module main menu. atg7[x]:status:ntsc smpte color bars atg7[x]:idtext to select output submenu (page 2--7) enter cancel selection by the module button atg7 [x] : select output black 1 to id text submenu (page 2--9) enter cancel to timing submenu (page 2--10) enter cancel atg7 [x] : timing black 1 black 2 bars to apl submenu (page 2--11) enter cancel atg7 [x] : apl figure 2- 2: atg7 module main menu
operating basics 2-6 atg7 analog test generator user manual status. displays the current video standard and signal selection for the signal output. select output. select the output whose parameters will be set. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to make the selection. the choices are black 1 , black 2 ,or bars . when you select any of the items and then press the enter button, you will access the select output submenu. refer to select output submenu on page 2--7 for detailed information. id text. sets a text that is overlaid on the test signal output from the signal connector. when you select this menu item and then press the enter button, you will access the id text submenu. refer to id text submenu on page 2--9 for detailed information. timing. sets the timing offset o f the signal output rela tive to the internal reference signal (frame reset signal). when you select this menu item and then press the enter button, you will access the timing submenu. refer to timing submenu on page 2--10 for detailed information. apl. sets the apl and bounce features available for the signal output from the signal connector. when you select this menu item and then press the enter button, you will access the apl submenu. refer to apl submenu on page 2--11 for detailed information.
operating basics atg7 analog test generator user manual 2-7 this menu allows you to set the video format, signal, and timing offset for the black 1, black 2, or bars output. you can also set the id text overlay for the bars output using this menu. figure 2--3 shows the select output submenu. atg7 [x] : black 1 : timing to select signal submenu (page 2--8) enter cancel select select output in the main menu atg7 [x] : select format ntsc to id text submenu (page 2--9) enter cancel to timing submenu (page 2--10) enter cancel atg7 [x] : bars : id text ntsc ntsc no setup pal available only when the bars connector is selected figure 2- 3: select output submenu select format. selects the video format for the selected output. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to select ntsc , ntsc no setup ,or pal . note . when you change the video format, synchronization shock will occur; the video format changes immediately at the output as you change the format selection. select the format you want, then press the front-panel enter button to access the select signal submenu, where you select the output signal to use. refer to the select signal submenu on page 2--8 for detailed information. timing. sets the timing offset of the selected output relative to the internal reference signal (frame reset signal). select this menu item and press the enter button, to access the timing submenu. refer to timing submenu on page 2--10 for detailed information. id text. sets a text that is overlaid on the test signal output from the bars connector. select this menu item and press the enter button, to access the id select output submenu
operating basics 2-8 atg7 analog test generator user manual text submenu. refer to id text submenu on page 2--9 for detailed information. this menu allows you to select an output signal for the black 1, black 2, or bars connector. figure 2--4 shows the select signal submenu. atg7 [x] : black 1 : ntsc black burst ntsc and ntsc no setup : black burst black burst with field ref composite sync composite blanking subcarrier hdrive vdrive field reference pal : black burst black burst no field ref composite sync composite blanking subcarrier hdrive vdrive field reference pal pulse ntsc and ntsc no setup : black burst black burst with field ref 100% color bar 75% color bar smpte color bar 40% flat field other 1 other 2 pal : black burst black burst no field ref 100% colour bar 75% colour bar 100% colour bar over red 75% colour bar over red 40% flat field other 1 other 2 h black 1 and black 2 h bars figure 2- 4: select signal submenu use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to scroll through the selections. press the enter button to enable the selected signal. signals available for selection depend on the selected output connector and video format. table 2--2 lists the available s ignals for each output connector and video format. table 2- 2: selectable signals in the select signal submenu format selectable signals black1 and black 2 connectors ntsc and ntsc no setup black burst, black burst with field ref, composite sync, composite blanking, subcarrier, h drive, v drive, field reference pal black burst, black burst no field ref, composite sync, composite blanking, subcarrier, h drive, v drive, field reference, pal pulse select signal submenu
operating basics atg7 analog test generator user manual 2-9 table 2- 2: selectable signals in the select signal submenu (cont.) format selectable signals bars connector ntsc and ntsc no setup black burst, black burst with field ref, 100% color bar, 75% color bar, smpte color bar, 40% flat field, other 1 (sng color bars), other 2 (monitor setup matrix) pal black burst, black burst no field ref, 100% colour bar, 75% colour bar, 100% colour bar over red, 75% colour bar over red, 40% flat field, other 1 (4 level pedestal & pluge), other 2 (monitor setup matrix) this menu allows you to edit text that is overlaid on the signal for the signal and bars outputs, and to set the display position of the text. use the up ( y )or down ( b ) arrow button to scroll through the menu. figure 2--5 shows the id text submenu. atg7[x]:idtext status : enable edit text atg7[x]:idtext x position : 0.0 % aph atg7[x]:idtext:edit _ set the horizontal position set the vertical position atg7 [x] : id text y position : 0.0 % aph enable blink fast blink slow disable atg7[x]:idtext:save enter save the text to the signal file select id text in the main menu or select output submenu enter figure 2- 5: id text submenu id text submenu
operating basics 2-10 atg7 analog test generator user manual h status : sets the display status of the text overlay. use the left ( a )orright ( " ) arrow button to select enable , blink fast (blinks approximately at 0.5 second intervals), blink slow (blinks approximately at 1.0 second interval), or disable .pressthe enter button to confirm the selection. h x position : sets the horizontal position of the text. the position is set as a percentage of active picture width. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to change the position. you can set the value from 0.0 % to 100.0 % in 1% steps. h y position : sets the vertical position of the text. the position is set as a percentage of active picture height. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to change the position. you can set the value from 0.0 % to 100.0 % in 1% steps. h edit : edits the text you want to display on the output test signal. to edit the text, first press the enter button to enable the text edit mode. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to move the underscore character ( _ ) to the character you want to change, and then use the up ( y ) or down ( b ) arrow button to select the desired character. when you have entered all the desired characters, press the enter button to end the text editing process. you can use up to 18 characters for the text. use the blank character to erase an unneeded character(s). h save : saves the text and its position to the signal file currently being output. press the enter button to save them to the signal file. this menu allows you to adjust the timing offset of the selected output relative to the internal reference signal (frame reset signal). use the up ( y )ordown( b ) arrow button to scroll through the menu. figure 2--6 shows the timing submenu. timing submenu
operating basics atg7 analog test generator user manual 2-11 atg7 [x] : timing : ntsc vertical : 0 line (s) atg7 [x] : timing : ntsc horizontal : 0.0000 m sec set the vertical timing select timing in the main menu or select output submenu set the horizontal timing figure 2- 6: timing submenu h vertical : sets the vertical timing offset. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to change the timing offset. you can set the value from --1/2 color frame to +1/2 color frame in 1 line steps. h horizontal : sets the horizontal timing offset. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to adjust the timing offset. you can set the value from --1 line to +1 line in one clock steps (18.5 ns). note . you can reset the timing offset to zero by pressing the left ( a ) and right ( " ) arrow buttons simultaneously. the atg7 horizontal timing can only be adjusted in clock cycle increments. you can match the agl7 timing to the atg7 by adjusting the agl7 fine timing controls. this menu allows you to set the apl and bounce features for the test signal output from the signal connector. use the up ( y ) or down ( b ) arrow button to scroll through the menu. figure 2--7 shows the apl submenu. apl submenu
operating basics 2-12 atg7 analog test generator user manual atg7 [x] : apl : mode apl off atg7 [x] : apl : period 1.0 sec apl off high apl low apl apl (bounce) bounce select apl in the main menu set the bounce period figure 2- 7: apl submenu h mode : sets the output mode of the apl signal. use the left ( a ) or right ( " ) arrow button to select the mode. the choices are: h apl off : outputs the selected signal without making any changes. h high apl : divides the video lines of the selected signal into 5 lines (for ntsc) or 4 lines (for pal) and changes the lines except the last line to the 100 % flat field signal, and then outputs them. h low apl : divides the video lines of the selected signal into 5 lines (for ntsc) or 4 lines (for pal) and changes the lines except the last line to the 0 % flat field signal, and then outputs them. h apl (bounce) : outputs the high apl si gnal and low apl signal alternately for the period set in the period menu item. h bounce : outputs the 100 % flat field signal and 0% flat field signal alternately (regardless of the selected signal) for the period set in the period menu item. press the enter button to confirm the selection. h period : sets the time interval between two signals when they are output in apl (bounce) or bounce mode. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to change the interval. you can set the value from 0.5 seconds to 2.0 seconds in 0.5 second steps.
operating basics atg7 analog test generator user manual 2-13 rear-panel connectors the atg7 generator module is equipped with four bnc connectors: black 1, black 2, signal, and bars. figure 2--8 shows the atg7 generator module rear-panel connectors. figure 2- 8: atg7 module rear-panel connectors h black 1 : outputs the black burst signals, timing pulse signals, and subcarrier signal. h black 2 : outputs the black burst signals, timing pulse signals, and subcarrier signal. h signal : outputs the signals assigned to the front-panel test signal buttons. refer to table 2--1 on page 2--3 about the signal sets available for the connector. h bars : outputs the black burst signals and color bars signals. factory default settings table 2--3 shows the factory default settings for the atg7 generator module. these settings are recalled when you select factory default from the preset : recall menu item in the mainframe main menu. table 2- 3: factory default settings menu item name settings status (shows the signal format and signal name output from the signal connector) ntsc smpte color bars output : black 1 and black 2 format ntsc signal black burst
operating basics 2-14 atg7 analog test generator user manual table 2- 3: factory default settings (cont.) menu item name settings output : bars format ntsc signal smpte color bar id text status disable timing vertical 0 line(s) horizontal 0.0000 m sec apl mode apl off period 1.0 sec
reference

atg7 analog test generator user manual 3-1 syntax this section contains information on the standard commands for programmable instruments (scpi) and the programming structure you can use to program your atg7 generator module. programming model specific conditions must exist before programming commands will affect the test signal generated by a module. select the module using the :instrument:select command before executing any commands. many of the commands used by the atg7 module are shared by several modules and w ill be accepted w ithout a reported error. many commands will accept either string or numeric arguments. for example: a boolean argument can either be ?1? or ?on?. signal parameter commands that hav e a :step node can accept either a numeric value or they can accept a string argument that refers to the :step increment. signal parameter commands with a :s tep node will accept the fo llowing strings in addition to a numeric value: up. use this argument to increase the parameter value one increment as defined by the :step value. down. use this argument to decrease the parameter value one increment as defined by the :step value. minimum. use this argument to set the parameter value to the minimum acceptable value. maximum. use this argument to set the parameter value to the maximum acceptable value. default. use this argument to set the parameter value to the default value. selecting the module command arguments
syntax 3-2 atg7 analog test generator user manual if you send a query with no argument, the response is the current value. you can also use minimum, maximum, and default as arguments for queries whose command form can use these arguments (refer to the command syntax for the specific command). instead of returning the current value, queries using these arguments return the following information: minimum. return the minimum acceptable value. maximum. return the maximum acceptable value. default. return the default value. the following example demonstrates the effect of each of the arguments when used with a step value. 1. :instrument:select "hdvg7:#" selects the digital video generator module located in the slot number indicated by the ?#? symbol. 2. :output:circle:state on displays a circle on the video display. note . :output:circle:diameter uses an argument that is the percent of picture height. 3. :output:circle:diameter default sets the circle diameter to 90 percent of the screen height. 4. :output:circle:diameter:step 10 sets the step increment to 10 percent. 5. :output:circle:diameter down changes the circle diameter to 80 percent of the screen height. 6. :output:circle:diameter 50 changes the circle diameter to 50 percent of the screen height. 7. :output:circle:diameter maximum changes the circle diameter to 100 percent of the screen height. 8. :output:circle:diameter minimum changes the circle diameter to 0 percent of the screen height. 9. :output:circle:diameter up changes the circle diameter to 10 percent of the screen height. 10. :output:circle:diameter? maximum queries the maximum circle diameter (not the current diameter). the query returns the value of 100 percent, which is the maximum circle diameter allowable. query arguments argument example
syntax atg7 analog test generator user manual 3-3 scpi commands and queries scpi is a standard created by a consortium that provides guidelines for remote programming of instruments. these guidelines provide a consistent program- ming environment for instrument control and data transfer. this environment uses defined programming messages, instrument responses, and data format across all scpi instruments, regardless of manufacturer. the atg7 generator module uses a command language based on the scpi standard. the scpi language is based on a hierarchical or tree structure (see figure 3--1) that represents a subsystem. the top level of the tree is the root node; it is followed by one or more lower-level nodes. diameter output circle position state root node lower-level nodes figure 3- 1: example of scpi subsystem hierarchy you can create commands and queries from these subsystem hierarchy trees. commands specify actions for the instrument to perform. queries return measurement data and information about parameter settings. for more information on scpi commands and programming structure, refer to the TG700 signal generator platform user manual .
syntax 3-4 atg7 analog test generator user manual
atg7 analog test generator user manual 3-5 remote commands this section describes the command sets used for the atg7 generator module remote operation. the commands for the module are divided into the following three groups: h mass memory commands ( refer to the TG700 tv signal generator platform user manual ) h output commands h sense commands mass memory commands two mass memory commands are listed here for your reference. you can use these to load and query the output test signal. detailed information for using these commands are located in the TG700 tv signal generator platform user manual . :mmemory:load:signal , :mmemory:load:signal , loads a signal into the specified module. :mmemory:signal:active? | returns the current output signal of the specified module.
remote commands 3-6 atg7 analog test generator user manual output commands use these commands to control the output parameters of the module. these include id text overlay and apl features. :output :standard ntsc|ntsc_nsu|pal :signal bb|bb_fref|bb_no_fref|sync|blanking| subcarrier|h_drive|v_drive|fref| pal_pulse (n=1,2) bb|bb_no_fref|cb100_per|cb75_per| cb_smpte|ff40per|cb100_or|cb75_or| other_one|other_two (n=4) :overlay :blink :state on|off :period :text :state on|off :data :position :horizontal :vertical :save :apl :mode apl_off|apl_high|apl_low|apl_bounce :period :output:standard ntsc|ntsc_nsu|pal sets the video standard for the black 1, black 2, or bars output. the choices are ntsc, ntsc_nsu (ntsc no setup), or pal. the in the command represents the output connector type and you can specify 1, 2, or 4. ?1? represents the black 1 connector, ?2? represents the black 2 connector, and ?4? represents the bars connector. command tree command description
remote commands atg7 analog test generator user manual 3-7 :output:standard? returns the video standard for the black 1, black 2, or bars output. the in the command represents the output connector and you can specify 1, 2, or 4. ?1? represents the black 1 connector, ?2? represents the black 2 connector, and ?4? represents the bars connector. :output:signal bb|bb_fref|bb_no_fref|sync|blanking| subcarrier|h_drive|v_drive|fref| pal_pulse (n=1,2) bb|bb_no_fref|cb100_per|cb75_per|cb_smpte| ff40per|cb100_or|cb75_or|other_one| other_two (n=4) sets the signal available from the black 1, black 2, or bars output. the in the command represents the output connector and you can specify 1, 2, or 4. ?1? represents the black 1 connector, ?2? represents the black 2 connector, and ?4? represents the bars connector. if ?1? or ?2? is specified for the connector type, the choices are bb (black burst), bb_fref (black burst with field reference), bb_no_fref (black burst no field reference), sync (composite sync), blanking (composite bla nking), subcarrier (subcarr- ier), h_drive (h drive), v_drive (v drive), fref (color frame id), or pal pulse (pal pulse). if ?4? is specified for the connector type, the choices are bb (black burst), bb_fref (black burst with field reference), bb_no_fref (black burst no field reference), cb100per (100 % color (or colour) bars), cb75per (75 % color (or colour) bars), cb_100_or (100 % colour bars over red), cb_75_or (75 % colour bars over red), cb_smpte (smpte color bars), ff40per (40 % flat field), other_one (other 1), or other_two (other 2). :output:signal? returns the current output signal for the black 1, black 2, or bars output. the in the command represents the output connector and you can specify 1, 2, or 4. ?1? represents the black 1 connector, ?2? represents the black 2 connector, and ?4? represents the bars connector. :output:overlay:blink:state on|off turns the text blinking mode on or off. you can also use 1 or 0 instead of on or off. the in the command represents the output connector and you can specify 3 or 4. ?3? represents the signal connector and ?4? represents the bars connector.
remote commands 3-8 atg7 analog test generator user manual :output:overlay:blink:state? returns the current state of the text blinking mode. the in the command represents the output connector and you can specify 3 or 4. ?3? represents the signal connector and ?4? represents the bars connector. :output:overlay:blink:period sets the blinking interval of the text blinking mode. you can set the value as 0.5 seconds or 1.0 seconds. the in the command represents the output connector and you can specify 3 or 4. ?3? represents the signal connector and ?4? represents the bars connector. :output:overlay:blink:period? returns the blinking interval of the text blinking mode. the in the command represents the output connector and you can specify 3 or 4. ?3? represents the signal connector and ?4? represents the bars connector. :output:text:state on|off turns the text overlay on the video signal on or off. you can also use 1 or 0 instead of on or off. the in the command represents the output connector and you can specify 3 or 4. ?3? represents the signal connector and ?4? represents the bars connector. :output:text:state? returns the current text overlay state. the in the command represents the output connector and you can specify 3 or 4. ?3? represents the signal connector and ?4? represents the bars connector. :output:text:data sets the current string for the text overlay mode. the in the command represents the output connector and you can specify 3 or 4. ?3? represents the signal connector and ?4? represents the bars connector. the text string may contain up to 18 characters. :output:text:data? returns the current string for the text overlay mode. the in the command represents the output connector and you can specify 3 or 4. ?3? represents the signal connector and ?4? represents the bars connector.
remote commands atg7 analog test generator user manual 3-9 :output:text:position:horizontal sets the text horizontal position in the video signal. the unit is percent of active picture width. you can set the position from 0 % to 100 % in 1 % steps. you can also use min, max, or def instead of the numeric value. the in the command represents the output connector and you can specify 3 or 4. ?3? represents the signal connector and ?4? represents the bars connector. :output:text:position:horizontal? returns the current text horizontal position in the video signal. the in the command represents the output connector and you can specify 3 or 4. ?3? represents the signal connector and ?4? represents the bars connector. :output:text:position:vertical sets the text vertical position in the video signal. the unit is percent of active picture height. you can set the position from 0 % to 100 % in 1 % steps. you can also use min, max, or def instead of the numeric value. the in the command represents the output connector and you can specify 3 or 4. ?3? represents the signal connector and ?4? represents the bars connector. :output:text:position:vertical? returns the current text vertical position in the video signal. the in the command represents the output connector and you can specify 3 or 4. ?3? represents the signal connector and ?4? represents the bars connector. :output:text:save saves the current text and its display position to the signal file. there are no arguments. the in the command represents the output connector and you can specify 3 or 4. ?3? represents the signal connector and ?4? represents the bars connector. :output:apl:mode apl_off|apl_high|apl_low|apl_bounce|bounce sets the output mode of the apl signal. refer to operating basics for detailed information about the each mode. you can only specify ?3? (signal connector) for the . :output:apl:mode? returns the current output mode of the apl signal. you can specify only ?3? (signal connector) for the .
remote commands 3-10 atg7 analog test generator user manual :output:apl:period sets the time interval between two signals when they are output in the bounce modes. you can set the value from 0.5 seconds to 2.0 seconds in 0.5 seconds steps. you can specify only ?3? (signal connector) for the . :output:apl:period? returns the time interval between two signals when they are output in the bounce modes. you can specify only ?3? (signal connector) for the . sense commands use these commands to adjust the timing offset of each output relative to the internal reference signal (frame reset signal). refer to operating basics about the timing offset range. :sense :correction :mdelay :horizontal :step :vertical :step :sense:correction:mdelay:horizontal sets the horizontal timing offset for the specified output. the timing resolution is clock-cycles. the unit is microseconds. you can use up, down, or def instead of the numeric values. if the argument exceeds the horizontal time value, then the vertical offset is adjusted to accommodate the requested offset. the in the command represents the output connector and you can specify from 1 through 4. ?1? represents the black 1 connector, ?2? represents the black 2 connector, ?3? represents the signal connector, and ?4? represents the bars connector. command tree command description
remote commands atg7 analog test generator user manual 3-11 :sense:correction:mdelay:horizontal? returns the horizontal timing offset of the specified output. the in the command represents the output connector and you can specify from 1 through 4. ?1? represents the black 1 connector, ?2? represents the black 2 connector, ?3? represents the signal connector, and ?4? represents the bars connector. :sense:correction:mdelay:horizontal:step sets the step increment used by the up or down commands. the unit is microseconds. you can use up, down, or def instead of the numeric values. the in the command represents the output connector and you can specify from 1 through 4. ?1? represents the black 1 connector, ?2? represents the black 2 connector, ?3? represents the signal connector, and ?4? represents the bars connector. :sense:correction:mdelay:horizontal:step? returns the step increment used by the up or down commands. the in the command represents the output connector and you can specify from 1 through 4. ?1? represents the black 1 connector, ?2? represents the black 2 connector, ?3? represents the signal connector, and ?4? represents the bars connector. :sense:correction:mdelay:vertical sets the vertical timing offset of the specified output. the argument can be a floating point value that is translated into integer lines with a horizontal offset. you can use up, down, or def instead of a numeric value. the in the command represents the output connector and you can specify from 1 through 4. ?1? represents the black 1 connector, ?2? represents the black 2 connector, ?3? represents the signal connector, and ?4? represents the bars connector. :sense:correction:mdelay:vertical? returns the vertical timing offset of the specified output. the in the command represents the output connector and you can specify from 1 through 4. ?1? represents the black 1 connector, ?2? represents the black 2 connector, ?3? represents the signal connector, and ?4? represents the bars connector.
remote commands 3-12 atg7 analog test generator user manual :sense:correction:mdelay:vertical:step sets the step increment used by the up or down commands. you can use min, max, or def instead of the numeric values. the in the command represents the output connector and you can specify from 1 through 4. ?1? represents the black 1 connector, ?2? represents the black 2 connector, ?3? represents the signal connector, and ?4? represents the bars connector. :sense:correction:mdelay:vertical:step? returns the step increment used by the up or down commands. the in the command represents the output connector and you can specify from 1 through 4. ?1? represents the black 1 connector, ?2? represents the black 2 connector, ?3? represents the signal connector, and ?4? represents the bars connector.
appendices

atg7 analog test generator user manual a- 1 appendix a: specifications tables a--1 through a--5 list the electrical characteristics and the environmental characteristics of the atg7 generator module. electrical characteristics table a- 1: black burst and timing pulse outputs characteristic performance requirements reference information connector bnc number of outputs 2 black 1 and black 2 output impedance, typical 75 ? black burst output signals ntsc and ntsc no setup black burst black burst with field ref pal black burst black burst with no field ref timing pulse output amplitude accuracy 1.0 ? 0.1 v rise time ntsc and ntsc no setup 140 ? 20 ns pal 250 ? 20 ns output signals ntsc and ntsc no setup composite sync composite blanking subcarrier hdrive vdrive field reference pal composite sync composite blanking subcarrier hdrive vdrive field reference pal pulse
appendix a: specifications a- 2 atg7 analog test generator user manual table a- 2: color bars signal output characteristic performance requirements reference information connector bnc number of outputs 1 bars output impedance, typical 75 ? output signals ntsc and ntsc no setup smpte color bar 100% color bar 75% color bar 40% flat field black burst black burst with field ref other 1 other 2 pal 100% colour bar 75% colour bar 100% colour bar over red 75% colour bar over red 40% flat field black burst black burst no field ref other 1 other 2 id text maximum 18 characters luminance amplitude accuracy ? 1% measured at 700 mv. chrominance to luminance gain ? 2% chrominance is measured at red portion of the 75% colour bar over red signal.
appendix a: specifications atg7 analog test generator user manual a- 3 table a- 3: test signal output characteristic performance requirements reference information connector bnc number of outputs 1 signal output impedance, typical 75 ? output signals refer to table 2--1 on page 2--3 for detailed information about the output signals. id text maximum 18 characters luminance amplitude accuracy ? 1% measured at 700 mv. chrominance to luminance gain ? 1% frequency response ? 1% to5mhz chrominance to luminance delay 10 ns measured at 500 khz and 4.43 mhz. linearity < 1% < 0.5 % (typical); measured at 5 step signal. differential gain error < 0.5% measured at modulated 5 step signal. differential phase error < 0.5 _ measured at modulated 5 step signal. field tilt < 0.5% line tilt < 0.5% table a- 4: common outputs characteristics characteristic performance requirements reference information return loss 36 db to6mhz burst amplitude accuracy ? 2% sync amplitude accuracy ? 2% blanking level 0mv ? 50 mv sch phase accuracy 0 _ ? 5 _ timing offset range full color frame resolution 54 mhz clock resolution ? 18.5 ns
appendix a: specifications a- 4 atg7 analog test generator user manual environmental characteristics table a- 5: environmental characteristics characteristic description temperature operating 0 _ cto+50 _ c nonoperating -- 2 0 _ cto+60 _ c relative humidity operating 20% to 80% (no condensation) ; maximum wet-bulb temperature 29.4 _ c nonoperating 5% to 90% (no condensation) ; maximum wet-bulb temperature 40.0 _ c altitude operating to 4.5 km (15,000 feet) maximum operating temperature decreases 1 _ c each 300 m above 1.5 km. nonoperating to 15 km (50,000 feet) vibration operating 3.04 m/s 2 (0.31 g rms) , 5 hz to 500 hz, 10 min, three axes nonoperating 23.3 m/s 2 (2.38 g rms) , 5 hz to 500 hz, 10 min, three axes shock nonoperating 294 m/s 2 (30 g), half-sine, 11 ms duration
index

atg7 analog test generator user manual index- 1 index a accessories optional, 1--2 standard, 1--2 apl, 2--11 apl submenu, 2--11 atg7 features, 1--1 atg7 module main menu, 2--5 apl, 2--6 id text, 2--6, 2--7 select output, 2--6 status, 2--6 timing, 2--6 b bars connector, 2--13 black 1 connector, 2--13 black 2 connector, 2--13 bounce, 2--12 c commands rules for forming, 3--1 syntax, 3--1 e electrical specifications, a--1 environmental specifications, a--4 f factory default settings, 2--13 functional check, 1--3 functional command groups, 3--5 h hierarchy (scpi), 3--3 i id text submenu, 2--9 installation, 1--2 m manuals, related, iii mass memory commands, 3--5 o operating procedure, 2--1 option, 1--2 optional accessories, 1--2 output comands, 3--6 p product description, 1--1 r rear-panel connectors, 2--13 related manuals, iii rules, command forming, 3--1 s scpi, subsystem hierarchy tree, 3--3 scpi commands and queries syntax, 3--3?3--4 select output submenu, 2--7 select si gnal submenu, 2--8 sense commands, 3--10 signal connector, 2--13 signal set assigned to the test signal buttons, 2--3 specifications electrical, a--1 environmental, a--4 standard accessories, 1--2 syntax, command, 3--1 t text overlay, 2--9 timing submenu, 2--10
index index- 2 atg7 analog test generator user manual

user manual av g 7 analog video generator www.tektronix.com
copyright ? tektronix. all rights reserved. licensed software products are owned by tektronix or its suppliers and are protected by united states copyright laws and international treaty provisions. tektronix products are covered by u.s. and foreign patents, issued and pending. information in this publication supercedes that in all previously published material. specifications and price change privileges reserved. tektronix and tek are registered trademarks of tektronix, inc. contacting tektronix tektronix, inc. 14200 sw karl braun drive p.o. box 500 beaverton, or 97077 usa for product information, sales, service, and technical support: h in north america, call 1-800-833-9200. h worldwide, visit www.tektronix.com to find contacts in your area.
avg7 analog video generator user manual i table of contents preface iii ................................................... about this manual iii ............................................... related manuals iii ................................................. getting started product description 1--1 .............................................. accessories 1--2 ..................................................... option 1--2 ......................................................... installation 1--2 ..................................................... functional check 1--2 ................................................ operating basics operating procedure 2--1 .............................................. selecting an output signal 2--2 ......................................... avg7 module main menu 2--8 ......................................... rear-panel connectors 2--20 ............................................ factory default settings 2--21 ........................................... reference syntax 3--1 ................................................... programming model 3--1 .............................................. scpi commands and queries 3--3 ...................................... remote commands 3--5 ........................................ mass memory commands 3--5 ...................................... output commands 3--6 ............................................. sense commands 3--12 ............................................... appendices appendix a: specifications a--1 .................................. electrical characteristics a--1 .......................................... environmental characteristics a--3 ...................................... index
table of contents ii avg7 analog video generator user manual list of figures figure 2--1: front-panel test signal buttons 2--3 .................... figure 2--2: avg7 module main menu 2--8 ......................... figure 2--3: moving picture submenu 2--10 .................... figure 2--4: overlay submenu 2--11 ............................ figure 2--5: logo submenu 2--12 ................................ figure 2--6: id text submenu 2--13 .............................. figure 2--7: circle submenu 2--14 .............................. figure 2--8: timing submenu 2--16 ............................... figure 2--9: video submenu 2--17 ................................ figure 2--10: apl submenu 2--19 ................................. figure 2--11: avg7 module rear-panel connectors 2--20 ............... figure 3--1: example of scpi subsystem hierarchy 3--3 .............. list of tables table 1--1: standard and optional accessories 1--2 .................. table 2--1: signal set assigned to the test signal buttons 2--3 .......... table 2--2: factory default settings 2--20 .......................... table a--1: output channels a--1 ................................ table a--2: common output characteristics a--1 ................... table a--3: environmental characteristics a--3 .....................
avg7 analog video generator user manual iii preface this manual documents the capabilities, operation, and specifications of the avg7 analog video generator module. about this manual this manual is composed of the following sections: h getting started contains product description and functional check procedure. h operating basics explains how to operate the avg7 module using the menus and front-panel buttons. h reference provides the syntax used in command descriptions and describes all programming commands. h appendices provides the specifications. related manuals the following documents are also available. h the TG700 tv signal generator platform service manual (tektronix part number 070-a800-xx) describes how to maintain and service the mainframe and generator modules. this ma nual is an optional accessory. h the TG700 tv signal generator platform module installation instructions (tektronix part number 070-a824-xx) describes how to install and remove the modules, and how to upgrade the firmware of the mainframe.
preface iv avg7 analog video generator user manual
getting started

avg7 analog video generator user manual 1-1 getting started this section contains the following information: h product description h accessories h option h installation h functional check product description the avg7 analog video generator module is designed to be installed in the TG700 tv signal generator platform. the TG700 platform must be running version 3.1 or later firmware. the module is an analog video signal generator which provides analog compos- ite and component video signals in various formats. the module contains the following features: h supports the following system formats: ntsc, ntsc no setup, pal, 525 gbr, 525 ypbpr, 525 beta, 625 gbr, 625ypbpr h six analog composite or component video outputs h outputs a frame picture created by the frame picture generator application (TG700 option fp required) h overlay of circle, text, or logo on the video signal h generates a moving picture by scrolling the active picture area of the output test signal h full remote control using ethernet interface
getting started 1-2 avg7 analog video generator user manual accessories table 1--1 lists the standard and optional accessories provided with the avg7 generator module. table 1- 1: standard and optional accessories accessory std. opt. tektronix part number TG700 tv signal generator platform module installation instructions d 070-a824-xx TG700 signal generator platform software library cd-rom d 062-a249-xx TG700 tv signal generator platform service manual d 070-a800-xx option this subsection describes the option available for the avg7 generator module. the following option is available: option d1 (test data report) a calibration test data report will be provided with the avg7 generator module when this option is specified. installation refer to the TG700 tv signal generator platform module installation instructions for instructions on how to install the avg7 generator module. functional check the following procedure determines whether the module is operating correctly. the following equipment is required for the functional check: h waveform monitor h 75 ? bnc cable option d1 (test data report) required equipment
getting started avg7 analog video generator user manual 1-3 1. install the module into the TG700 platform mainframe using the installation procedures described in the TG700 tv signal generator platform user manual . 2. power on the TG700 tv signal generator platform by connecting it to the power source. the initialization of all the installed modules is executed. 3. check that no error messages appear on the lcd display. 4. warm up the instrument for 20 minutes. 5. press the front-panel module button until the avg7 main menu shown below appears. avg7[x]:status:ntsc smpte color bars 6. press the format button and use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to select a format, then press the enter button. 7. press one of the front-panel test signal buttons (for example color bar ) to output a signal. 8. press the cancel button to display the main menu. 9. press the up ( y )ordown( b ) arrow button to select video from the main menu and then press the enter button. the video submenu shown below appears. avg7 [x] : video : configuration ch1/2/3: composites 10. press the left ( a ) or right ( " ) arrow button to select ch1/2/3: composites andthenpressthe enter button. 11. connect the upper (or lower) ch 1 connector to the waveform monitor using the 75 ? bnc cable. 12. set the waveform monitor to view the signal. 13. check that the signal appears as expected. for example, if you selected a color bar signal in step 7, check that the color bar signal appears. 14. disconnect the bnc cable from the ch 1 connector, and then connect the bnc cable to the ch 2 connector. procedure
getting started 1-4 avg7 analog video generator user manual 15. check that the signal appears as expected. 16. disconnect the bnc cable from the ch 2 connector, and then connect the bnc cable to the ch 3 connector. 17. check that the signal appears as expected. 18. disconnect the bnc cable from the ch 3 connector, and then connect the bnc cable to the ch 1 connector. 19. press the test signal button again to output the another test signal in the same signal set. 20. check that the signal on the waveform monitor changes. you need not perform this check for the ch 2 and ch 3 connectors. 21. repeat steps 11 through 20 for the lower (or upper) output channels.
operating basics

avg7 analog video generator user manual 2-1 operating basics this section explains the operation of the avg7 generator module using the front-panel buttons and menus. it also contains descriptions of the rear-panel connectors. refer to the TG700 tv signal generator platform user manual for a detailed explanation of the front-panel buttons and the lcd display. operating procedure after the module is installed in the mainframe, and the mainframe is installed in the rack or other location where it will be used, access each function of the module with the following procedure: 1. connect the power connector on the rear panel to the ac electric power source using the power cord. electric power is supplied to the mainframe. 2. wait until the power up initialization process is complete, and check that no error messages appear on the display. 3. following the initialization process t he mainframe main menu appears, as shown below. TG700 : preset 4. press the front-panel module button until the avg7 module main menu appears, as shown below. avg7[x]:status:ntsc smpte color bars 5. select the signal format and the signal you want to output. refer to selecting an output signal on page 2--2 for more information. 6. press the front-panel arrow buttons to select the desired main menu item or submenu item. refer to avg7 module main menu beginning on page 2--8 for detailed information about the main menu items and the submenu items.
operating basics 2-2 avg7 analog video generator user manual selecting an output signal when you output a signal from the avg7 generator module, you need to select a signal format and output signal. this subsection provides instructions on how to output a signal. if you press the front-panel format button when the avg7 generator module is selected (active), you can select the format for the output signals. perform the following steps to select the format: 1. confirm that any menu item of the avg7 module main menu is displayed. if the menu is not displayed, press the front-panel module button until the avg7 module main menu appears, as shown below. avg7[x]:status:ntsc smpte color bars 2. press the format button. the menu display changes as follows: avg7 [x] : select format ntsc (current) 3. press the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to select one of the signal formats, and then press the enter button to confirm the selection. note . when you change signal format, synchronization shock occurs. when you change the format while a signal is output, the instrument starts loading all of the signal set for the format and displays the message ? now loading... ?. when you see the message, ? done (press cancel) ?, press the cancel button. all signal sets available in the module a re already assigned to the corresponding test signal buttons (see figure 2--1). when you press any of the buttons, one of the signals in the signal set is output. for example, when you press the color bar test signal button, you can output the 100% color bars signal in the color bars signal set. press the left ( a ) or right ( " ) arrow button, or press the test signal button repeatedly to select different signals assigned to the test signal button. selecting a format selecting a signal
operating basics avg7 analog video generator user manual 2-3 test signal buttons figure 2- 1: front-panel test signal buttons table 2--1 lists the signal set assigned to each test signal button and the signals that can be selected in the signal set. the signals available in each signal set are different from one signal format to another. the signals in the signal set can be added or changed with improvement of the module. table 2- 1: signal set assigned to the test signal buttons button name signal set signals in the signal set ntsc/ntsc no setup format color bar color bars 100% color bars, 75% color bars, smpte color bars linearity linearity 10 step , 5step , modulated 5 step , modulated pedestal , modulated ramp , shallow ramp , ramp flat field flat fields black burst, black burst with field ref, 0% flat field (ntsc only) , 10% flat field , 40 % flat field , 50% flat field, 100% flat field , field square wave multi burst multi burst 100% multiburst , 60% multiburst, multipulse sweep sweep 60% sweep , 100% sweep, chroma frequency response monitor monitor convergence pattern , gray window , 100% red field , 2 level pedestal & pluge , 4 level pedestal & pluge , 75% red field , monitor setup , white window, safe area pulse bar pulse & bar window 2t pulse & bar , sin x/x timing -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- sdi -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- other other fcc composite , fcc multiburst , matrix 1, ntsc combination, ntc7 composite, sng color bars
operating basics 2-4 avg7 analog video generator user manual table 2- 1: signal set assigned to the test signal buttons (cont.) button name signals in the signal set signal set pal-1 format color bar color bars 100% colour bars, 75% colour bars, 100% colour bars over red, 75% colour bars over red linearity linearity 5step , modulated 5 step , modulated ramp , ramp flat field flat fields black burst, 50% flat field , 100 % flat field , field square wave multi burst multi burst 60% multiburst , multipulse sweep sweep 100% sweep monitor monitor convergence pattern , grey window , white window, 2 level pedestal & pluge , 4 level pedestal & pluge , 75% red field pulse bar pulse & bar window 2t pulse & bar , sin x/x timing -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- sdi -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- other other ccir 17, ccir 18, ccir 330, ccir 331, ukits1,ukits2 pal-2 format color bar color bars 100% colour bars, 75% colour bars linearity linearity 10 step, 5 step, modulated 10 step, modulated 5 step, modulated ramp, shallow ramp, ramp, modulated pedestal flat field flat fields black burst, 50% flat field , 100 % flat field , field square wave multi burst multi burst 100% multiburst, 60% multiburst sweep sweep 100% sweep, 60% sweep monitor monitor convergence, monitor setup matrix, 100% red field, 75% red field, white window, safe area pulse bar pulse & bar 2t pulse & bar , sin x/x timing -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- sdi -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- other other its matrix 1, uk 1 line its
operating basics avg7 analog video generator user manual 2-5 table 2- 1: signal set assigned to the test signal buttons (cont.) button name signals in the signal set signal set 525 beta format color bar color bars 100% color bars, 75% color bars linearity linearity 5step , modulated ramp , ramp, oversize ramp, shallow ramp matrix, valid ramp , valid5step flat field flat fields black, 0% flat field , 100% flat field , 50% flat field, field square wave multi burst multi burst 60% multiburst sweep sweep 60% sweep monitor monitor convergence pattern , grey window , white window , 2 level ped. & pluge , 4 level ped. & pluge, 75% red field, chroma noise pulse bar pulse & bar 2t pulse & bar , tpulses timing timing 50% bowtie, 100% bowtie sdi -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- other other test matrix 525 gbr format color bar color bars 100% color bars, 75% color bars linearity linearity 5step , shallow ramp , oversize ramp, shallow ramp matrix, luminance ramp flat field flat fields 0% flat field , 100% flat field , 50% flat field, field square wave multi burst multi burst 60% multiburst sweep sweep 100% line sweep 5.5 mhz, 100% line sweep 8 mhz monitor monitor convergence pattern , grey window , 2 level ped. & pluge , white window, 4 level ped. & pluge pulse bar pulse & bar 2t pulse & bar timing timing bowtie sdi -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- other -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
operating basics 2-6 avg7 analog video generator user manual table 2- 1: signal set assigned to the test signal buttons (cont.) button name signals in the signal set signal set 525 ypbpr format color bar color bars 100% color bars, 75% color bars linearity linearity 5step , ramp , oversize ramp, shallow ramp matrix, valid ramp , valid 5 step, modulated ramp flat field flat fields black, 0% flat field , 100% flat field , 50% flat field, field square wave multi burst multi burst 60% multiburst sweep sweep 60% sweep monitor monitor convergence pattern , grey window , white window, 2 level ped. & pluge , 4 level ped. & pluge, 75% red field, chroma noise pulse bar pulse & bar 2t pulse & bar, t pulses timing timing 50% bowtie, 100% bowtie sdi -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- other other test matrix 625 ypbpr format color bar color bars 100% colour bars , 75% colour bars , 100% colour bars over red , 75% colour bars over red linearity linearity 5step , modulated ramp , ramp , oversize ramp , shallow ramp matrix , valid5step , valid ramp flat field flat fields 0% flat field , 100% flat field , 50 % flat field , field square wave multi burst multi burst 60% multiburst sweep sweep 60% sweep monitor monitor convergence pattern , grey window , white window , 2 level ped. & pluge , 4 level ped. & pluge , 100% red , 75% red pulse bar pulse & bar 2t pulse & bar , tpulses timing timing 50% bowtie , 100% bowtie sdi -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- other other test matrix
operating basics avg7 analog video generator user manual 2-7 table 2- 1: signal set assigned to the test signal buttons (cont.) button name signals in the signal set signal set 625 gbr format color bar color bars 100% colour bars , 75% colour bars linearity linearity oversize ramp , luminance ramp, shallow ramp, shallow ramp matrix, 5 step flat field flat fields 0% flat field , 50% flat field , 100% flat field , field square wave multi burst multi burst 60% multiburst sweep sweep 100% sweep monitor monitor convergence pattern , grey window , 2 level ped. & pluge , white window, 4 level ped. & pluge pulse bar pulse & bar window 2t pulse & bar timing timing bowtie sdi -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- other -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- with the avg7, you can download a frame picture file created by frame picture generator to the TG700 option fp and output the picture. refer to TG700 tv signal generator platform user manual for detailed information on how to create, download, and output a frame picture.
operating basics 2-8 avg7 analog video generator user manual avg7 module main menu you can set the logo, circle, text overlay, timing offset, and apl feature of the signal outputs using th e avg7 module main menu. use the up ( y )ordown( b ) arrow button to scroll through the main menu. figure 2--2 shows the avg7 module main menu. avg7[x]:status:ntsc smpte color bars avg7 [x] : timing selection by the module button avg7 [x] : moving picture avg7[x]:overlay to overlay submenu (page 2--11) enter cancel to moving picture submenu (page 2--10) enter cancel to timing submenu (page 2--16) enter cancel to video submenu (page 2--17) enter cancel avg7 [x] : video to apl submenu (page 2--19) enter cancel avg7 [x] : apl figure 2- 2: avg7 module main menu
operating basics avg7 analog video generator user manual 2-9 moving picture. scrolls the active picture area of the output test signal. when you select this menu item and then press the enter button, you will access the moving picture submenu. refer to moving picture submenu on page 2--10 for detailed information. overlay. selects an item (logo, text, or circle) that is overlaid on the output test signal and sets the blinking mode for the overlay. when you select this menu item and then press the enter button, you will access the overlay submenu. refer to overlay submenu on page 2--11 for detailed information. timing. sets the timing offset of the output signals relative to the internal reference signal (frame reset signal). when you select this menu item and then press the enter button, you will access the timing submenu. refer to timing submenu on page 2--16 for detailed information. video. sets the output channel configuration when a composite signal is being output and enables or disables the s ignal output from ch 1, ch 2, and ch 3. when you select this menu item and then press the enter button, you will access the video submenu. refer to video submenu on page 2--17 for detailed information. apl. sets the apl and bounce features available for the signal output. when you select this menu item and then press the enter button, you will access the apl submenu. refer to apl submenu on page 2--19 for detailed information.
operating basics 2-10 avg7 analog video generator user manual this menu allows you to scroll the active picture area of the output signal up/down or left/right (or randomly). use the up ( y ) or down ( b ) arrow button to scroll the menu. figure 2--3 shows the moving picture submenu. avg7 [x] : moving picture hstep:0sample(s) avg7 [x] : moving picture vstep:0line(s) avg7 [x] : moving picture period : 1 frame (s) select moving picture in the main menu avg7 [x] : moving picture random : disable disable enable set the number of lines to be scrolled set the period, in frames, to be scrolled set the number of samples to be scrolled figure 2- 3: moving picture submenu h hstep : sets the number of samples to be scrolled per frame set in the period menu item. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to change the value. you can set the value from --60 to +60 in 4 samples steps. h vstep : sets the number of lines to be scrolled per frame set in the period menu item. use the left ( a ) or right ( " ) arrow button to change the value. you can set the value from --15 to +15 in 1 line steps. h period : sets the time interval between occurrences of the scrolling. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to change the value. you can set the value from 1 to 16 in 1 frame steps. h random : sets whether or not the picture scrolls randomly. use the left ( a ) or right ( " ) arrow button to select between disable and enable .pressthe enter button to confirm the selection. moving picture submenu
operating basics avg7 analog video generator user manual 2-11 this menu allows you to select an item (logo, id text, or circle) to overlay on the output test signal, and to set the blinking mode for the overlay. use the up ( y )ordown( b ) arrow button to scroll through the menu. figure 2--4 shows the overlay submenu. avg7 [x] : overlay : object logo select overlay in the main menu avg7 [x] : overlay : blink off off fast slow to logo submenu ( page 2--12) to id text submenu (page 2--13) to circle submenu (page 2--15) enter cancel logo id text circle figure 2- 4: overlay submenu h object : selects an item that is overlaid on the output test signal. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to select logo , id text ,or circle . when you select any of these items and then press the enter button, you will access the submenu for se tting that overlay. refer to logo submenu on page 2--12, id text submenu on page 2--13, or circle submenu on page 2--15 for detailed information. h blink : sets the blinking mode for the overlay. use the left ( a )orright ( " ) arrow button to select off , fast (blinks approximately at 0.5 second interval), or slow (blinks approximately at 1.0 interval). press the enter button to confirm the selection. overlay submenu
operating basics 2-12 avg7 analog video generator user manual this menu allows you to select a logo to overlay on the output test signal, and to set the display position of the logo. use the up ( y )ordown( b ) arrow button to scroll through the menu. figure 2--5 shows the logo submenu. avg7 [x] : overlay : logo x position : 0.0 % aph select off or a logo avg7 [x] : overlay : logo y position : 0.0 % aph avg7 [x] : overlay : logo logo : off select logo in the overlay submenu set the horizontal position set the vertical position avg7 [x] : overlay : logo : save press enter to save parameters enter save the display position for the logo figure 2- 5: logo submenu h x position : sets the horizontal position of the logo. the position is set as a percentage of active picture width. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to change the position. you can set the value from --100.0% to 0.0% in 0.1% steps. h y position : sets the vertical position of the logo. the position is set as a percentage of active picture height. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to change the position. you can set the value from --100.0% to 0.0% in 0.1% steps. h logo : selects the logo you want to display. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to select off or a logo file name. press the enter button confirm the selection. when you select off, the logo overlay is disabled. h save : saves the display position for the logo to the logo file. press the enter button to save the current settings. logo submenu
operating basics avg7 analog video generator user manual 2-13 in order to display a logo using the logo submenu, you need to create the logo file (.lgo) and download it to the logo folder of the module. refer to the TG700 tv signal generator platform user manual for detailed information about how to create a logo file and download it to the TG700. this menu allows you to edit text that is overlaid on the output test signal, and to set the display position of the text. use the up ( y )ordown( b ) arrow button to scroll through the menu. figure 2--6 shows the id text submenu. avg7 [x] : overlay : text status : enable edit text avg7 [x] : overlay : text x position : 10.0 % aph avg7 [x] : overlay : text : edit _ set the horizontal position set the vertical position avg7 [x] : overlay : text y position : 80.0 % aph disable enable avg7 [x] : overlay : text : save enter save the text to the signal file select id te x tinthe overlay submenu enter figure 2- 6: id text submenu id text submenu
operating basics 2-14 avg7 analog video generator user manual h status : enables or disables the text overlay. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to select between enable and disable. press the enter button to confirm the selection. h x position : sets the horizontal position of the text. the position is set as a percentage of active picture width. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to change the position. you can set the value from 0.0% to 100.0% in1% steps. h y position : sets the vertical position of the text. the position is set as a percentage of active picture height. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to change the position. you can set the value from 0.0% to 100.0% in 1% steps. h edit : edits the text you want to display on the output test signal. to edit the text, first press the enter button to enable the text edit mode. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to move the underscore character ( _ ) to the character you want to change, and then use the up ( y ) or down ( b ) arrow button to select the desired character. when you enter all of the desired characters then press the enter button to end the text editing process. you can use up to 30 characters for the text. use the blank character to erase an unneeded character(s). h save : saves the text and its position to the signal file currently being output. press the enter button to save the text and its position to the signal file.
operating basics avg7 analog video generator user manual 2-15 this menu allows you to create a circle overlaid on the output test signal and set its position on the display. use the up ( y )ordown( b ) arrow button to scroll through the menu. figure 2--7 shows the circle submenu. avg7 [x] : overlay : circle status : enable set the diameter of the circle avg7 [x] : overlay : circle x position : 0.0 % aph avg7 [x] : overlay : circle diameter : 10.0 % aph set the horizontal position set the vertical position avg7 [x] : overlay : circle y position : 0.0 % aph disable enable select circle in the overlay submenu figure 2- 7: circle submenu h status : enables or disables the circle overlay. use the left ( a ) or right ( " ) arrow button to select between enable and disable. press the enter button to confirm the selection. h x position : sets the horizontal position of the circle. the position is set as a percentage of active picture width. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to change the position. you can set the value from --50.0% to 50.0% in 1% steps. h y position : sets the vertical position of the circle. the position is set as a percentage of active picture height. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to change the position. you can set the value from --50.0% to 50.0% in 1% steps. h diameter : sets the diameter of the circle. the diameter is set as a percentage of active picture height. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to change the value. you can set the value from 0.0% to 100.0% in 1% steps. circle submenu
operating basics 2-16 avg7 analog video generator user manual this menu allows you to adjust the timing offset of the output signals relative to the internal reference signal (frame reset signal). use the up ( y )ordown( b ) arrow button to change the menu items. figure 2--8 shows the timing submenu. avg7 [x] : timing : ntsc horizontal coarse : 0.000 m sec avg7[x]: timing:ntsc horizontal fine : 0.00 nsec set the horizontal timing in 1 clock steps select timing in the main menu set the horizontal timing in 0.1 ns steps avg7[x]: timing:ntsc vertical : 0 line (s) set the vertical timing in 1 line steps figure 2- 8: timing submenu h vertical : sets the vertical timing offset. use the left ( a ) or right ( " ) arrow button to change the timing offset. you can set the value from --1 to +1 frame of the selected signal format in 1-line steps. h horizontal coarse :usetheleft( a )orright( " ) arrow button to adjust the coarse horizontal offset. you can set the value from --1 to +1 line of the selected signal format in 1-clock (18.5 ns) steps. h horizontal fine :usetheleft( a ) or right ( " ) arrow button to adjust the fine horizontal offset. you can set the value from --10 ns to +10 ns in 0.1 ns steps. note . you can reset the timing offset to zero by pressing the left ( a ) and right ( " ) arrow buttons simultaneously. timing submenu
operating basics avg7 analog video generator user manual 2-17 this menu allows you to set the output channel configuration when a composite signal is being output and to enable or disable the signal output of each channel. you can also set whether or not a sync signal is multiplexed with the b and r signal when a gbr signal is being output. use the up ( y )ordown( b ) arrow button to scroll through the menu. figure 2--9 shows the video submenu. select video in the main menu avg7 [x] : video : configuration ch1/2/3 composites avg7 [x] : video : gbr sync sync on all channels sync on green sync on all channels avg7[x]:video:g on on off ch1:y ch2:c ch3:composite ch1/2/3 composites avg7[x]:video:b on on off avg7[x]:video:r on on off avg7 [x] : video : sch phase 0 deg --180 deg to +180 deg figure 2- 9: video submenu h configuration : sets the configuration of the output channels. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to select between ch1:y ch2:c ch3:composite and ch1/2/3 composites . when you select ch1:y ch2:c ch3:composite, a y signal, c signal, and composite signal are output from the ch 1, ch 2, and ch 3 connectors respectively. when you select ch1/2/3:composites, a composite signal is output from each output connector. press the enter button to confirm the selection. this menu item appears only when a composite signal is being output. video submenu
operating basics 2-18 avg7 analog video generator user manual h gbr sync : sets whether or not a sync signal is multiplexed with the b signal and r signal when a gbr signal is being output. use the left ( a )or right ( " ) arrow button to select between sync on green and sync on all channels . when you select sync on all channels, a sync signal is multiplexed with the g, b, and r signals. press the enter button to confirm the selection. this menu item appears only when a gbr signal is being output. h g/y : turns the ch 1 signal output on or off for a component signal, or turns the y signal on or off for a composite signal.. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to select between on and off .pressthe enter button to confirm the selection. the signal name displayed depends on the video format of the currently selected si gnal (ypbpr component, gbr component, or composite) and the output channel configuration. h b/pb/b--y : turns the ch 2 signal output on or off for a component signal, or turns the b--y signal on or off for a composite signal. use the left ( a )or right ( " ) arrow button to select between on and off .pressthe enter button to confirm the selection. the signal name displayed depends on the video format of the currently selected signal (ypbpr component, gbr component, or composite) and the output channel configuration. h r/pr/r--y : turns the ch 3 signal output on or off for a component signal, or turns the r--y signal on or off for a composite signal. use the left ( a )or right ( " ) arrow button to select between on and off .pressthe enter button to confirm the selection. the signal name displayed depends on the video format of the currently selected signal (ypbpr component, gbr component, or composite) and the output channel configuration. h sch phase :usetheleft( a )orright( " ) arrow button to adjust the sch phase for a composite signal. you can set the value from --180 degrees ( )to +180 degrees ( )in1degree( ) steps. this setting is not saved a preset. note . if you try to set the sch phase over +180 degrees, the value jumps to --179 degrees. also, if you try to set the sch phase under --180 degrees, the value jumps to +179 degrees.
operating basics avg7 analog video generator user manual 2-19 this menu allows you to set the apl and bounce features for the test signal outputs. use the up ( y )ordown( b ) arrow button to scroll through the menu. figure 2--10 shows the apl submenu. avg7 [x] : apl : mode apl off avg7 [x] : apl : period 1.0 sec apl off high apl low apl apl (bounce) bounce select apl in the main menu set the bounce period figure 2- 10: apl submenu h mode : sets the output mode of the apl signal. use the left ( a )orright ( " ) arrow button to select the mode. the choices are: h apl off : outputs the selected signal without making any changes. h high apl : divides the video lines of the selected signal into 5 lines (for ntsc) or 4 lines (for pal) and changes the lines except the last line to the 100% flat field signal, and then outputs them. h low apl : divides the video lines of the selected signal into 5 lines (for ntsc) or 4 lines (for pal) and changes the lines except the last line to the 0% flat field signal, and then outputs them. h apl (bounce) : outputs the high apl si gnal and low apl signal alternately for the period set in the period menu item. h bounce : outputs the 100% flat field signal and 0% flat field signal alternately (regardless of the selected signal) for the period set in the period menu item. press the enter button to confirm the selection. h period : sets the time interval between two signals when they are output in apl (bounce) or bounce mode. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to change the interval. you can set the value from 0.5 seconds to 2.0 seconds in 0.5 second steps. apl submenu
operating basics 2-20 avg7 analog video generator user manual rear-panel connectors the avg7 generator module is equipped with six connectors: one pair of ch 1 , ch 2 ,and ch 3 , which will output analog component or composite test signals. figure 2--11 shows the avg7 generator module rear-panel connectors. note . each pair of connectors (ch 1, ch 2, and ch 3) will both output the same test signal. figure 2- 11: avg7 module rear-panel connectors h ch 1 : analog component or composite test signal output. h ch 2 : analog component or composite test signal output. h ch 3 : analog component or composite test signal output.
operating basics avg7 analog video generator user manual 2-21 factory default settings table 2--2 shows the factory default settings for the avg7 generator module. these settings are recalled when you select factory default from the preset : recall menu item in the mainframe main menu. table 2- 2: factory default settings menu item name settings status ntsc smpte color bars moving picture h step 0 sample(s) vstep 0 line(s) period 1 frame(s) random disable overlay : object logo overlay : blink off overlay : logo logo off overlay : id text status disable overlay : circle status disable x position 0.0% aph y position 0.0% aph diameter 90% aph timing vertical 0 line(s) horizontal coarse 0.0000 m s horizontal fine 0.00 ns
operating basics 2-22 avg7 analog video generator user manual table 2- 2: factory default settings (cont.) menu item name settings video configuration ch1/2/3 composites gbr sync sync on all channels g/y on b/pb/b--y on r/pr/r--y on sch phase 0 deg apl mode apl off period 1.0 s
reference

avg7 analog video generator user manual 3-1 syntax this section contains information on the standard commands for programmable instruments (scpi) and the programming structure you can use to program your avg7 generator module. programming model specific conditions must exist before programming commands will affect the test signal generated by a module. select the module using the :instrument:select command before executing any commands. many of the commands used by the avg7 module are shared by several modules and w ill be accepted w ithout a reported error. many commands will accept either string or numeric arguments. for example: a boolean argument can either be ?1? or ?on?. signal parameter commands that hav e a :step node can accept either a numeric value or they can accept a string argument that refers to the :step increment. signal parameter commands with a :s tep node will accept the fo llowing strings in addition to a numeric value: up. use this argument to increase the parameter value one increment as defined by the :step value. down. use this argument to decrease the parameter value one increment as defined by the :step value. minimum. use this argument to set the parameter value to the minimum acceptable value. maximum. use this argument to set the parameter value to the maximum acceptable value. default. use this argument to set the parameter value to the default value. selecting the module command arguments
syntax 3-2 avg7 analog video generator user manual if you send a query with no argument, the response is the current value. you can also use minimum, maximum, and default as arguments for queries whose command form can use these arguments (refer to the command syntax for the specific command). instead of returning the current value, queries using these arguments return the following information: minimum. return the minimum acceptable value. maximum. return the maximum acceptable value. default. return the default value. the following example demonstrates the effect of each of the arguments when used with a step value. 1. :instrument:select "avg7:#" selects the avg7 generator module located in the slot number indicated by the ?#? symbol. 2. :output:circle:state on displays a circle on the video display. note . :output:circle:diameter uses an argument that is the percent of picture height. 3. :output:circle:diameter default sets the circle diameter to 90 percent of the screen height. 4. :output:circle:diameter:step 10 sets the step increment to 10 percent. 5. :output:circle:diameter down changes the circle diameter to 80 percent of the screen height. 6. :output:circle:diameter 50 changes the circle diameter to 50 percent of the screen height. 7. :output:circle:diameter maximum changes the circle diameter to 100 percent of the screen height. 8. :output:circle:diameter minimum changes the circle diameter to 0 percent of the screen height. 9. :output:circle:diameter up changes the circle diameter to 10 percent of the screen height. 10. :output:circle:diameter? maximum queries the maximum circle diameter (not the current diameter). the query returns the value of 100 percent, which is the maximum circle diameter allowable. query arguments argument example
syntax avg7 analog video generator user manual 3-3 scpi commands and queries scpi is a standard created by a consortium that provides guidelines for remote programming of instruments. these guidelines provide a consistent program- ming environment for instrument control and data transfer. this environment uses defined programming messages, instrument responses, and data format across all scpi instruments, regardless of manufacturer. the avg7 generator module uses a command language based on the scpi standard. the scpi language is based on a hierarchical or tree structure (see figure 3--1) that represents a subsystem. the top level of the tree is the root node; it is followed by one or more lower-level nodes. diameter output circle position state root node lower-level nodes figure 3- 1: example of scpi subsystem hierarchy you can create commands and queries from these subsystem hierarchy trees. commands specify actions for the instrument to perform. queries return measurement data and information about parameter settings. for more information on scpi commands and programming structure, refer to the TG700 signal generator platform user manual .
syntax 3-4 avg7 analog video generator user manual
avg7 analog video generator user manual 3-5 remote commands this section describes the remote commands used to control the avg7 generator module remotely. the commands to the m odule are divided into the following three groups: h mass memory commands (refer to the TG700 tv signal generator platform user manual ) h output commands h sense commands mass memory commands two mass memory commands are listed here for your reference. you can use these to load and query the output test signal. detailed information for using these commands are located in the TG700 tv signal generator platform user manual . :mmemory:load:signal , :mmemory:load:signal , loads a signal into the specified module. :mmemory:signal:active? | returns the current output signal of the specified module.
remote commands 3-6 avg7 analog video generator user manual output commands use these commands to control the output parameters of the module. these include output status and circle/text/logo overlay. :output :state on|off :circle :state on|off :diameter :position :horizontal :vertical :logo :state on|off :position :horizontal :vertical :select :save :text :state on|off :data :position :horizontal :vertical :save :overlay :blink :state on|off :period :apl :mode apl_off|apl_high|apl_low|apl_bounce :period :move :horizontal :vertical :period :random[:state] on|off :video :config yc|composite :sch :sync :state on|off command tree
remote commands avg7 analog video generator user manual 3-7 :output:state on|off turns the signal output of the specified channel on or off. the in the command represents the output channel and you can specify 1, 2, or 3. you can use 1 or 0 instead of on or off. :output:state? returns the current output state of the specified channel. the in the command represents the output channel and you can specify 1, 2, or 3. :output1:circle:state on|off turns the circle overlay on the video signal on or off. you can use 1 or 0 instead of on or off. :output1:circle:state? returns the current circle overlay state. :output1:circle:diameter sets the diameter of the displayed circle. the unit is the percent of active picture height. you can set the diameter from 0% to 100% in 1% steps. you can also use min, max, or def instead of a numeric value. :output1:circle:diameter? returns the diameter of the displayed circle. :output1:circle:position:horizontal sets the horizontal position of the circle as it appears on the active signal. the unit is the percent of active picture width. you can set the position from --50% to +50% in 1% steps. you can also use min, max, or def instead of a numeric value. :output1:circle:position:horizontal? returns the current horizontal position of the circle as it appears on the active signal. :output1:circle:position:vertical sets the vertical position of the circle as it appears on the active signal. the unit is the percent of active picture height. you can set the position from --50% to +50% in 1% steps. you can also use min, max, or def instead of a numeric value. command description
remote commands 3-8 avg7 analog video generator user manual :output1:circle:position:vertical? returns the current vertical position of the circle as it appears on the active signal. :output1:logo:state on|off turns the logo overlay on the video signal on or off. you can use 1 or 0 instead of on or off. :output1:logo:state? returns the current logo overlay state. :output1:logo:position:horizontal sets the horizontal position of the logo as it appears on the active signal. the unit is the percent of active picture width. you can set the position from --100% to 0% in 0.1% steps. you can also use min, max, or def instead of a numeric value. :output1:logo:position:horizontal? returns the current horizontal position of the logo. :output1:logo:position:vertical sets the vertical position of the logo as it appears on the active signal. the unit is the percent of active picture height. you can set the position from --100% to 0% in 0.1% steps. you can also use min, max, or def instead of a numeric value. :output1:logo:position:vertical? returns the current vertical position of the logo. :output1:logo:select selects the logo used for the logo overlay. :output1:logo:select? returns the current logo used for the logo overlay. :output1:logo:save saves the current display position of the logo to the logo file. there are no arguments. :output1:text:state on|off turns the text overlay on the video signal on or off. you can use 1 or 0 instead of on or off.
remote commands avg7 analog video generator user manual 3-9 :output1:text:state? returns the current text overlay state. :output1:text:data sets the current string for the text mode. :output1:text:data? returns the current string for the text mode. :output1:text:position:horizontal sets the text horizontal position in the video signal. the unit is the percent of active picture width. you can set the position from 0% to 100% in 1% steps. you can also use min, max, or def instead of the numeric value. :output1:text:position:horizontal? returns the current text horizontal position in the video signal. :output1:text:position:vertical sets the text vertical position in the video signal. the unit is the percent of active picture height. you can set the position from 0.0% to 100.0% in 1% steps. you can also use min, max, or def instead of the numeric value. :output1:text:position:vertical? returns the current text vertical position in the video signal. :output1:text:save saves the current text and its display position to the signal file. there are no arguments. :output1:overlay:blink:state on|off turns on or off the blinking mode for the logo, text, and circle overlay. you can also use 1 or 0 instead of on or off :output1:overlay:blink:state? returns the current state of the b linking mode for the logo, text, and circle overlay. :output1:overlay:blink:period sets the blinking interval of the blinking mode for the logo, text, and circle overlay. you can set the value as 0.5 seconds or 1.0 seconds.
remote commands 3-10 avg7 analog video generator user manual :output1:overlay:blink:period? returns the blinking interval of th e blinking mode for the logo, text, and circle overlay. :output1:apl:mode apl_off|apl_high|apl_low|apl_bounce|bounce sets the output mode of the apl signal. refer to apl submenu on page 2--19 for detailed inf ormation about th e each mode. :output1:apl:mode? returns the current output mode of the apl signal. :output1:apl:period sets the time interval between two signals when they are output in the bounce modes. you can set the value from 0.5 seconds to 2.0 seconds in 0.5 seconds steps. :output1:apl:period? returns the time interval between two signals when they are output in the bounce modes. :output1:move:horizontal sets the amount of horizontal scrolling in the moving picture mode. you can set the value from --252 to +252 in 4 samples steps. :output1:move:horizontal? returns the amount of horizontal scrolling in the moving picture mode. :output1:move:vertical sets the amount of vertical scrolling in the moving picture mode. you can set the value from --252 to +252 in 1 line steps. :output1:move:vertical? returns the amount of vertical scrolling in the moving picture mode. :output1:move:period sets the time interval between occurrences of the scrolling. you can set the value from 1 to 16 in 1 field steps. :output1:move:period? returns the time interval between occurrences of the scrolling.
remote commands avg7 analog video generator user manual 3-11 :output1:move:random:state on|off turns the random scrolling mode on or off. you can also use 1 or 0 instead of on or off. :output1:move:random:state? returns the current state of the random scrolling mode. :output1:video:config yc|composite sets the output channel configuration when a composite signal is being output. for yc, a y signal, c signal, and composite signal will be assigned to ch1, ch2, and ch3 respectively. for com- posite, a composite signal will be assigned to all the three channels. :output1:video:config? returns the current setting of the output channel configuration when a composite signal is being output. :output1:video:sch sets the sch phase for a composite signal. you can set the value from --180 degrees to +180 degrees in 1 degree steps. :output1:video:sch? returns the current schphase setting. :output1:video:sync:state on|off sets whether or not a sync signal is multiplexed with the b and r signals when a gbr signal is being output. you can also use 1 or 0 instead of on or off. :output1:video:sync:state? returns whether or not a sync signal is multiplexed with the b and r signals when a gbr signal is being output.
remote commands 3-12 avg7 analog video generator user manual sense commands use these commands to set the timing offset of the output signals relative to the internal reference signal (frame reset signal). refer to operating basics for detailed information about the setting range. :sense :correction :mdelay :horizontal :step :vertical :step :sense1:correction:mdelay:horizontal sets the horizontal timing offset of the output signals. the timing resolution is clock-cycles. the units are microseconds. you can use up, down, or def instead of the numeric value. if the argument exceeds the horizontal time value, then the vertical offset is adjusted to accommodate the requested delay. :sense1:correction:mdelay:horizontal? returns the current horizontal timing offset of the output signals. :sense1:correction:mdelay:horizontal:step sets the step increment used by the up or down commands. the units are microseconds. you can use min, max, or def instead of a numeric value. :sense1:correction:mdelay:horizontal:step? returns the current step increment. :sense1:correction:mdelay:vertical sets the vertical timing offset of the output signals. the argument can be a floating point value that is translated into integer lines with a horizontal offset. you can use up, down, or def instead of a numeric value. command tree command description
remote commands avg7 analog video generator user manual 3-13 :sense1:correction:mdelay:vertical? returns the current vertical timing offset of the output signals. :sense1:correction:mdelay:vertical:step sets the step increment used by the up or down commands. you can use min, max, or def instead of a numeric value. :sense1:correction:mdelay:vertical:step? returns the current step increment.
remote commands 3-14 avg7 analog video generator user manual
appendices

avg7 analog video generator user manual a- 1 appendix a: specifications tables a--1 through a--3 list the electrical and environmental characteristics of the avg7 generator module. electrical characteristics table a- 1: output channels characteristic performance requirements reference information channel 1 (ch 1) number of outputs 2 output signals y, g, or composite each component of a composite signal can be turned on or off using the video submenu. channel 2 (ch 2) number of outputs 2 output signals b--y, pb, b, c, or composite each component of a composite signal can be turned on or off using the video submenu. channel 3 (ch 3) number of outputs 2 output signals r--y, pr, r, or composite each component of a composite signal can be turned on or off using the video submenu. table a- 2: common output characteristics characteristic performance requirements reference information amplitude error absolute amplitude 1% measured at 700 mv. channel gain matching 0.5% measured at 700 mv, relative to ch 1. chrominance to luminance gain 1% measured at 700 mv, relative to 500 khz.
appendix a: specifications a- 2 avg7 analog video generator user manual table a- 2: common output characteristics (cont.) characteristic reference information performance requirements delay error chrominance to luminance delay, typical 2.5 ns on a composite output. channel to channel delay 1ns relative to ch 1 group delay, typical 5nsto5mhz sch phase error, typical 1.25 ns ( ? 1.6 _ at 3.58 mhz and ? 2 _ at 4.43 mhz) frequency response flat within 0.5% peak from 0.5 mhz to 5mhz. typically 5%to8mhzat700mv, measuredwitha1mcoaxcableand peak detector. line time distortion 0.5% measured with fcc composite signal. field time distortion 0.5% measured with field square wave. k factor 2t5 pulse 0.5% pulse/bar ratio, typical 1:1 within 0.5 % with 2t5 pulse and bar signal. dc offset 10 mv differential gain 0.5% differential phase 0.5 _ return loss 40 db to 6 mhz
appendix a: specifications avg7 analog video generator user manual a- 3 environmental characteristics table a- 3: environmental characteristics characteristic description temperature operating 0 _ cto+50 _ c non-operating -- 2 0 _ cto+60 _ c relative humidity operating 20% to 80% (no condensation); maximum wet-bulb temperature 29.4 _ c non-operating 5% to 90% (no condensation); maximum wet-bulb temperature 40.0 _ c altitude operating to 4.5 km (15 000 feet) maximum operating temperature decreases 1 _ c each 300 m above 1.5 km. non-operating to 15 km (50 000 feet) vibration operating 2.65 m/s 2 (0.27 g rms) , 5 hz to 500 hz, 10 min, three axes non-operating 22.36 m/s 2 (2.28 g rms) , 5 hz to 500 hz, 10 min, three axes shock non-operating 588 m/s 2 (60 g), half-sine, 11 ms duration
appendix a: specifications a- 4 avg7 analog video generator user manual
index

avg7 analog video generator user manual index- 1 index a accessories optional, 1--2 standard, 1--2 adjusting the sch phase, 2--18 apl, 2--19 apl submenu, 2--19 avg7 features, 1--1 avg7 module main menu, 2--8 apl, 2--9 moving picture, 2--9 overlay, 2--9 timing, 2--9 video, 2--9 b bounce, 2--19 c ch 1 connector, 2--20 ch 2 connector, 2--20 ch 3 connector, 2--20 circle overlay, 2--15 circle submenu, 2--15 commands rules for forming, 3--1 syntax, 3--1 e electrical specifications, a--1 environmental specifications, a--3 f factory default settings, 2--21 functional check, 1--2 h hierarchy (scpi), 3--3 i id text submenu, 2--13 installation, 1--2 l logo overlay, 2--12 logo submenu, 2--12 m manuals, related, iii mass memory commands, 3--5 moving picture submenu, 2--10 o operating procedure, 2--1 option, 1--2 optional accessories, 1--2 output commands, 3--6 overlay submenu, 2--11 p product description, 1--1 r rear-panel connectors, 2--20 related manuals, iii remote commands, 3--5 rules, command forming, 3--1 s scpi, subsystem hierarchy tree, 3--3 scpi commands and queries syntax, 3--3?3--4 signal set assigned to the test signal buttons, 2--3 specifications electrical, a--1 environmental, a--3
index index- 2 avg7 analog video generator user manual standard accessories, 1--2 syntax, command, 3--1 t text overlay, 2--13 timing submenu, 2--16 v video submenu, 2--17

user manual aw v g 7 analog wideband video generator www.tektronix.com
copyright ? tektronix. all rights reserved. licensed software products are owned by tektronix or its suppliers and are protected by united states copyright laws and international treaty provisions. tektronix products are covered by u.s. and foreign patents, issued and pending. information in this publication supercedes that in all previously published material. specifications and price change privileges reserved. tektronix and tek are registered trademarks of tektronix, inc. contacting tektronix tektronix, inc. 14200 sw karl braun drive p.o. box 500 beaverton, or 97077 usa for product information, sales, service, and technical support: h in north america, call 1-800-833-9200. h worldwide, visit www.tektronix.com to find contacts in your area.
awvg7 analog wideband video generator user manual i table of contents preface iii ................................................... about this manual iii ............................................... related manuals iii ................................................. getting started product description 1--1 .............................................. accessories 1--2 ..................................................... option 1--2 ......................................................... installation 1--3 ..................................................... functional check 1--3 ................................................ operating basics operating procedure 2--1 .............................................. selecting an output signal 2--2 ......................................... awvg7 module main menu 2--4 ....................................... rear-panel connectors 2--15 ............................................ factory default settings 2--16 ........................................... reference syntax 3--1 ................................................... programming model 3--1 .............................................. scpi commands and queries 3--3 ...................................... remote commands 3--5 ........................................ mass memory commands 3--5 ...................................... output commands 3--6 ............................................. sense commands 3--11 ............................................... appendices appendix a: specifications a--1 .................................. electrical characteristics a--1 .......................................... environmental characteristics a--2 ...................................... index
table of contents ii awvg7 analog wideband video generator user manual list of figures figure 2--1: front-panel test signal buttons 2--3 .................... figure 2--2: awvg7 module main menu 2--4 ...................... figure 2--3: moving picture submenu 2--6 .................... figure 2--4: overlay submenu 2--7 ............................ figure 2--5: logo submenu 2--8 ................................ figure 2--6: id text submenu 2--9 .............................. figure 2--7: circle submenu 2--11 .............................. figure 2--8: timing submenu 2--12 ............................... figure 2--9: video submenu 2--14 ................................ figure 2--10: awvg7 generator module rear-panel connectors 2--15 ... figure 3--1: example of scpi subsystem hierarchy 3--3 .............. list of tables table 1--1: standard and optional accessories 1--2 .................. table 2--1: signal set assigned to the test signal buttons 2--3 .......... table 2--2: timing adjustment ranges for output signals 2--13 ......... table 2--3: factory default settings 2--16 .......................... table a--1: output channels a--1 ................................ table a--2: common output characteristics a--1 ................... table a--3: environmental characteristics a--2 .....................
awvg7 analog wideband video generator user manual iii preface this manual documents the capabilities, operation, and specifications of the awvg7 analog wideband video generator module. about this manual this manual is composed of the following sections: h getting started contains product description and functional check proce- dures. h operating basics explains how to operate the awvg7 module using the menus and front-panel buttons. h reference provides the syntax used in command descriptions and describes all programming commands. h appendices provides the specifications. related manuals the following documents are also available. h the TG700 tv signal generator platform service manual (tektronix part number 070-a800-xx) describes how to maintain and service the mainframe and generator modules. this ma nual is an optional accessory. h the TG700 tv signal generator platform module installation instructions (tektronix part number 070-a824-xx) describes how to install and remove the modules, and how to upgrade the firmware of the mainframe.
preface iv awvg7 analog wideband video generator user manual
getting started

awvg7 analog wideband video generator user manual 1-1 getting started this section contains the following information: h product description h accessories h option h installation h functional check product description the awvg7 analog wideband video generator module is designed to be installed in the TG700 tv signal generator platform. the TG700 platform must be running version 3.1 or later firmware. the module is a 30 mhz bandwidth video signal generator which provides wideband analog component video s ignals for hdtv system. the module contains the following features: h supports the following system formats: 1080/60i, 1080/59.94i, 1080/50i, 1080/24sf, 1080/23.98sf, 1080/30p, 1080/29.97p, 1080/25p, 1080/24p, 1080/ 23.98p, 720/60p, 720/59.94p, 720/50p, 720/24p, and 720/23.98p h six analog component video outputs h outputs a frame picture created by the frame picture generator application (TG700 option fp required) h overlay of circle, text, or logo on the video signal h generates a moving picture by scrolling the active picture area of the output test signal h full remote control using ethernet interface
getting started 1-2 awvg7 analog wideband video generator user manual the signals of the following system formats are pre-installed in the mainframe: 1080/60i, 1080/59.94i, 1080/24sf, 1080/23.98sf, 720/60p, 720/59.94p the signals other than above are included in the supplied cd-rom, and you can output the signals by downloading them to the mainframe. refer to the TG700 tv signal generator platform user manual for detailed information on how to download a signal file. accessories table 1--1 lists the standard and optional accessories provided with the awvg7 generator module. table 1- 1: standard and optional accessories accessory std. opt. tektronix part number TG700 tv signal generator platform module installation instructions d 070-a824-xx TG700 signal generator platform software library cd-rom d 062-a249-xx TG700 tv signal generator platform service manual d 070-a800-xx option this subsection describes the option available for the awvg7 generator module. the following option is available: option d1 (test data report) a calibration test data report will be provided with the awvg7 generator module when this option is specified. option d1 (test data report)
getting started awvg7 analog wideband video generator user manual 1-3 installation refer to the TG700 tv signal generator platform module installation instructions for instructions on how to install the awvg7 generator module. note . if the firmware version of your TG700 mainframe is 2.1 or earlier, you need to upgrade the firmware of the mainframe before using the avg7 module. refer to the TG700 tv signal generator platform module installation instruc- tions for the procedures. functional check the following procedure determines whether the module is operating correctly. the following equipment is required for the functional check: h hdtv waveform monitor h three 75 ? bnc cables h three 75 ? terminators 1. install the module into the TG700 platform mainframe using the installation procedures described in the TG700 tv signal generator platform user manual . 2. power on the TG700 tv signal generator platform by connecting it to the power source. the initialization of all the installed modules is executed. 3. check that no error messages appear on the lcd display. 4. warm up the instrument for 20 minutes. 5. press the front-panel module button until the awvg7 main menu shown below appears. awvg7 [x] : status : 1080 59i ypbpr 100% color bars 6. press the format button and use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to select a format, then press the enter button. required equipment procedure
getting started 1-4 awvg7 analog wideband video generator user manual 7. press one of the front-panel test signal buttons (for example color bar ) to output a signal. 8. use the 75 ? bnc cables to connect the upper (or lower) ch 1 , ch 2 ,and ch 3 connectors to the ch a , ch b ,and ch c inputs of the waveform monitor respectively. 9. use the 75 ? terminators to terminate the other loop through connectors on the waveform monitor real panel. 10. press the ch a button on the waveform monitor, and set the waveform monitor to view the signal. 11. check that the signal appears as expected. for example, if you selected a color bar signal in step 7, check that the color bar signal appears. 12. press the ch b button on the waveform monitor. 13. check that the signal appears as expected. for example, if you selected a color bar signal in step 7, check that the color bar signal appears. 14. press the ch c button on the waveform monitor. 15. check that the signal appears as expected. for example, if you selected a color bar signal in step 7, check that the color bar signal appears. 16. press the ch a button on the waveform monitor. 17. press the test signal button again to output another test signal in the same signal set. 18. check that the signal on the waveform monitor changes. you do not need to perform this check for the ch 2 and ch 3 connectors. 19. disconnect the bnc cable from the upper (or lower) ch 1 , ch 2 ,and ch 3 connectors, and then connect the bnc cables to the lower (or upper) ch 1 , ch 2 ,and ch 3 connectors. 20. repeat steps 10 through 18 for the lower (or upper) output channels.
operating basics

awvg7 analog wideband video generator user manual 2-1 operating basics this section explains the operation of the awvg7 generator module using the front-panel buttons and menus. it also contains descriptions of the rear-panel connectors. refer to the TG700 tv signal generator platform user manual for a detailed explanation of the front-panel buttons and the lcd display. operating procedure after the module is installed in the mainframe, and the mainframe is installed in the rack or other location where it will be used, access each function of the module with the following procedure: 1. connect the power connector on the rear panel to the ac electric power source using the power cord. electric power is supplied to the mainframe. 2. wait until the power up initialization process is complete, and check that no error messages appear on the display. 3. following the initialization process t he mainframe main menu appears, as shown below. TG700 : preset 4. press the front-panel module button until the awvg7 module main menu appears, as shown below. awvg7 [x] : status : 1080 59i ypbpr 100% color bars 5. select the signal format and the signal you want to output. refer to selecting an output signal on page 2--2 for more information. 6. press the front-panel arrow buttons to select the desired main menu item or submenu item. refer to awvg7 module main menu beginning on page 2--4 for detailed information about the main menu items and the submenu items.
operating basics 2-2 awvg7 analog wideband video generator user manual selecting an output signal when you output a signal from the awvg7 generator module, you need to select a signal format and output signal. this subsection provides instructions on how to output a signal. if you press the front-panel format button when the awvg7 generator module is selected (active), you can select the format for the output signals. perform the following steps to select the format: 1. confirm that any menu item of the awvg7 module main menu is displayed. if the menu is not displayed, press the front-panel module button until the awvg7 module main menu appears, as shown below. awvg7 [x] : status : 1080 59i ypbpr 100% color bars 2. press the format button. the menu display changes as follows: awvg7 [x] : select format 1080 59i (current) 3. press the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to select one of the signal formats, and then press the enter button to confirm the selection. note . when you change the signal format, synchronization shock occurs. when you change the format while a signal is being output, the instrument starts loading all of the signal set for the format and displays the message ? now loading... ?. when you see the message, ? done (press cancel) ?, press the cancel button. all signal sets available in the module a re already assigned to the corresponding test signal buttons (see figure 2--1 on page 2--3). when you press any of the buttons, one of the signals in the signal set is output. for example, when you press the color bar test signal button, you can output the 100% color bars signal in the color bars signal set. press the left ( a ) or right ( " ) arrow button, or press the test signal button repeatedly to select different signals assigned to the test signal button. selecting a format selecting a signal
operating basics awvg7 analog wideband video generator user manual 2-3 test signal buttons figure 2- 1: front-panel test signal buttons table 2--1 lists the signal set assigned to each test signal button and the signals that can be selected in the signal set. the signals in the signal set can be added or changed with improvement of the module. table 2- 1: signal set assigned to the test signal buttons button name signal set signals in the signal set color bar color bars 100% color bars, 75% color bars linearity linearity 10 step , 5step , ramp , shallow ramp , valid ramp * flat field flat fields 0% flat field , 100% flat field , 50% flat field multi burst multi burst multiburst 1-10 mhz, multiburst 10--20 mhz, multiburst 20-30 mhz sweep sweep 100% sweep 1-15 mhz , 100% sweep 1-30 mhz monitor monitor 75% blue field , convergence , 75% green field, 75% red field pulse bar pulse & bar 2t30 pulse & bar timing timing bowtie1nsmarker sdi -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- other -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- * ypbpr format only with the awvg7, you can download a frame picture file created by frame picture generator to the TG700 option fp and output the picture. refer to TG700 tv signal generator platform user manual for detailed information on how to create, download, and output a frame picture.
operating basics 2-4 awvg7 analog wideband video generator user manual awvg7 module main menu you can set the logo, circle, text overlay, and timing offset of the signal outputs by using the awvg7 module main menu. use the up ( y )ordown( b ) arrow button to scroll through the main menu. figure 2--2 shows the awvg7 module main menu. awvg7 [x] : status : 1080 59i ypbpr 100% color bars awvg7 [x] : timing selection by the module button awvg7 [x] : moving picture awvg7 [x] : overlay to overlay submenu (page 2--7) enter cancel to moving picture submenu (page 2--6) enter cancel to timing submenu (page 2--12) enter cancel to video submenu (page 2--14) enter cancel awvg7 [x] : video figure 2- 2: awvg7 module main menu
operating basics awvg7 analog wideband video generator user manual 2-5 moving picture. scrolls the active picture area of the output test signal. when you select this menu item and then press the enter button, you will access the moving picture submenu. refer to moving picture submenu on page 2--6 for detailed information. overlay. selects an item (logo, text, or circle) that is overlaid on the output test signal and sets the blinking mode for the overlay. when you select this menu item and then press the enter button, you will access the overlay submenu. refer to overlay submenu on page 2--7 for detailed information. timing. sets the timing offset of the output signals relative to the internal reference signal (frame reset signal). when you select this menu item and then press the enter button, you will access the timing submenu. refer to timing submenu on page 2--12 for detailed information. video. sets whether or not a sync signal is multiplexed with the b and r signal when a gbr signal is being output and ena bles or disables the signal output from ch 1, ch 2, and ch 3. when you select this menu item and then press the enter button, you will access the video submenu. refer to video submenu on page 2--14 for detailed information.
operating basics 2-6 awvg7 analog wideband video generator user manual this menu allows you to scroll the active picture area of the output signal up/down or left/right (or randomly). use the up ( y ) or down ( b ) arrow button to scroll the menu. figure 2--3 shows the moving picture submenu. awvg7 [x] : moving picture hstep:0sample(s) awvg7 [x] : moving picture vstep:0line(s) awvg7 [x] : moving picture period : 1 frame (s) select moving picture in the main menu awvg7 [x] : moving picture random : disable disable enable set the number of lines to be scrolled set the period, in frames, to be scrolled set the number of samples to be scrolled figure 2- 3: moving picture submenu h hstep : sets the number of samples to be scrolled per frame set in the period menu item. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to change the value. you can set the value from --60 to +60 in 4 sampled steps. h vstep : sets the number of lines to be scrolled per frame set in the period menu item. use the left ( a ) or right ( " ) arrow button to change the value. you can set the value from --15 to +15 in 1 line step. h period : sets the time interval between occurrences of the scrolling. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to change the value. you can set the value from 1 to 16 in 1 frame step. h random : sets whether or not the picture scrolls randomly. use the left ( a ) or right ( " ) arrow button to select between disable and enable .pressthe enter button to confirm the selection. moving picture submenu
operating basics awvg7 analog wideband video generator user manual 2-7 this menu allows you to select an item (logo, id text, or circle) to overlay on the output test signal, and to set the blinking mode for the overlay. use the up ( y )ordown( b ) arrow button to scroll through the menu. figure 2--4 shows the overlay submenu. awvg7 [x] : overlay : object logo select overlay in the main menu awvg7 [x] : overlay : blink off off fast slow to logo submenu ( page 2--8) to id text submenu (page 2--9) to circle submenu (page 2--11) enter cancel logo id text circle figure 2- 4: overlay submenu h object : selects an item that is overlaid on the output test signal. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to select logo , id text ,or circle . when you select any of these items and then press the enter button, you will access the submenu for se tting that overlay. refer to logo submenu on page 2--8, id text submenu on page 2--9, or circle submenu on page 2--11 for detailed information. h blink : sets the blinking mode for the overlay. use the left ( a )orright ( " ) arrow button to select off , fast (blinks at approximately 0.5 second intervals), or slow (blinks at approximately 1.0 intervals). press the enter button to confirm the selection. overlay submenu
operating basics 2-8 awvg7 analog wideband video generator user manual this menu allows you to select a logo to overlay on the output test signal, and to set the display position of the logo. use the up ( y )ordown( b ) arrow button to scroll through the menu. figure 2--5 shows the logo submenu. awvg7 [x] : overlay : logo x position : 0.0 % aph select off or a logo awvg7 [x] : overlay : logo y position : 0.0 % aph awvg7 [x] : overlay : logo logo : off select logo in the overlay submenu set the horizontal position set the vertical position awvg7 [x] : overlay : logo : save press enter to save parameters enter save the display position for the logo figure 2- 5: logo submenu h x position : sets the horizontal position of the logo. the position is set as a percentage of active picture width. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to change the position. you can set the value from --100.0% to 0.0% in 0.1% steps. h y position : sets the vertical position of the logo. the position is set as a percentage of active picture height. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to change the position. you can set the value from --100.0% to 0.0% in 0.1% steps. h logo : selects the logo you want to display. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to select off or a logo file name. press the enter button to confirm the selection. when you select off, the logo overlay is disabled. h save : saves the display position for the logo to the logo file. press the enter button to save the current settings. logo submenu
operating basics awvg7 analog wideband video generator user manual 2-9 in order to display a logo using the logo submenu, you need to create the logo file (.lgo) and download it to the logo folder of the module. refer to the TG700 tv signal generator platform user manual for detailed information about how to create a logo file and download it to the TG700. this menu allows you to edit text that is overlaid on the output test signal, and to set the display position of the text. use the up ( y )ordown( b ) arrow button to scroll through the menu. figure 2--6 shows the id text submenu. awvg7 [x] : overlay : text status : enable edit text awvg7 [x] : overlay : text x position : 0.0 % aph awvg7 [x] : overlay : text : edit _ set the horizontal position set the vertical position awvg7 [x] : overlay : text y position : 0.0 % aph disable enable awvg7 [x] : overlay : text : save enter save the text to the signal file select id te x tinthe overlay submenu enter figure 2- 6: id text submenu id text submenu
operating basics 2-10 awvg7 analog wideband video generator user manual h status : enables or disables the text overlay. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to select between enable and disable. press the enter button to confirm the selection. h x position : sets the horizontal position of the text. the position is set as a percentage of active picture width. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to change the position. you can set the value from 0.0% to 100.0% in 1% steps. h y position : sets the vertical position of the text. the position is set as a percentage of active picture height. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to change the position. you can set the value from 0.0% to 100.0% in 1% steps. h edit : edits the text you want to display on the output test signal. to edit the text, first press the enter button to enable the text edit mode. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to move the underscore character ( _ ) to the character you want to change, and then use the up ( y ) or down ( b ) arrow button to select the desired character. when you enter all of the desired characters then press the enter button to end the text editing process. you can use up to 30 characters for the text. use the blank character to erase any characters that are not needed. h save : saves the text and its position to the signal file currently being output. press the enter button to save the text and its position to the signal file.
operating basics awvg7 analog wideband video generator user manual 2-11 this menu allows you to create a circle overlaid on the output test signal and set its position on the display. use the up ( y )ordown( b ) arrow button to scroll through the menu. figure 2--7 shows the circle submenu. awvg7 [x] : overlay : circle status : enable set the diameter of the circle awvg7 [x] : overlay : circle x position : 0.0 % aph awvg7 [x] : overlay : circle diameter : 10.0 % aph set the horizontal position set the vertical position awvg7 [x] : overlay : circle y position : 0.0 % aph disable enable select circle in the overlay submenu figure 2- 7: circle submenu h status : enables or disables the circle overlay. use the left ( a ) or right ( " ) arrow button to select between enable and disable. press the enter button to confirm the selection. h x position : sets the horizontal position of the circle. the position is set as a percentage of active picture width. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to change the position. you can set the value from --50.0% to 50.0% in 1% steps. h y position : sets the vertical position of the circle. the position is set as a percentage of active picture height. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to change the position. you can set the value from --50.0% to 50.0% in 1% steps. h diameter : sets the diameter of the circle. the diameter is set as a percentage of active picture height. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to change the value. you can set the value from 0.0% to 100.0% in 1% steps. circle submenu
operating basics 2-12 awvg7 analog wideband video generator user manual this menu allows you to adjust the timing offset of the output signals relative to the internal reference signal (frame reset signal). use the up ( y )ordown( b ) arrow button to change the menu items. figure 2--8 shows the timing submenu. awvg7 [x] : timing : 1080 59i horizontal coarse : 0.000 m sec awvg7 [x] : timing : 1080 59i horizontal fine : 0.00 nsec set the horizontal timing in 1 clock steps select timing in the main menu set the horizontal timing in 0.1 ns steps awvg7 [x] : timing : 1080 59i vertical : 0 line (s) set the vertical timing in 1 line steps figure 2- 8: timing submenu h vertical : sets the vertical timing offset. use the left ( a ) or right ( " ) arrow button to change the timing offset. you can set the value from --1 to +1 frame of the selected signal format in 1-line steps. refer to table 2--2 on page 2--13 for the appropriate range of each format. h horizontal coarse :usetheleft( a )orright( " ) arrow button to adjust the coarse horizontal offset. you can set the value from --1 to +1 line of the selected signal format in 1-clock (18.5 ns) steps. refer to table 2--2 on page 2--13, for the appropriate range of each format. h horizontal fine :usetheleft( a ) or right ( " ) arrow button to adjust the fine horizontal offset. you can set the value from --10 ns to +10 ns in 0.1 ns steps. note . you can reset the timing offset to zero by pressing the left ( a ) and right ( " ) arrow buttons simultaneously. timing submenu
operating basics awvg7 analog wideband video generator user manual 2-13 table 2- 2: timing adjustment ranges for output signals format name line settings coarse settings ( m s) fine settings (ns) 1080 60i ypbpr/gbr ? 562 ? 29.6296 ? 10.00 1080 59i ypbpr/gbr ? 562 ? 29.6593 ? 10.00 1080 50i ypbpr/gbr ? 562 ? 35.5556 ? 10.00 1080 24sf ypbpr/gbr ? 562 ? 37.0370 ? 10.00 1080 23sf ypbpr/gbr ? 562 ? 37.0741 ? 10.00 1080 30p ypbpr/gbr ? 562 ? 29.6296 ? 10.00 1080 29p ypbpr/gbr ? 562 ? 29.6593 ? 10.00 1080 25p ypbpr/gbr ? 562 ? 35.5556 ? 10.00 1080 24p ypbpr/gbr ? 562 ? 37.0370 ? 10.00 1080 23p ypbpr/gbr ? 562 ? 37.0741 ? 10.00 720 60p ypbpr/gbr ? 375 ? 22.2222 ? 10.00 720 59p ypbpr/gbr ? 375 ? 22.4444 ? 10.00 720 50p ypbpr/gbr ? 375 ? 26.6667 ? 10.00 720 30p ypbpr/gbr ? 375 ? 53.3333 ? 10.00 720 29p ypbpr/gbr ? 375 ? 45.9770 ? 10.00 720 25p ypbpr/gbr ? 375 ? 44.4444 ? 10.00 720 24p ypbpr/gbr ? 375 ? 55.5556 ? 10.00 720 23p ypbpr/gbr ? 375 ? 55.6111 ? 10.00
operating basics 2-14 awvg7 analog wideband video generator user manual this menu allows you to enable or disable the signal output from ch 1, ch 2, and ch 3 connectors and to set whether or not a sync signal is multiplexed with the b and r signal when a gbr signal is being output. use the up ( y ) or down ( b ) arrow button to scroll through the menu. figure 2--9 shows the video submenu. select video in the main menu awvg7 [x] : video : gbr sync sync on all channels sync on green sync on all channels awvg7 [x] : video : ch1 y:on on off awvg7 [x] : video : ch2 pb : on on off awvg7 [x] : video : ch3 pr : on on off figure 2- 9: video submenu h gbr sync : sets whether or not a sync signal is multiplexed with the b signal and r signal when a gbr signal is being output. use the left ( a )or right ( " ) arrow button to select between sync on green and sync on all channels . when you select sync on all channels, a sync signal is multiplexed with the g, b, and r signals. press the enter button to confirm the selection. this menu item appears only when a gbr signal is being output. h ch 1 : turns the ch 1 signal output on or off. use the left ( a ) or right ( " ) arrow button to select between on and off .pressthe enter button to confirm the selection. the signal name displayed before the on/off status depends on the video format of the currently selected signal (ypbpr component or gbr component). video submenu
operating basics awvg7 analog wideband video generator user manual 2-15 h ch 2 : turns the ch 2 signal output on or off. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to select between on and off .pressthe enter button to confirm the selection. the signal name displayed before the on/off status depends on the video format of the currently selected signal (ypbpr component or gbr component). h ch 3 : turns the ch 3 signal output on or off. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to select between on and off .pressthe enter button to confirm the selection. the signal name displayed before the on/off status depends on the video format of the currently selected signal (ypbpr component or gbr component). rear-panel connectors the awvg7 generator module is equipped with six connectors: one pair of ch 1 , ch 2 ,and ch 3 , which will output analog component test signals. figure 2--10 shows the awvg7 generator module rear-panel connectors. note . each pair of connectors (ch 1, ch 2, and ch 3) will both output the same test signal. figure 2- 10: awvg7 generator module rear-panel connectors h ch 1 : analog component test signal output. h ch 2 : analog component test signal output. h ch 3 : analog component test signal output.
operating basics 2-16 awvg7 analog wideband video generator user manual factory default settings table 2--3 shows the factory default settings for the awvg7 generator module. these settings are recalled when you select factory default from the preset : recall menu item in the mainframe main menu. table 2- 3: factory default settings menu item name settings status 1080 59i ypbpr 100% color bars moving picture h step 0 sample(s) vstep 0 line(s) period 1 frame(s) random disable overlay : object logo overlay : blink off overlay : logo logo off overlay : id text status disable overlay : circle status disable x position 0.0% aph y position 0.0% aph diameter 90.0% aph timing vertical 0 line(s) horizontal coarse 0.000 m s horizontal fine 0.00 ns video gbr sync sync on all channels y on pb on pr on
reference

awvg7 analog wideband video generator user manual 3-1 syntax this section contains information on the standard commands for programmable instruments (scpi) and the programming structure you can use to program your awvg7 generator module. programming model specific conditions must exist before programming commands will affect the test signal generated by a module. select the module using the :instrument:select command before executing any commands. many of the commands used by the awvg7 module are shared by several modules an d will be accepte d without a reported error. many commands will accept either string or numeric arguments. for example: a boolean argument can either be ?1? or ?on?. signal parameter commands that hav e a :step node can accept either a numeric value or they can accept a string argument that refers to the :step increment. signal parameter commands with a :s tep node will accept the fo llowing strings in addition to a numeric value: up. use this argument to increase the parameter value one increment as defined by the :step value. down. use this argument to decrease the parameter value one increment as defined by the :step value. minimum. use this argument to set the parameter value to the minimum acceptable value. maximum. use this argument to set the parameter value to the maximum acceptable value. default. use this argument to set the parameter value to the default value. selecting the module command arguments
syntax 3-2 awvg7 analog wideband video generator user manual if you send a query with no argument, the response is the current value. you can also use minimum, maximum, and default as arguments for queries whose command form can use these arguments (refer to the command syntax for the specific command). instead of returning the current value, queries using these arguments return the following information: minimum. return the minimum acceptable value. maximum. return the maximum acceptable value. default. return the default value. the following example demonstrates the effect of each of the arguments when used with a step value. 1. :instrument:select awvg7:#" selects the awvg7 generator module located in the slot number indicated by the ?#? symbol. 2. :output:circle:state on displays a circle on the video display. note . :output:circle:diameter uses an argument that is the percent of picture height. 3. :output:circle:diameter default sets the circle diameter to 90 percent of the screen height. 4. :output:circle:diameter:step 10 sets the step increment to 10 percent. 5. :output:circle:diameter down changes the circle diameter to 80 percent of the screen height. 6. :output:circle:diameter 50 changes the circle diameter to 50 percent of the screen height. 7. :output:circle:diameter maximum changes the circle diameter to 100 percent of the screen height. 8. :output:circle:diameter minimum changes the circle diameter to 0 percent of the screen height. 9. :output:circle:diameter up changes the circle diameter to 10 percent of the screen height. 10. :output:circle:diameter? maximum queries the maximum circle diameter (not the current diameter). the query returns the value of 100 percent, which is the maximum circle diameter allowable. query arguments argument example
syntax awvg7 analog wideband video generator user manual 3-3 scpi commands and queries scpi is a standard created by a consortium that provides guidelines for remote programming of instruments. these guidelines provide a consistent program- ming environment for instrument control and data transfer. this environment uses defined programming messages, instrument responses, and data format across all scpi instruments, regardless of manufacturer. the awvg7 generator module uses a command language based on the scpi standard. the scpi language is based on a hierarchical or tree structure (see figure 3--1) that represents a subsystem. the top level of the tree is the root node; it is followed by one or more lower-level nodes. diameter output circle position state root node lower-level nodes figure 3- 1: example of scpi subsystem hierarchy you can create commands and queries from these subsystem hierarchy trees. commands specify actions for the instrument to perform. queries return measurement data and information about parameter settings. for more information on scpi commands and programming structure, refer to the TG700 signal generator platform user manual .
syntax 3-4 awvg7 analog wideband video generator user manual
awvg7 analog wideband video generator user manual 3-5 remote commands this section describes the remote commands used to control the awvg7 generator module remotely. the comma nds to the module are divided into the following three groups: h mass memory commands (refer to the TG700 tv signal generator platform user manual ) h output commands h sense commands mass memory commands two mass memory commands are listed here for your reference. you can use these to load and query the output test signal. detailed information for using these commands are located in the TG700 tv signal generator platform user manual . :mmemory:load:signal , :mmemory:load:signal , loads a signal into the specified module. :mmemory:signal:active? | returns the current output signal of the specified module.
remote commands 3-6 awvg7 analog wideband video generator user manual output commands use these commands to control the output parameters of the module. these include output status and circle/text/logo overlay. :output :state on|off :circle :state on|off :diameter :position :horizontal :vertical :logo :state on|off :position :horizontal :vertical :select :save :text :state on|off :data :position :horizontal :vertical :save :overlay :blink :state on|off :period :move :horizontal :vertical :period :random[:state] on|off :video :sync :state on|off command tree
remote commands awvg7 analog wideband video generator user manual 3-7 :output:state on|off turns the signal output of the specified channel on or off. the in the command represents the output channel and you can specify 1, 2, or 3. you can use 1 or 0 instead of on or off. :output:state? returns the current output state of the specified channel. the in the command represents the output channel and you can specify 1, 2, or 3. :output1:circle:state on|off turns the circle overlay on the video signal on or off. you can use 1 or 0 instead of on or off. :output1:circle:state? returns the current circle overlay state. :output1:circle:diameter sets the diameter of the displayed circle. the unit is the percent of active picture height. you can set the diameter from 0% to 100% in 1% steps. you can also use min, max, or def instead of a numeric value. :output1:circle:diameter? returns the diameter of the displayed circle. :output1:circle:position:horizontal sets the horizontal position of the circle as it appears on the active signal. the unit is the percent of active picture width. you can set the position from --50% to +50% in 1% steps. you can also use min, max, or def instead of a numeric value. :output1:circle:position:horizontal? returns the current horizontal position of the circle as it appears on the active signal. :output1:circle:position:vertical sets the vertical position of the circle as it appears on the active signal. the unit is the percent of active picture height. you can set the position from --50% to +50% in 1% steps. you can also use min, max, or def instead of a numeric value. command description
remote commands 3-8 awvg7 analog wideband video generator user manual :output1:circle:position:vertical? returns the current vertical position of the circle as it appears on the active signal. :output1:logo:state on|off turns the logo overlay on the video signal on or off. you can use 1 or 0 instead of on or off. :output1:logo:state? returns the current logo overlay state. :output1:logo:position:horizontal sets the horizontal position of the logo as it appears on the active signal. the unit is the percent of active picture width. you can set the position from --100% to 0% in 0.1% steps. you can also use min, max, or def instead of a numeric value. :output1:logo:position:horizontal? returns the current horizontal position of the logo. :output1:logo:position:vertical sets the vertical position of the logo as it appears on the active signal. the unit is the percent of active picture height. you can set the position from --100% to 0% in 0.1% steps. you can also use min, max, or def instead of a numeric value. :output1:logo:position:vertical? returns the current vertical position of the logo. :output1:logo:select selects the logo used for the logo overlay. :output1:logo:select? returns the current logo used for the logo overlay. :output1:logo:save saves the current display position of the logo to the logo file. there are no arguments. :output1:text:state on|off turns the text overlay on the video signal on or off. you can use 1 or 0 instead of on or off.
remote commands awvg7 analog wideband video generator user manual 3-9 :output1:text:state? returns the current text overlay state. :output1:text:data sets the current string for the text mode. :output1:text:data? returns the current string for the text mode. :output1:text:position:horizontal sets the text horizontal position in the video signal. the unit is the percent of active picture width. you can set the position from 0% to 100% in 1% steps. you can also use min, max, or def instead of the numeric value. :output1:text:position:horizontal? returns the current text horizontal position in the video signal. :output1:text:position:vertical sets the text vertical position in the video signal. the unit is the percent of active picture height. you can set the position from 0% to 100% in 1% steps. you can also use min, max, or def instead of the numeric value. :output1:text:position:vertical? returns the current text vertical position in the video signal. :output1:text:save saves the current text and its display position to the signal file. there are no arguments. :output1:overlay:blink:state on|off turns on or off the blinking mode for the logo, text, and circle overlay. you can also use 1 or 0 instead of on or off. :output1:overlay:blink:state? returns the current state of the b linking mode for the logo, text, and circle overlay. :output1:overlay:blink:period sets the blinking interval of the blinking mode for the logo, text, and circle overlay. you can set the value as 0.5 seconds or 1.0 seconds.
remote commands 3-10 awvg7 analog wideband video generator user manual :output1:overlay:blink:period? returns the blinking interval of th e blinking mode for the logo, text, and circle overlay. :output1:move:horizontal sets the amount of horizontal scrolling in the moving picture mode. you can set the value from --252 to +252 in 4 samples steps. :output1:move:horizontal? returns the amount of horizontal scrolling in the moving picture mode. :output1:move:vertical sets the amount of vertical scrolling in the moving picture mode. you can set the value from --252 to +252 in 1 line steps. :output1:move:vertical? returns the amount of vertical scrolling in the moving picture mode. :output1:move:period sets the time interval between occurrences of the scrolling. you can set the value from 1 to 16 in 1 field steps. :output1:move:period? returns the time interval between occurrences of the scrolling. :output1:move:random:state on|off turns the random scrolling mode on or off. you can also use 1 or 0 instead of on or off. :output1:move:random:state? returns the current state of the random scrolling mode. :output1:video:sync:state on|off sets whether or not a sync signal is multiplexed with the b and r signals when a gbr signal is being output. you can also use 1 or 0 instead of on or off. :output1:video:sync:state? returns whether or not a sync signal is multiplexed with the b and r signals when a gbr signal is being output.
remote commands awvg7 analog wideband video generator user manual 3-11 sense commands use these commands to set the timing offset of the output signals relative to the internal reference signal (frame reset signal). refer to operating basics for detailed information about the setting range. :sense :correction :mdelay :horizontal :step :vertical :step :sense1:correction:mdelay:horizontal sets the horizontal timing offset of the output signals. the timing resolution is clock-cycles. the units are microseconds. you can use up, down, or def instead of the numeric value. if the argument exceeds the horizontal time value, then the vertical offset is adjusted to accommodate the requested delay. :sense1:correction:mdelay:horizontal? returns the current horizontal timing offset of the output signals. :sense1:correction:mdelay:horizontal:step sets the step increment used by the up or down commands. the units are microseconds. you can use min, max, or def instead of a numeric value. :sense1:correction:mdelay:horizontal:step? returns the current step increment. :sense1:correction:mdelay:vertical sets the vertical timing offset of the output signals. the argument can be a floating point value that is translated into integer lines with a horizontal offset. you can use up, down, or def instead of a numeric value. command tree command description
remote commands 3-12 awvg7 analog wideband video generator user manual :sense1:correction:mdelay:vertical? returns the current vertical timing offset of the output signals. :sense1:correction:mdelay:vertical:step sets the step increment used by the up or down commands. you can use min, max, or def instead of a numeric value. :sense1:correction:mdelay:vertical:step? returns the current step increment.
appendices

awvg7 analog wideband video generator user manual a- 1 appendix a: specifications tables a--1 through a--3 list the electrical and environmental characteristics of the awvg7 generator module. electrical characteristics table a- 1: output channels characteristic performance requirements reference information channel 1 (ch 1) number of outputs 2 output signals yorg channel 2 (ch 2) number of outputs 2 output signals pb or b channel 3 (ch 3) number of outputs 2 output signals pr or r table a- 2: common output characteristics characteristic performance requirements reference information amplitude error absolute amplitude 1% measured at 700 mv. channel gain matching 0.5% measured at 700 mv, relative to ch 1. delay error channel to channel delay, typical 1 ns; relative to ch 1 group delay, typical 3nsto20mhz 5nsto30mhz frequency response ? 1% to 20 mhz ? 2% to 28 mhz ? 3% to 30 mhz measuredwitha1mcoaxcableand peak detector. line tilt 0.5% measured with 100% flat field test signal. field tilt 0.5% measured with 100% flat field test signal.
appendix a: specifications a- 2 awvg7 analog wideband video generator user manual table a- 2: common output characteristics (cont.) characteristic reference information performance requirements pulse/bar ratio 1:1 within 0.5% with 2t5 pulse and bar signal. dc offset 10 mv return loss 35 db to 30 mhz environmental characteristics table a- 3: environmental characteristics characteristic description temperature operating 0 _ cto+50 _ c non-operating -- 2 0 _ cto+60 _ c relative humidity operating 20% to 80% (no condensation); maximum wet-bulb temperature 29.4 _ c non-operating 5% to 90% (no condensation); maximum wet-bulb temperature 40.0 _ c altitude operating to 4.5 km (15 000 feet) maximum operating temperature decreases 1 _ c each 300 m above 1.5 km. non-operating to 15 km (50 000 feet) vibration operating 2.65 m/s 2 (0.27 g rms) , 5 hz to 500 hz, 10 min, three axes non-operating 22.36 m/s 2 (2.28 g rms) , 5 hz to 500 hz, 10 min, three axes shock non-operating 588 m/s 2 (60 g), half-sine, 11 ms duration
index

awvg7 analog wideband video generator user manual index- 1 index a accessories optional, 1--2 standard, 1--2 awvg7 features, 1--1 awvg7 module main menu, 2--4 moving picture, 2--5 overlay, 2--5 timing, 2--5 video, 2--5 c ch 1 connector, 2--15 ch 2 connector, 2--15 ch 3 connector, 2--15 circle overlay, 2--11 circle submenu, 2--11 commands rules for forming, 3--1 syntax, 3--1 e electrical specifications, a--1 environmental specifications, a--2 f factory default settings, 2--16 functional check, 1--3 h hierarchy (scpi), 3--3 i id text submenu, 2--9 installation, 1--3 l logo overlay, 2--8 logo submenu, 2--8 m manuals, related, iii mass memory commands, 3--5 moving picture submenu, 2--6 o operating procedure, 2--1 option, 1--2 optional accessories, 1--2 output commands, 3--6 overlay submenu, 2--7 p product description, 1--1 r rear-panel connectors, 2--15 related manuals, iii remote commands, 3--5 rules, command forming, 3--1 s scpi, subsystem hierarchy tree, 3--3 scpi commands and queries syntax, 3--3 sense commands, 3--11 signal set assigned to the test signal buttons, 2--3 specifications electrical, a--1 environmental, a--2 standard accessories, 1--2 syntax, command, 3--1 t text overlay, 2--9 timing submenu, 2--12 v video submenu, 2--14
index index- 2 awvg7 analog wideband video generator user manual

user manual bg7 black generator www.tektronix.com
copyright ? tektronix. all rights reserved. licensed software products are owned by tektronix or its suppliers and are protected by united states copyright laws and international treaty provisions. tektronix products are covered by u.s. and foreign patents, issued and pending. information in this publication supercedes that in all previously published material. specifications and price change privileges reserved. tektronix and tek are registered trademarks of tektronix, inc. contacting tektronix tektronix, inc. 14200 sw karl braun drive p.o. box 500 beaverton, or 97077 usa for product information, sales, service, and technical support: h in north america, call 1-800-833-9200. h worldwide, visit www.tektronix.com to find contacts in your area.
bg7 black generator user manual i table of contents preface iii ................................................... about this manual iii ............................................... related manuals iii ................................................. getting started product description 1--1 .............................................. accessories 1--1 ..................................................... options 1--2 ........................................................ installation 1--2 ..................................................... functional check 1--2 ................................................ operating basics operating procedure 2--1 .............................................. bg7 module main menu 2--2 .......................................... rear-panel connectors 2--5 ............................................ factory default settings 2--6 ........................................... reference syntax 3--1 ................................................... programming model 3--1 .............................................. scpi commands and queries 3--3 ...................................... remote commands 3--5 ........................................ output commands 3--5 ............................................. sense commands 3--7 ............................................... appendices appendix a: specifications a--1 .................................. electrical characteristics a--1 .......................................... environmental characteristics a--2 ...................................... index
table of contents ii bg7 black generator user manual list of figures figure 2--1: bg7 module main menu 2--2 .......................... figure 2--2: select format submenu 2--2 ..................... figure 2--3: select signal submenu 2--3 ...................... figure 2--4: timing submenu 2--4 ............................... figure 2--5: bg7 module rear-panel connectors 2--5 ................. figure 3--1: example of scpi subsystem hierarchy 3--3 .............. list of tables table 1--1: standard and optional accessories 1--1 .................. table 2--1: selectable signals for each video format 2--4 ............. table 2--2: factory default settings 2--6 .......................... table a--1: black burst and hdtv trilevel sync outputs a--1 ........ table a--2: color bars and black burst with field id outputs (option cb) a--2 ........................................... table a--3: environmental characteristics a--2 .....................
bg7 black generator user manual iii preface this manual documents the capabilities, operation, and specifications of the bg7 black generator module. about this manual this manual is composed of the following sections: h getting started contains product description and functional check procedure. h operating basics explains how to operate the bg7 module using the menus and front-panel buttons. h reference provides the syntax used in command descriptions and describes all programming commands. h appendices provides the specifications. related manuals the following documents are also available. h the TG700 tv signal generator platform service manual (tektronix part number 070-a800-xx) describes how to maintain and service the mainframe and generator modules. this ma nual is an optional accessory. h the TG700 tv signal generator platform module installation instructions (tektronix part number 070-a824-xx) describes how to install and remove the modules, and how to upgrade the firmware of the mainframe.
preface iv bg7 black generator user manual
getting started

bg7 black generator user manual 1-1 getting started this section contains the following information: h product description h accessories h options h installation h functional check product description the bg7 black generator module is designed to be installed in the TG700 tv signal generator platform. the module is a multi format black generator with the following features: h four ntsc (with or without setup) /pal black burst and hdtv trilevel sync outputs h individual format and timing control for each output h black burst with field id and ntsc/pal color bars signals output (option cb) h full remote control using ethernet interface accessories table 1--1 lists the standard and optional accessories provided with the bg7 generator module. table 1- 1: standard and optional accessories accessory std. opt. tektronix part number TG700 tv signal generator platform module installation instructions d 070-a824-xx TG700 signal generator platform software library cd-rom d 062-a249-xx TG700 tv signal generator platform service manual d 070-a800-xx
getting started 1-2 bg7 black generator user manual options this subsection describes the options available for the bg7 generator module. the following options are available: option cb (ntsc/pal color bars ) option d1 (test data report) option cb adds 10 field id and ntsc/pal color bar signals to the standard black burst signal. these additional signals are available from the black 3 and black 4 outputs only. a calibration test data report will be provided with the bg7 generator module when this option is specified. installation refer to the TG700 tv signal generator platform module installation instructions for instructions on how to install the bg7 generator module. functional check the following procedure determines whether the module is operating correctly. the following equipment is required for the functional check: h ntsc/pal waveform monitor h hdtv waveform monitor h 75 ? bnc cable 1. install the module into the TG700 platform mainframe using the installation procedures described in the TG700 tv signal generator platform user manual . 2. power on the TG700 tv signal generator platform. the initializing process for all installed modules is executed. 3. check that no error messages appear on the lcd display. 4. warm up the instrument for 20 minutes. option cb (ntsc/pal color bars) option d1 (test data report) required equipment procedure
getting started bg7 black generator user manual 1-3 5. press the front-panel module button until the bg7 main menu shown below appears. bg7 [x] : select output black 1 6. press the front-panel enter button. the select format submenu shown below appears. bg7 [x] : black 1 : select format ntsc 7. press the left ( a ) or right ( " ) arrow button to select ntsc or pal . 8. press the enter button. the select signal submenu shown below appears. bg7 [x] : black 1 : select signal black burst 9. press the left ( a ) or right ( " ) arrow button to select black burst and then press the enter button to enable the selection. 10. connect the black 1 connector to the ntsc/pal waveform monitor using the 75 ? bnc cable. 11. set the waveform monitor to view the blanking area of the signal. 12. check that the appropriate black burst signal is displayed. 13. press the front-panel cancel button to return to the select format submenushowninstep6. 14. press the left ( a ) or right ( " ) arrow button to select hd sync . 15. press the enter button. the select signal submenu shown in step 8 appears to select the hdtv trilevel sync signal. 16. press the left ( a ) or right ( " ) arrow button to select 1080 59.94i and then press the enter button to enable the selection. 17. disconnect the bnc cable from the ntsc/pal waveform monitor, and then reconnect it to the hdtv waveform monitor. 18. check that the appropriate hdtv trilevel sync signal is displayed.
getting started 1-4 bg7 black generator user manual 19. repeat this procedure for the black 2 , black 3 ,and black 4 outputs.
operating basics

bg7 black generator user manual 2-1 operating basics this section explains the operation of the bg7 generator module using the front-panel buttons and menu. there is also a description of the rear-panel output connectors. refer to the TG700 tv signal generator platform user manual for a detailed explanation of the front-panel buttons and lcd display. operating procedure after the module is installed in the mainframe, and the mainframe is installed in the rack or other location where it will be used, access each function of the module with the following procedure: 1. connect the power connector on the rear panel and ac electric power source using the power cord. electric power is supplied to the mainframe. 2. wait until the power up initialization process is complete, and check that there are no error messages on the display. 3. following the initialization process t he mainframe main menu appears, as shown below. TG700 : preset 4. press the front-panel module button until the bg7 module main menu shown below appears. bg7 [x] : select output black 1 5. use the front-panel arrow buttons to navigate and select items in the main menu and submenu. the details of the main menu and submenu are explained on the following pages.
operating basics 2-2 bg7 black generator user manual bg7 module main menu in the bg7 module main menu, there is one menu item to select the output whose parameters are to be changed. figure 2--1 shows the bg7 module main menu. selection by the module button bg7 [x] : select output black 1 enter cancel black 1 black 2 black 3 black 4 enter cancel bg7[x]: black1:timing to select format submenu to timing submenu (page 2--4) figure 2- 1: bg7 module main menu select output. selects the output whose parameters are to be set. use the left ( a )orright( " ) arrow button to make the selection. the choices are black 1 , black 2 , black 3 ,and black 4 . you can access the select format submenu to set the format of the selected output by pressing the front-panel enter button. refer to the select format submenu on this page for detailed information about the select output submenu. this menu allows you to set the video format for the selected output. figure 2--2 shows the select format submenu. bg7 [x] : black 1 : select format ntsc enter cancel ntsc ntsc no setup pal hd sync to select signal submenu figure 2- 2: select format submenu select format submenu
operating basics bg7 black generator user manual 2-3 note . when you change the video format, synchronization shock will occur. use the left ( a ) or right ( " ) arrow button to make the selection. the choices are ntsc , ntsc no setup , pal ,and hd sync . for hd sync, you can output a hdtv trilevel sync signal. you can access the select signal submenu to select the kind of output signal by pressing the front-panel enter button. refer to the select signal submenu on this page for detailed information about the select signal submenu. when you press the up ( y ) or down ( b ) arrow button while the select format menu item is displayed, you enter the timing menu. if you select the menu item and press the enter button, you then access the timing submenu to set the timing offset for the selected black signal output. refer to the timing submenu on page 2--4 for detailed information about the timing submenu. this menu allows you to select black signal output from the selected black output. figure 2--3 shows the select signal submenu. bg7[x]:black1:ntsc black burst ntsc and ntsc no setup : black burst black burst with field ref black burst with 10 field id* 100% color bars* 75% color bars* smpte color bars* 40 % flat field* other 1* other 2* * option cb only p a l : black burst black burst no field ref 100% colour bars* 75% colour bars* 100% colour bars over red* 75% colour bars over red* 40 % flat field* other 1* other 2* * option cb only hd s y nc : 1080 60i 1080 59.94i 1080 50i 1080 24sf 1080 23.98sf 1080 30p 1080 29.97p 1080 25p 1080 24p 1080 23.98p 720 60p 720 59.94p 720 50p *these signals are available with option cb only figure 2- 3: select signal submenu use the left ( a ) or right ( " ) arrow button to scroll through the selections. pressing the enter button enables the selected item. signals for selection depend on the video format selected in the select format submenu. for ntsc , ntsc no setup ,and pal , you can select the black burst signal or the color bars signal (option cb). for hd sync , you can select the hdtv trilevel sync signal. table 2--1 lists the selectable signals for each video format. select signal submenu
operating basics 2-4 bg7 black generator user manual table 2- 1: selectable signals for each video format format selectable signals ntsc and ntsc no setup black burst, black burst with field ref, black burst with 10 field id*, 100% color bars*, 75% color bars*, smpte color bars*, 40 % flat field*, other 1*, other 2* pal black burst, black burst no field ref, 100% colour bars*, 75% colour bars *, 100% colour bars over red*, 75% colour bars over red*, 40 % flat field*, other 1*, other 2* hd sync 1080 60i, 1080 59.94i, 1080 50i, 1080 24sf, 1080 23.98sf, 1080 30p, 1080 29.97p, 1080 25p, 1080 24p, 1080 23.98p, 720 60p, 720 59.94p, 720 50p * these signals are only provided with option cb, and are only available through the black 3 and black 4 connectors. this menu allows you to adjust the timing offset of the selected black signal outputs relative to the genlock signal or the internal reference signal. use the up ( y )ordown( b ) arrow button to select between vertical and horizontal. figure 2--4 shows the timing submenu. bg7 [x] : timing : ntsc vertical : 0 line (s) bg7 [x] : timing : ntsc horizontal : 0.0000 m sec adjust vertical timing from select format submenu adjust horizontal timing figure 2- 4: timing submenu h vertical :usetheleft( a )orright( " ) arrow button to adjust the vertical offset. for ntsc or pal format signal, you can set the value from --1/2 color frame to +1/2 color frame in 1 line steps. for the hdtv trilevel sync signal, you can set the value from --1/2 frame to +1/2 frame in 1 line steps. timing submenu
operating basics bg7 black generator user manual 2-5 h horizontal :usetheleft( a )orright( " ) arrow button to adjust the horizontal offset. you can set the value from --1 line to +1 line in one clock steps (18.5 ns for ntsc or pal, 13.5 ns for hdtv). note . you can reset the timing offset to zero by pressing the left ( a ) and right ( " ) arrow buttons simultaneously. the bg7 horizontal timing can only be adjusted in clock cycle increments. you can match the agl7 timing to the bg7 by adjusting the agl7 fine timing controls. rear-panel connectors the bg7 generator module is equipped with four bnc connectors of black 1, black 2, black 3, and black 4, and can output a black burst signal or hdtv trilevel sync signa l from each output connect or. option cb adds the capability to output a field id signal and ntsc/pal color bars in addition to a black burst signal. figure 2--5 shows the bg7 generator module rear-panel connectors. figure 2- 5: bg7 module rear-panel connectors h black 1 : black burst signal and hdtv trilevel sync signal output. h black 2 : black burst signal and hdtv trilevel sync signal output. h black 3 : black burst signal and hdtv trilevel sync signal output. with option cb installed this connector can also output a 10 field id signal and color bars. h black 4 : black burst signal and hdtv trilevel sync signal output. with option cb installed this connector can also output a 10 field id signal and color bars.
operating basics 2-6 bg7 black generator user manual factory default settings table 2--2 shows the factory default settings for the bg7 generator module. these settings are recalled when you select factory default from the preset : recall menu item in the mainframe main menu. table 2- 2: factory default settings menu item name settings output : black 1 to black 4 format ntsc signal black burst timing vertical 0 line(s) horizontal 0.0000 m sec
reference

bg7 black generator user manual 3-1 syntax this section contains information on the standard commands for programmable instruments (scpi) and the programming structure you can use to program your bg7 generator module. programming model specific conditions must exist before programming commands will affect the test signal generated by a module. select the module using the :instrument:select command before executing any commands. many of the commands used by the bg7 module are shared by several modules and w ill be accepted w ithout a reported error. many commands will accept either string or numeric arguments. for example: a boolean argument can either be ?1? or ?on?. signal parameter commands that hav e a :step node can accept either a numeric value or they can accept a string argument that refers to the :step increment. signal parameter commands with a :s tep node will accept the fo llowing strings in addition to a numeric value: up. use this argument to increase the parameter value one increment as defined by the :step value. down. use this argument to decrease the parameter value one increment as defined by the :step value. minimum. use this argument to set the parameter value to the minimum acceptable value. maximum. use this argument to set the parameter value to the maximum acceptable value. default. use this argument to set the parameter value to the default value. selecting the module command arguments
syntax 3-2 bg7 black generator user manual if you send a query with no argument, the response is the current value. you can also use minimum, maximum, and default as arguments for queries whose command form can use these arguments (refer to the command syntax for the specific command). instead of returning the current value, queries using these arguments return the following information: minimum. return the minimum acceptable value. maximum. return the maximum acceptable value. default. return the default value. the following example demonstrates the effect of each of the arguments when used with a step value. 1. :instrument:select "hdvg7:#" selects the digital video generator module located in the slot number indicated by the ?#? symbol. 2. :output:circle:state on displays a circle on the video display. note . :output:circle:diameter uses an argument that is the percent of picture height. 3. :output:circle:diameter default sets the circle diameter to 90 percent of the screen height. 4. :output:circle:diameter:step 10 sets the step increment to 10 percent. 5. :output:circle:diameter down changes the circle diameter to 80 percent of the screen height. 6. :output:circle:diameter 50 changes the circle diameter to 50 percent of the screen height. 7. :output:circle:diameter maximum changes the circle diameter to 100 percent of the screen height. 8. :output:circle:diameter minimum changes the circle diameter to 0 percent of the screen height. 9. :output:circle:diameter up changes the circle diameter to 10 percent of the screen height. 10. :output:circle:diameter? maximum queries the maximum circle diameter (not the current diameter). the query returns the value of 100 percent, which is the maximum circle diameter allowable. query arguments argument example
syntax bg7 black generator user manual 3-3 scpi commands and queries scpi is a standard created by a consortium that provides guidelines for remote programming of instruments. these guidelines provide a consistent program- ming environment for instrument control and data transfer. this environment uses defined programming messages, instrument responses, and data format across all scpi instruments, regardless of manufacturer. the bg7 generator module uses a command language based on the scpi standard. the scpi language is based on a hierarchical or tree structure (see figure 3--1) that represents a subsystem. the top level of the tree is the root node; it is followed by one or more lower-level nodes. diameter output circle position state root node lower-level nodes figure 3- 1: example of scpi subsystem hierarchy you can create commands and queries from these subsystem hierarchy trees. commands specify actions for the instrument to perform. queries return measurement data and information about parameter settings. for more information on scpi commands and programming structure, refer to the TG700 signal generator platform user manual .
syntax 3-4 bg7 black generator user manual
bg7 black generator user manual 3-5 remote commands this section describes the command sets used for the bg7 generator module remote operation. the commands for the module are divided into the following groups: h output commands h sense commands output commands use these commands to set the video standard and the kind of signal for the black outputs. :output :configure? :output :standard ntsc|ntsc_nsu|pal|hd1080_60i| hd1080_59i|hd1080_50i|hd1080_24sf| hd1080_23sf|hd1080_30p|hd1080_29p| hd1080_25p|hd1080_24p|hd1080_23p| hd720_60p|hd720_59p|hd720_50p :signal bb|bb_fref|bb_10fid|cb100per| cb75per|cb_smpte|ff40per|other_one| other_two|bb_no_fref|cb100_or|cb75_or :output:configure? returns the availability of color bars signal output option (option cb). ?1? indicates that the option is available and ?0? indicates the option is not available. command tree command description
remote commands 3-6 bg7 black generator user manual :output:standard ntsc|ntsc_nsu|pal|hd1080_60i|hd1080_59i| hd1080_50i|hd1080_24sf|hd1080_23sf| hd1080_30p|hd1080_29p|hd1080_25p| hd1080_24p|hd1080_23p|hd720_60p|hd720_59p| hd720_50p sets the video standard for a specific black output. the choices are ntsc, pal, ntsc_nsu (ntsc no setup), and hd1080_60i to hd720_50p. the in the command represents the connector number. you can use any connector number from 1 through 4. :output:standard? returns the video standard for a specific black output. the in the command represents the connector number. you can use any connector number from 1 through 4. :output:signal bb|bb_fref|bb_10fid|cb100per|cb75per| cb_smpte|ff40per|other_one|other_two| bb_no_fref|cb100_or|cb75_or sets what kind of signal is available from a specific black output. the in the command represents the connector number. you can use any connector number from 1 through 4. if the standard is ntsc or ntsc_nsu, the options are bb (black burst) or bb_fref (black burst with field reference). with option cb you can also select bb_10fid (black burst with 10 field id), cb100per (100 % color bars), cb75per (75 % color bars), cb_smpte (smpte color bars), ff40per (40 % flat field), other_one (other 1), or other_two (other 2). if the standard is pal, the options are bb (black burst) or bb_no_fref (black burst no field reference). with option cb you can also select cb100per (100 % colour bars), cb75per (75 % colour bars) cb_100_or (100 % colour bars over red), cb_75_or (75 % colour bars over red), ff40per (40 % flat field), oth- er_one (other 1), or other_two (other 2). :output:signal? returns the current output signal. the in the command represents the connector number. you can use any connector number from 1 through 4.
remote commands bg7 black generator user manual 3-7 sense commands use these commands to adjust the timing offset of the black outputs relative to the internal reference signal (frame reset signal). refer to operating basics about the timing offset range. :sense :correction :mdelay :horizontal :step :vertical :step :sense:correction:mdelay:horizontal sets the horizontal timing offset of a specific black output. the timing resolution is clock-cycles. the unit is microseconds. you can use up, down, or def instead of the numeric values. if the argument exceeds the horizontal time value, then the vertical offset is adjusted to accommodate the requested offset. the in the command represents the connector number. you can use any connector number from 1 through 4. :sense:correction:mdelay:horizontal? returns the horizontal timing offset of a specific black output. the in the command represents the connector number. you can use any connector number from 1 through 4. :sense:correction:mdelay:horizontal:step sets the step increment used by the up or down commands. the unit is microseconds. you can use up, down, or def instead of the numeric values. the in the command represents the connector number. you can use any connector number from 1 through 4. :sense:correction:mdelay:horizontal:step? returns the step increment used by the up or down commands. the in the command represents the connector number. you can use any connector number from 1 through 4. command tree command description
remote commands 3-8 bg7 black generator user manual :sense:correction:mdelay:vertical sets the vertical timing offset of a specific black output. the argument can be a floating point value that is translated into integer lines with a horizontal offset. you can use up, down, or def instead of a numeric value. the

▲Up To Search▲

Price & Availability of TG700

	To Download TG700 Datasheet File
If you can't view the Datasheet, Please click here to try to view without PDF Reader .